JAA Air Transport Pilot's Licence Theoretical Knowledge Training Objectives

JAA AIR TRANSPORT PILOT’S LICENCE
THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING

LEARNING OBJECTIVES
010 AIR LAW 030 FLIGHT PERFORMANCE & PLANNING
031 Mass & Balance
020 AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE 032 Performance
033 Flight Planning & Monitoring
021 01 Airframes & Systems
Fuselage, Wings & Stabilising Surfaces 040 HUMAN PERFORMANCE & LIMITATIONS
Landing Gear
Flight Controls
Hydraulics
Pneumatic Systems, Air Systems, Air Conditioning, 050 METEOROLOGY
Anti-icing & De-icing
Fuel Systems 060 NAVIGATION
061 General Navigation
021 02 Electrics/Electronics 062 Radio Navigation
Direct Current
Alternating Current
Basic Radio Propagation Theory 070 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
021 03 Powerplant
Piston Engines 080 PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT
Turbines
021 04 Emergency Equipment 090 COMMUNICATIONS
022 Instrumentation
Flight Instruments
Automatic Flight Control Systems
Warning and Recording Equipment
Powerplant & System Monitoring Instruments
JAR AIR LAW
REFERENCE LEARNING OBJECTIVES
010 01 00 00 INTERNATIONAL AGREEMENTS AND ORGANISATIONS

010 01 01 00 The Convention of Chicago
− Historical background
− Explain the worldwide political situation and climate at the end of WW II and its influence on the
Establishment of the Convention on International Civil Aviation
010 01 01 01 Part I Air Navigation
− General principles
− Describe the application of the following terms in Civil Aviation
− Territory, Sovereignty, Suzerainty
− Territorial Waters, High Seas, according to the UN Convention of the High Seas
− Flight over territory of contracting states
− Define the following terms and explain how they apply to the Law of Nations (International Law)
010 01 01 01 − Right for non scheduled flights; scheduled air services, cabotage, landing at customs airports, applicability of air regulations,
rules of the air, search and rescue of ACFT Describe the duties of ICAO Member States in relation to
− Measures to facilitate air navigation; customs duty; conditions to be fulfilled with respect to ACFT; certificates of airworthiness,
licenses of personnel, recognition of certificates and licenses, cargo restrictions, photographic apparatus; documents to be
carried in ACFT
− International standards and recommended practices
− Explain the obligations of each ICAO Member State towards:
− Adoption of international standards and procedures; endorsements of certificates and licenses, validity of endorsed
certificates and licenses; departure from international standards and procedures (notification of differences)
JAR AIR LAW
010 01 01 02 Part II The International Civil Aviation Organisation / ICAO

− Describe and explain the Structure and Objectives of the International Civil Aviation Organisation / ICAO. State whether parts of
the organisation are assembled permanently or periodically
− Assembly
− Council, Secretary
− Commissions
− Explain the Duties of the
− ICAO Headquarters
− Regional structure and Offices
010 01 01 03 Regional structure and offices
− Explain the need for regional structures
− Give a overview over the worldwide ICAO regions and the location of regional offices
− Describe their specific duties compared with those of the ICAO Headquarter
− Give reasons for the establishment of Regional Supplementary Procedures
010 01 01 04 Duties in relation to (ICAO Publications)

− Give reasons for the establishment of the (18) ANNEXES to the Convention. Name their content.
− Describe in a brief summary the content and the area of application of the following documents
− Standards and Recommended Practices
− Docs, SARPS, PANSOPS
− Procedures for Air Navigation Services
− Regional supplementary Procedures
− Regional Air Navigation
− Manuals and Circulars
010 01 02 00
Other international agreements
(Multilateral and bilateral agreements)
JAR AIR LAW
010 01 02 01 The International Air Transit- and Air Transport Agreement

− The Freedoms of the Air
− Explain the presentation of the Air Transit and the Air Transport Agreement at the Conference of Chicago 1944 and their role for
the formulation of the “Five Freedoms of the Air” in Bilateral Agreements for regular Air Transport:
− The Air Transit Agreement
Explain the two technical “Freedoms of the Air” on the basis of the International Air Services
− The Air Transport Agreement
Explain the three commercial “Freedoms of the Air” on the basis of the International Air Transport Agreement, Five Freedoms
Agreement
− The 6th, 7th, 8th and 9th Freedom
Describe the political and legal situation of the Air Transport in Europe after the establishment of the EU and the subsequent
need for the formulation of further “Freedoms of the Air”
− Bilateral Agreements
Inform about the existence of the Chicago Standard form for Bilateral Agreements for regular Air Transport based on the
definitions for the “Freedoms of the Air” defined in the Air Transit an the Air Transport Agreement
010 01 02 02
The Conventions of Tokyo, The Hague, Montreal
Conventions and Supplements for the Suppression of Unlawful Acts against the Safety of Civil Aviation
− Analyse the facts that lead to the Conventions and Supplements against the Safety of Civil Aviation and make a general
statement about the content of the following documents:
− Unlawful Acts Committed on Board Aircraft:
− Convention on Offences and Certain Other Acts Committed on Board Aircraft,
Tokyo 14.9.1963
− Suppression of Unlawful Seizure of Aircraft
− Convention for the Suppression of Unlawful Seizure of Aircraft,
The Hague 16.12.1970
− Convention for the Suppression of Unlawful Acts against the Safety of Civil Aviation,
Montreal 23.9.1971
JAR AIR LAW
− Suppression of Unlawful Acts of Violence at Airports Serving International Civil Aviation

− Supplementary to the Convention for the Suppression of Unlawful Acts against the
Safety of Civil Aviation, Done at Montreal 23.9.1971, signed at Montreal 24.2.1988
− Describe measures and actions taken by ICAO and ECAC in order to suppress Unlawful Acts
against the Safety of Civil Aviation
− Describe measures and actions to be taken by the PIC of the ACFT in order to suppress Unlawful Acts against the Safety of an
ACFT
010 01 02 03
European organisations:
Names, composition, objectives and relevant documents
− European Council, European Union / EU
− Explain the implications of the former EEC and the actual EU with European Aviation on the basis of relevant documents
such as:
General, Structure 91 / 3922 EWG, 16.12.91 92 / 2407 EWG, 23.7.92

Market, European Regional Air Traffic
Licensing 91 / 670 EWG, 16.12.91
Safety 94 / 56 EG, 21.11.94 (Accident Investigation)
− European Civil Aviation Conference / ECAC

− Give a brief summary of the history of ECAC
− Explain the relevant content of basic ECAC documents, such as:
− ECAC, Constitution and Rules of Procedures
− Multilateral Agreement on Commercial Rights of Non-Scheduled Air Services in Europe,

Agreement of Paris, April 30.1956
− Multilateral Agreement relating to Certificates of Airworthiness for imported ACFT,
April 22.1960
JAR AIR LAW
− JAA / Joint Aviation Authorities

− Explain the reasons for the foundation of the JAA at the Convention of Cyprus, Sept. 11.1990
− Give a brief description of the Organisation
− Describe
− the position of the National Aviation Authorities / NAA within the JAA
− the relationship and harmonisation with other International Organisations such as ICAO, regional and national
Organisations
− Explain the reasons for the establishment of the JAR Documents
− Give an overview of the JAR Publications
− Eurocontrol
− Make a statement about the Convention relating to Co-operation for the Safety of Air Navigation (Eurocontrol)
010 01 02 04
Warsaw convention and associated documents
(Multilateral Conventions, Protocols and Agreement / Private Law)
− Analyse and describe on the basis of the following documents the Warsaw System of Conventions,
Protocols and Agreements, designed to cover for liability towards persons and goods
− Convention for the Unification of Certain Rules Relating to International Carriage by Air, Warsaw, October 2. 1929
− Protocol to Amend the Convention for the Unification of Certain Rules Relating to International Carriage by Air, The
Hague, September 28. 1955, cited as the Hague Protocol.
− Convention Supplementary to the Warsaw Convention for the Unification of Certain Rules Relating to International
Carriage by Air Performed by a Person other than the Contracting Carrier, Guadalajara September 18. 1961
− Protocol to Amend the Convention for the Unification of Certain Rules Relating to International Carriage by Air, signed at
Warsaw on October 12,1929 as Amended by the Protocol,
Done at The Hague on September 28. 1955, signed at Guatemala City on March 8. 1971
− Additional Protocols No.1 - 4 to Amend the Convention for the Unification of Certain Rules Relating to International
Carriage by Air, signed at Warsaw on October 12. 1929
JAR AIR LAW
− Explain the legal significance of the issue of a passenger ticket and / or baggage / cargo documents
− Describe the consequences for an airline / the PIC when a passenger tickets is not issued
− Describe the actual development and the situation after the implementation of the IATA Intercarrier Agreement of Kuala Lumpur,
October 31.1995
010 01 03 00 The PIC’s authority and responsibility regarding safety and security
− Explain the authority and responsibility of the PIC regarding safety and security on the basis of
relevant documents
010 01 04 00 Operators and pilots liabilities towards persons and goods on the ground, in case of damage and injury caused by the
operation of the aircraft
− Explain the different systems regarding the coverage for liability in European Countries
− The Convention of Rome
− Analyse the different systems to cover for liability towards persons and goods on the ground on the basis of the document
known as the Convention of Rome and alternative provisions laid down in the legal system of Nations
− International Convention for the Unification of Certain Rules Relating to Damage Caused by ACFT to Third Parties on the
Surface. Signed at Rome on 29 th May 1933
− Protocol supplementing The Convention for the Unification of Certain Rules Relating to Damage Caused by ACFT to Third
Parties on the Surface. Rome 1933, concluded at Brussels 1938
− Convention on Damage by Foreign Aircraft to Third Parties on the Surface, signed October 7.1952
− Protocol to Amend the Convention on Damage Caused by Foreign Aircraft to third Parties on
the Surface, Signed at Rome on October 7. 1952,
Montreal September 23.1978
JAR AIR LAW
010 01 05 00 Commercial practices and associated rules (leasing)

− European Organisations
− Explain the implications of the relevant European documents on commercial practices in European Regional Air Traffic
− Explain the implications of the ECAC Recommendation ECAC / 21-1 on Leasing of ACFT
− WTO / GATS
− Explain the impact of the regulations of the worldwide trade Organisations WTO and their regulations GATS
− Describe the consequences of the General Arrangement of Trade and Services for aviation on the basis of Art 2, 3, 5, 16, 17,
of the treaty
− Rights in Aircraft on Air Traffic
− Explain the legal system for the Recognition of Rights in Aircraft on Air Traffic based on the following Documents:
− Convention for the Unification of Certain Rules Relating to the Precautionary Arrest of Aircraft, Signed at Rome on 29th May
1933
− Convention on the International Recognition of Rights in Aircraft, Geneva June 19. 1948
010 02 00 00 ANNEX 8 – AIRWORTHINESS OF AIRCRAFT (except helicopters)
− Essential Definitions
− Recall the following definitions to such an extent that you can choose the correct one from a series of offered samples:
- Aeroplane, aircraft, configuration, critical power-unit(s), design landing mass, design take-off mass, design taxiing mass, final
approach and take-off area / FATO (except helicopters), landing surface, power- unit, pressure altitude, standard atmosphere
(general concept only), State of design, State of registry, take-off surface
− Administration
− State who is supposed to issue a Certificate of Airworthiness / C of A
− State who shall determine the continuity of an aircraft’s airworthiness
− Describe how a Certificate of Airworthiness can be renewed or shall remain valid
JAR AIR LAW
− Explain who takes the decision whether a damaged ACFT is airworthy or not
− Note: The standards of Annex 8 / Part III represent the core of the airworthiness regulations covered in Annex 8
− State, to which aeroplanes these Standards shall apply
− State to which parts of an aeroplane the Standards of Annex 8 Part III apply
− State whether there is any Statement about the minimum number of power-units required for
aeroplanes the Airworthiness Standards of which are covered by Annex 8 Part III
010 03 00 00 ANNEX 7 – AIRCRAFT NATIONALITY AND REGISTRATION MARKS

− Foreword
− State that ANNEX 7 contains only Standards but not Recommendations
010 03 00 00 − Essential Definitions:
− Recall the following definitions to such an extent that you are able to choose the correct one from a series of offered samples:
Aeroplane, aircraft, heavier-than-air aircraft,
State of registry
− Nationality, common and registration marks to be used

− Explain the combination of nationality and registration marks (sequence, use of hyphen)
− State who is responsible for assigning registration marks and how registration marks may be composed
− Certificate of registration
− Describe where the certificate of registration shall be kept at all times
− ACFT Nationality and Registration Marks

− State where a List of the ACFT nationality and common marks has been used
JAR AIR LAW
010 03 00 00
− Differences between national regulations
Differences between the national regulations and practices of States and the corresponding international Standards contained in
ANNEX 7
− Indicate in which form ANNEX 7 contains information concerning
− Contracting States which have notified ICAO of differences
− Contracting States which have notified ICAO that no differences exist
− Contracting States from which no information has been received
− Summary of differences
010 04 00 00 ANNEX 1 – PERSONNEL LICENSING

− Status of ANNEX components
− Define the term “Standard“
− Define the term “Recommended Practice“ or “Recommendation“ respectively
− Essential Definitions (as far as not defined in JAR-Documents)
− Recall the following definitions to such an extent that you can choose the correct one from a series of offered samples
Aeroplane, aircraft, aircraft - category, aircraft certificated for single-pilot operation, aircraft - type of, certify as airworthy (to),
co-pilot, dual instruction time, flight crew member, flight plan, flight procedures trainer, flight simulator, flight time, instrument
flight time, instrument ground time, instrument time, maintenance, medical assessment, pilot (to), pilot-in-command, rating,
rendering (a license) valid, synthetic flight trainer (flight simulator, flight procedures trainer, basic instrument flight trainer)
010 04 00 00 − JAR-FCL - Flight Crew Licensing

− Foreword and Preamble
− Describe the relationship of JAR-FCL to ICAO ANNEX 1
− State the meaning of the abbreviation “JAR-FCL“
− Indicate the general content of JAR-FCL 1 / 2 / 3
JAR AIR LAW
− JAR-FCL 1 / General Requirements

− Recall the following definitions to such extent, that you can choose the correct one from
a series of offered samples
Category of ACFT, dual instruction time, flight time, flight time as SPIC, instrument time,
instrument flight time, instrument ground time, MCC, multi-pilot-aeroplanes, night, PPL,
CPL, proficiency check, rating, renewal, revalidation, skill test, solo flight time, type of ACFT
− Explain the requirements to act as a flight crew member of a civil aeroplane registered in a JAA
Member State
− State to what extent JAA Member States will accept Licences etc. issued by other JAA Member
States
010 04 00 00 − List the maximum period of time for which the different Licences may be issued Describe the two factors which are relevant
for the validity of a Licence
− State the requirement regarding a medical certificate
− When applying for a Licence
− When exercising the privileges of a Licence
− Explain why a Pilot shall not exercise the privileges of a Licence, related ratings or authorisations
when he is aware of any decrease in medical fitness
− List the restrictions for Licence holders with an age of 60 years or more
− Define the term “State of Licence Issue“
− Explain the term “Normal Residency“ for normal circumstances
− Describe the specifications for flight crew Licences as mentioned in Appendix 1 to JAR-FCL 1.075
010 04 00 00 − JAR-FCL 1 / Commercial Pilot Licence (Aeroplane) - CPL(A)
− Name the minimum age to obtain a CPL(A)
− State the class of medical certificate by which an applicant for CPL(A) shall prove the required medical fitness
− Name the kind of medical certificate required when exercising the privileges of a CPL(A)
− State the class of aeroplane on which a CPL(A) holder has the privilege to act as PIC in Commercial Air Transport
− State which pilot‘s Licence is required to act as co-pilot in Commercial Air Transportation
JAR AIR LAW
− JAR - FCL 1 / Airline Transport Pilot Licence (Aeroplane) - ATPL(A)

− Name the minimum age for an ATPL(A)
− State the class of medical certificate required for an ATPL(A)
− Describe the privileges of the holder of an ATPL(A) with regard to aeroplanes engaged in Air Transportation
− State the total flight experience required for an ATPL(A)
010 04 00 00 − JAR - FCL 1 / Ratings
− Explain the requirements for Class- Type Ratings, Instrument Flight and Instructor Ratings laid down in the JAR-FCL
− JAR-FCL 3 / Medical Requirements
− Describe the relevant content of JAR-FCL 3 - Medical Requirements
(Only administrative parts and requirements related to licensing)
010 05 00 00 RULES OF THE AIR (based on ANNEX 2)

010 05 01 00 ANNEX 2
− Recall the definitions issued in ANNEX 2 to such an extent that you can choose the correct one from a series of offered
samples, except:
acrobatic flight, air-ground control radio station, air taxiing, flight status, unmanned free balloon
010 05 01 00 − Applicability of the Rules of the Air

− Explain to which extent the ICAO Rules of the Air apply in general
− Explain to which extent the ICAO Rules of the Air apply over the High Seas
− State the three possible rules which must be complied with on the movement area of an AD or when in flight
− State who decides about flying IFR or VFR in VMC
− State who aboard an ACFT is primarily responsible for the operation of the ACFT in accordance with the Rules of the Air
− Indicate under which circumstances departure from the Rules of the Air may be allowed
− Explain the duties of the PIC concerning pre-flight actions in case of an IFR flight
− State who has the final authority as to the disposition of the ACFT
− Explain the interrelation between intoxicating liquor, narcotics or drugs and the assignment to act as a flight crew member
JAR AIR LAW
010 05 01 00 − General Rules

− State the basic requirements for minimum height over congested areas of cities, towns or settlements or over an open-air
assembly of persons
− Define when the cruising levels shall be expressed in terms of Fls
− Define under what circumstances cruising levels shall be expressed in terms of altitudes
− Explain the limitation for proximity to other ACFT and the Rules for the Right-of-Way, including holding at taxi-holding
positions and lighted stop bars
− Describe the significance of Light Signals displayed to and by ACFT
− Describe the requirements for simulated instrument flights
− Indicate the basic rules for an ACFT operating on and in the vicinity of an AD
− Give a survey of the requirements for the submission of a flight plan (PLN)
− Describe the contents of a flight plan (PLN)
− Explain the considerations concerning changes to a flight plan (PLN)
010 05 01 00 − State how an arrival report shall be made after landing by a flight for which a flight plan (PLN) has been submitted covering
the entire flight or the remaining portion of a flight to the destination AD
− Describe which items must be included in an arrival report
− Describe the standard time as used in aviation
− State for which flights an ATC CLR shall be obtained
− State how a pilot may request an ATC CLR
− State the action to be taken if an ATC CLR is not satisfactory to a PIC
− Describe the possible reasons for not adhering to a current flight plan
− State the deviation from TAS, to be reported to the appropriate ATS Service Unit
− State the flight time deviation for the estimate over the next RP, that has to be reported to the appropriate ATS unit
− Describe the required actions to be carried out, if the continuation of a controlled VFR flight in VMC is not practicable
anymore
JAR AIR LAW
010 05 01 00 − Describe the provisions for transmitting a position report to the appropriate air traffic services unit including time of
transmission and normal content of the message
− Describe the necessary action of an ACFT when experiencing COM failure
− State what information an ACFT being subjected to unlawful interference shall give to the appropriate ATS unit
− Explain why ICAO urges the Contracting States to apply ICAO recommendations concerning interceptions of civil aircraft in a
uniform manner
− State the deviation from TAS, to be reported to the appropriate ATS Service Unit
− State the flight time deviation of an estimate for the next RP, that has to be reported to the appropriate ATS unit
− Describe the required actions to be carried out, if the continuation of a controlled VFR flight in VMC is not practicable
anymore
− Describe the provisions for transmitting a position report to the appropriate air traffic services unit including time of
transmission and normal content of the message
010 05 01 00 − Describe the necessary action of an ACFT when experiencing COM failure
− State what information an ACFT being subjected to unlawful interference shall give to the appropriate ATS unit
− Explain why ICAO urges the Contracting States to apply ICAO recommendations concerning interceptions of civil aircraft in a
uniform manner
− Visual Flight Rules / VFR

− Recall the entire set of Visual Flight Rules as contained in the appropriate Chapter 4 of ANNEX 2, with special emphasis laid
upon VFR-minima and VFR-cruising levels as well as the general application of the classification of Airspace
− Instrument Flight Rules / IFR
− Give complete information about the required minimum levels for IFR-flights
− State the rules which must be followed when changing from IFR to VFR
− State the rules for IFR-flights within and outside CTA
with special emphasis upon the cruising levels to be used
010 05 01 00 − Signals
− Recall the entire set of signals described in Appendix 1 to ANNEX 2,
except marshalling signals for helicopters (No. 16 through 20)
−
JAR AIR LAW
− Interception of Civil Aircraft

− State the primary task for interception of civil ACFT by military ACFT
− List the possible reasons for intercepting a civil ACFT besides determining its identity
− State what primary reaction is expected of an intercepted ACFT
− State which FREQ should primarily be tried to get in contact with the intercepting ACFT
− State on which Mode and Code a transponder on board the intercepted ACFT should be operated
− Tables of cruising levels
− Show your capability to use the tables of cruising levels contained in Appendix 3 of ANNEX 2
010 06 00 00 PROCEDURES FOR AIR NAVIGATION SERVICES / AIRCRAFT OPERATIONS
DOC 8168 / Vol. 1 – Flight Procedures
010 06 01 00 Foreword
− Translate the term “PANS-OPS“ into plain language
− State the general aim of Doc. 8168 (PANS-OPS)
010 06 02 00 Essential Definitions and Abbreviations

− Recall all definitions includes in Doc. 8168 1 to such an extent that you can choose
the correct definition from a series of offered samples
− Essential Abbreviations used in Doc. 8168
− Interpret all abbreviations as shown in Chapter 2
JAR AIR LAW
010 06 03 00 Departure Procedures

− General Criteria
− Explain whether or not the departure procedures described in this Document assume that all engines are operating
− Name in general the factors which dictate the design of an instrument departure procedure
− Decode the abbreviation “ATTCS”
− Explain in which situations the criteria for omnidirectional departures are applied
− Describe the alternative solution for flights which can only depart at higher speeds than prescribed for turning departures (i.e.
in case of required turns of more than 15° to avoid an obstacle)
− Standard Instrument Departures
− Define the term “straight departure“ as opposed to a “turning departure“
− State who is responsible for the development of contingency procedures required to cover the case of engine failure or an
emergency in flight which occurs after V1
010 06 03 00 − Omnidirectional Departures
− Explain in which case the “omnidirectional method“ is used to develop the departure criteria
− Describe the possible solutions if obstacles do not permit development of omnidirectional procedures
− Published Information
− State the conditions that must be fulfilled if a departure route is to be labeled an RNAV route
− Describe how restrictions for omnidirectional departures will be expressed in the appropriate publication
− Area Navigation (RNAV) Departure Procedures Based on VOR / DME
− Explain the connection between RNAV departure procedures based on VOR/DME and RNAV approach procedures based on
VOR / DME
− Use of FMS / RNAV Equipment to Follow Conventional Departure Procedures
− State the provisions for using FMS / RNAV equipment when flying the conventional departure procedures
JAR AIR LAW
010 06 04 00 Approach Procedures

− General Criteria (except tables “Speeds for procedure calculations")
− Name the five possible segments of an instrument approach procedure
− State the maximum angle between the final approach track and the extended RWY centreline to still consider a non-
precision-approach as being “Straight-In APP“
− State the minimum obstacle clearance provided by the minimum sector altitudes / MSA established for an AD
− Name the special task for pilots caused by the fact that instrument approach procedures are based on tracks
− Name the most significant performance factor influencing the conduct of instrument APP procedures
− State the basic information (or conditions) for establishing the five categories of typical ACFT in connection with the
description of instrument APP procedures
− State the aim for using five defined categories of typical ACFT when describing instrument APP procedures
− List the five categories of ACFT used in connection with instrument APP procedures
010 06 04 00 − Explain OCA / H for a precision APP procedure, a non-precision APP and a visual (circling) procedure
− Describe, in general terms, how operational minima for landing are developed
− Name the operational minima which are finally produced starting from OCA / H in case of precision approaches or non-
precision approaches respectively
− Explain when OCH is referring to THR ELEV and when to AD ELEV (differentiating between precision approach, non-
precision approach and visual manoeuvring (circling))
− Relate the highest approach obstacle, the highest missed approach obstacle and the highest obstacle in circling area to
precision approach, non-precision approach and visual manoeuvring
− Translate the abbreviations used with the calculation of decision altitude, decision height, minimum descent altitude and
minimum descent height into plain language: DA / DH / OCA / OCH / MDA / MDH / MOC / DA/H / OCA/H / MDA/H
− State the minimum obstacle clearance (fixed margin for all ACFT) with and without final APP fix for a non-precision approach
JAR AIR LAW
010 06 04 00 − Approach Procedure Design

− Describe how the vertical cross-section for each of the five approach segments is broken down into the various areas
− State within which area of the cross-section the Minimum Obstacle Clearance (MOC) is provided for the whole width of the
area
− Define the terms IAF, IF, FAF, MAPt and TP
− Name the area within which the plotted point of an intersection fix may lie
− Explain by which factors the dimensions of an intersection fix are determined
− State the accuracy of facilities providing track (VOR, ILS, NDB)
− Describe the “other fix tolerance factors“:
− Surveillance Radar (Terminal Area Radar / TAR, En-route surveillance radar / RSR): DME; 75 MHz Marker Beacon; Fixes
overhead a station (VOR, NDB)
− Describe the basic information for approach area sectors
− State the optimum descent gradient (preferred for a precision approach) in degrees and percent
010 06 04 00 − Arrival and Approach Segments
− Name the five standard segments of an instrument APP procedure and state beginning and end for each of them
− Describe where an ARR route normally ends
− State whether or not omnidirectional or sector arrivals can be provided
− Explain the main task for the initial APP segment
− Describe the maximum angle of interception between the initial APP segment and the intermediate APP segment (provided at
the intermediate fix) for a precision APP and a non-precision APP
− Describe the main task of the intermediate APP segment
− State the main task of the final APP segment
− Name the two possible aims of a final APP
− Explain the term “final approach point“ in case of an ILS approach
− State what happens if an ILS-GP becomes inoperative during the APP
JAR AIR LAW
010 06 04 00 − Missed Approach

− Name the three phases of a missed approach procedure and describe their geometric limits
− Describe the main task of a missed approach procedure
− State in which height / altitude the missed approach is assured to be initiated
− Define the term “missed approach point (MAPt)“
− Describe how an MAPt may be established in an approach procedure
− State the pilot‘s reaction if, upon reaching the MAPt, the required visual reference is not established
− Describe what a pilot is expected to do in the event a missed approach is initiated prior to arriving
at the MAPt State whether the pilot is obliged to cross the MAPt at the height / altitude required by the procedure or whether
he is allowed to cross the MAPt at an altitude / height greater than that
required by the procedure
− Visual manoeuvering (circling) in the vicinity of the AD
− Describe what is meant by “visual manoeuvring (circling)“
010 06 04 00
− Describe how a visual manoeuvring (circling) area can be constructed
− Describe how a prominent obstacle in the visual manoeuvring (circling) area outside the final approach and missed approach
area has to be considered for the visual circling
− State for which types of ACFT the obstacle clearance altitude/height within an established visual manoeuvring (circling) area
is determined
− Describe how an MDA/H is specified for visual manoeuvring (circling) if the OCA /H is known
− State the conditions to be fulfilled before descending below MDA / H in a visual manoeuvring (circling) approach
− Describe why there can be no single procedure designed that will cater for conducting a circling approach in every situation
− State how the pilot is expected to behave after initial visual contact during a visual manoeuvring (circling)
− Describe what the pilot is expected to do if visual reference is lost while circling to land from an instrument approach
JAR AIR LAW
010 06 04 00 − Area Navigation (RNAV) Approach Procedures based on VOR / DME

− Describe the provisions that must be fulfilled before carrying out VOR / DME RNAV approaches
− Explain the disadvantages of the VOR / DME RNAV system
− List the factors on which the navigational accuracy of the VOR / DME RNAV system depends
− State whether the VOR / DME / RNAV approach is a precision or a non-precision procedure
− Use of FMS / RNAV equipment to follow conventional non-precision approach procedures

− State the provisions for flying the conventional non-precision approach procedures using an available FMS / RNAV
equipment
010 06 05 00 Holding Procedures
− In-flight Procedures
− Explain why deviations from the in-flight procedures of a holding established in accordance with Doc. 8168 are dangerous
010 06 05 00 − Describe how the right turns holdings (as described in Doc. 8168) can be transferred to left turns holding patterns
− Describe the shape and terminology associated with the holding pattern
− State the bank angle and rate of turn to be used whilst flying in a holding
− Explain why pilots in a holding pattern should attempt to maintain tracks and how this can be achieved
− Describe where outbound timing begins in a holding pattern
− State where the outbound leg in a holding terminates if the outbound leg is based on DME
− Describe the three heading-entry-sectors for entries into a holding pattern and at the same time define the terms “parallel
entry“, “offset entry“ and “direct entry“
− State the still air time for flying the outbound entry heading with or without DME
− Describe what the pilot is expected to do when clearance is received specifying the time of departure from the holding point
010 06 05 00 − Obstacle Clearance
− Describe the layout of the basic holding area, entry area and buffer area of a holding pattern
− State which obstacle clearance is provided by a minimum permissible holding level referring to the
holding area, the buffer area (general only) and over high terrain or in mountainous area
JAR AIR LAW
010 06 06 00 Altimeter Setting Procedures

− Introduction
− Describe the two main objectives for altimeter settings
− Define the terms “QNH“ and “QFE“
− Describe the different terms of altitude or flight levels respectively which are the references during
climb or descent to change the altimeter setting from QNH to 1013,2 hPa and vice versa
010 06 06 00 − Basic Requirements
− Define the term “flight level / FL“
− State where flight level zero shall be located
− State the pressure interval by which consecutive flight levels shall be separated
− Describe how flight levels shall be numbered
− Define the term “transition altitude“
− State how transition altitudes shall normally be specified
− Explain how the calculated height of the transition altitude (which shall be as low as possible but
normally not less than 900 m / 3000 ft above the AD) shall be expressed in practice
− State where transition altitudes shall be published
− Define the term “transition level“
− State when the transition level is normally passed to ACFT
− State how (in terms of altitudes or flight levels) the vertical position of aircraft shall be expressed at or below the transition
altitude and how this shall be done at or above the transition level
− Define the term “transition layer“
JAR AIR LAW
010 06 06 00 − Describe when the vertical position of an aircraft passing through the transition layer shall be expressed in terms of flight
levels and when in terms of altitude
− State when the QNH altimeter setting shall be made available to departing ACFT
− Explain when the vertical separation of aircraft during en-route flight shall be assessed in terms of altitude and when in terms
of flight levels
− Explain when, in air-ground communications during an en-route flight the vertical position of an ACFT shall be expressed in
terms of altitude and when in terms of flight levels
− Describe why QNH altimeter setting reports should be provided from sufficient locations
− State how a QNH altimeter setting shall be made available to ACFT approaching a controlled
AD for landing
− State under which circumstances the vertical positioning of an ACFT above the transition
level may be by reference to altitudes (QNH)
010 06 06 00
− Procedures Applicable to Operators and Pilots
− Name the three different “qualities“ the altitudes or flight levels selected for a flight should have
− Describe a preflight operational test in case of QNH setting and in case of QFE setting including
indication (error) tolerances referred to the different test ranges
− State on which setting at least one altimeter shall be set prior to taking off
− State where during climb the altimeter setting shall be changed from QNH to 1013,2 hPa
− Describe when a pilot of an ACFT intending to land at an AD shall obtain the “number“ of the
transition level
− Describe when a pilot of an ACFT intending to land at an AD shall obtain the actual QNH altimeter setting
− State where the altimeter settings shall be changed from 1013,2 hPa to QNH during descent for
landing
JAR AIR LAW
010 06 06 00 − Simultaneous Operation on parallel or near-parallel RWY’s

− Describe the two basic modes, applicable to simultaneous parallel instrument approaches
− Describe the following different operations:
− Simultaneous instrument departures; segregated parallel approaches / departures; semi-mixed and mixed opns
− State what you understand by “NOZ“ and “NTZ“
− name the airborne requirements (equipment) for conducting parallel approaches
− State which kind of approaches (Straight-in, Circling etc.) parallel approaches have to be conducted
− State whether or not radar monitoring is required for simultaneous independent parallel approaches and how weather conditions
are of influence thereto
− State the maximum angle of interception for ILS localizer CRS on MLS final APP Track in case of simultaneous independent
parallel approaches
− State conditions that must be met before vertical separation between two ACFT flying simultaneous independent approaches can
be reduced below 300 m / 1000 feet
− Describe the special conditions for tracks on missed approaches and departures with parallel operations
010 06 07 00
Secondary Surveillance RADAR (SSR) Transponder Operating Procedures
− Operation of Transponders
− State when and where the pilot shall operate the transponder provided the ACFT carries a
serviceable transponder
− State on which mode and code the pilot shall operate the transponder in the absence of any ATC
directions or regional air navigation agreements (except in cases of emergency, COM failure or
unlawful interference)
− Indicate in what circumstances the pilot shall operate the Mode C, unless otherwise directed by
ATC, provided the Transponder of the ACFT is equipped with Mode C
− State whether or not the pilot shall “SQUAWK IDENT“ at his own discretion
− Describe the accuracy with which level information shall be given by the pilot in air / ground RTF
communications whilst the transponder is operated in Mode C
JAR AIR LAW
010 06 07 00 − State to which mode and code a pilot shall set the transponder of his ACFT
− in a state of emergency or indicating a COM failure
− if his ACFT is subject to unlawful interference in flight
− Describe the consequences following a transponder failure in flight

− State the primary action of the pilot in the case of a unservicable transponder before departure when no repair or replacement
at this aerodrome is possible
Phraseology
− State how pilots shall acknowledge mode / code setting instructions
− Operation of ACAS equipment

− Define the term “ACAS“
− Describe the intention of ACAS indications
− Describe what reaction is expected by a pilot who deviates from ATC instructions or the CLR in response to a resolution
advisory
010 07 00 00 ANNEX 11 - AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES / ATS
010 07 01 00 − Essential Definitions

− Recall the following definitions to such an extent that you can choose the correct one from a series of offered samples, all
definitions given in ANNEX 11 except the following ones:
accepting unit, accuracy, air-taxiing, conference communications, cyclic redundancy check (CRC), data quality, geodetic
datum, integrity (aeronautical data), printed communications, station declination
JAR AIR LAW
010 07 01 01
− General
− Name the objectives of the air traffic services / ATS
− Describe
− the three basic air traffic services / ATS
− the three basic air traffic control services / ATC
− State the designation for those portions of the airspace where flight information service / FIS and alerting service will be provided
− State the designations for those portions of the airspace where ATC service will be provided
010 07 01 01 − Indicate whether or not CTAs and CTRs designated within a FIR shall form part of that FIR
− Distinguish between the various classes of airspace (A through G) and explain whether
− IFR or VFR flights are permitted
− what kind of air traffic services are offered (e.g. air traffic control service, separation,
traffic information, air traffic advisory service, flight information service)
− State the meaning of the expressions RNP 4, RNP 1 etc. (see also definitions)
− Describe the purpose for establishing FICs
− State the reason for the establishment of ATC units
JAR AIR LAW
010 07 01 01 − Airspace
− Explain which airspace shall be included in an FIR
− Name the lower limit of a CTA as far as ICAO standards are concerned
− State whether or not the lower limit of a CTA has to be established uniformly
− Explain why an UIR or Upper CTA should be delineated to include the Upper Airspace within the lateral limits of a number of
lower FIR or CTAs
− Describe in general the lateral limits of CTRs
− State the minimum extension (in NM) of the lateral limits of a CTR
− State the upper limits of a CTR located within the lateral limits of a CTA
− Minimum Flight Altitudes
− State where MNM Flight Altitudes shall be determined (and promulgated) and who is responsible for this
− Emergencies
− Describe the operation of a transponder (Mode and Code) in case of distress, emergency or unlawful interference
010 07 01 01 − State on which emergency frequency a pilot can expect the ATS to contact him in case of an interception
− Time units
− Name the time units used by ATS
JAR AIR LAW
010 07 01 02 Air Traffic Control Service / ATC

− Provision of ATC
− Name all classes of airspace in which ATC shall be provided
− Name the ATS units providing ATC service (area control centre, approach control service, aerodrome control tower)
− Describe which unit(s) may be assigned with the task to provide specified services on the apron
− Name the purpose of clearances and information issued by an ATC unit
− Describe the aim of clearances issued by ATC with regard to IFR, VFR or special VFR flights and refer to the different airspaces
010 07 01 02 − Separation
− State how separation between ACFT shall be obtained by an ATC unit
− State the ICAO documents in which details of current separation minima are prescribed
− Clearances
− List the various (five possible) parts of an ATC clearance
− Describe the various aspects of clearance co-ordination
− State how ATC shall react when it becomes apparent that traffic, additional to that one already
accepted, can not be accommodated (or only at a given time)
− Control of persons and vehicles at aerodromes

− Explain why the movement of persons, vehicles and towed ACFT on the manoeuvring area of an AD shall be controlled by the AD
TWR (as necessary)
JAR AIR LAW
010 07 01 03 Flight Information Service / FIS
− Applicability and scope of FIS

− State for which aircraft FIS shall be provided
− State whether or not FIS shall include the provision of pertinent SIGMET and AIRMET information
− State which information FIS shall include in addition to SIGMET and AIRMET information
− Indicate which other information the FIS shall include in addition to the special information given in ANNEX 11
− Operational FIS broadcasts

− Name the three major types of operational FIS broadcasts
− Give the meaning of the acronym ATIS in plain language
− Show that you are acquainted with the basic conditions for transmitting an ATIS as indicated in ANNEX 11
− Mention the four possible messages
− List the basic information concerning ATIS broadcasts (e.g. frequencies used, number of ADs included, updating,
identification, acknowledgment of receipt, language and channels, ALT setting)
010 07 01 04 − Alerting Service
− Indicate the ACFT to which alerting service shall be provided
− Name the unit which shall be notified by the responsible ATS unit immediately an ACFT is considered to be in a state of
emergency
− Name the three stages of emergency and describe the basic conditions for each kind of emergency
− Show knowledge of the meaning of the expressions INCERFA, ALERFA and DETRESFA
− Describe limiting conditions for the information of ACFT in the vicinity of an ACFT being in a state of emergency
010 07 01 05
− Appendix 1 to ANNEX 11
− Describe the reason for establishing a system of route designators and required navigation performance (RNP)
− State whether or not a prescribed RNP type is considered an integral part of the ATS route designator
− Show general knowledge of the composition of an ATS route designator
010 07 01 05 − Appendix 4
− Show knowledge of all information concerning ATS airspace classification (as described in Appendix 4 to ANNEX 11)
JAR AIR LAW
010 07 02 00
Missing Number
This number is missing in AMC-FCL 1.4
010 07 03 00
Rules of the air and air traffic service – Doc 4444 - RAC / 501/11
(Differences in Doc. 7030 - Regional Supplementary Procedures)
− Explain in plain language, the meaning of the abbreviation “PANS-RAC“.
− Recall all definitions given in Doc 4444 to such an extent that you can choose the correct one
from a series of offered samples except the following:
accepting unit / controller, AD taxi circuit, aeronautical fixed service (AFS), aeronautical fixed station, air-taxiing, allocation, approach
funnel, assignment, data convention, data processing, discrete code, D-value, flight status, ground effect, normal operating zone
(NOZ), no transgression zone, receiving unit / controller, sending unit / controller, transfer of control point, transferring unit / controller,
unmanned free balloon
− Relationship to other documents

Describe the relationship between Doc 4444 and other documents
010 07 03 01
General Provisions
− State whether or not the procedures described in Doc. 4444 are directed exclusively to ATS services personnel
− State whether or not a clearance issued by ATC units does include prevention of collision with terrain and if there is one
exception to this. Name this exception
− State how a flight plan should be submitted prior to departure and to which ATS unit it should normally be delivered
− State, for a controlled or an uncontrolled flight for which a flight plan has been submitted, the delay after which a flight plan shall
be amended or a new flight plan filed
− Explain
− how the change from IFR to VFR can be initiated by a PIC
− how the appropriate ATS unit shall reply upon a request for a change from IFR to VFR
− what kind of known traffic conditions are the basis for ATC clearances
− the procedures to be followed or to be expected when an ATC clearance is not suitable to the PIC of an ACFT
− accommodated within a given period of time
JAR AIR LAW
010 07 03 01 − the general aim for the issuance of ATC clearances by air traffic services units
− how a PIC (or an operator) may be involved if traffic, additional to that already accepted, can not be
− Describe the complete ALT setting procedures, which include
− Expressing the vertical position of an ACFT in the vicinity of an AD
− Defining the expressions transition level and transition altitude (see definitions)
− Indicating the expression of vertical position when ascending or descending through the transition layer
− Describing the reasons which call for the expression of the vertical position of the ACFT in terms of height above THR ELEV
− Stating how the vertical position of an ACFT shall be expressed in case of en route flights
− Mentioning who shall establish the transition level to be used in the vicinity of the relevant AD
− Explaining the term “Transition Level / TL“
010 07 03 01 − Stating whether or not the pilot can request the TL to be included in the APP CLR
− Describing when QNH ALT setting will be given to arriving or departing ACFT
− Stating when the QFE shall not refer to the AD ELEV
− Stating whether or not the ALT setting is rounded up and if so to what extent this is done
− Describe when and where the term “Heavy“ shall be included in an initial RTF message and
to what class of ACFT it is applicable
− State where the specifications for wake turbulence categories can be found
− Explain the meaning of the abbreviation “MLS“
− State when the appropriate MLS capability designator shall be included in RTF contact
− Describe where position reports shall be made on routes defined by designated significant points
− Describe the contents of position reports as well as the possible exceptions pending upon regional air navigation agreements or
when using SSR Mode C
JAR AIR LAW
010 07 03 01 − Explain the meaning of the abbreviation ADS

− Describe how ADS reports shall be made
− State to which unit an ADS report shall be made
− Explain the meaning of the code word AIRPROX
− Describe when an Air Traffic Incident Report / ATIR has to be established and to whom it should be submitted
− Explain the meaning of the abbreviation “ACAS“
− Describe the difference in providing air traffic services to ACFT equipped with ACAS and to ACFT not equipped with ACAS
− Report whether or not ATC controllers will normally be informed about the ACAS capability of an ACFT
010 07 03 02 Area Control Service / ACC

− General provisions for the separation of controlled traffic
− Name the two basic kinds of separation used in aviation
− Discriminate the type of separation provided within the various classes of airspace
− between flights of all types of flight rules
− between flights according to IFR
− between flights according to IFR and flights according to VFR
− between flights according to IFR and flights according to Special VFR
− between Special VFR flights
− Vertical separation
− Describe how vertical separation is obtained
− State the required vertical separation minimum
− Describe how minimum flight altitudes and lowest usable flight levels correspond to each other
− Describe how the cruising levels of ACFT flying to the same destination at the expected approach sequence are correlated
between each other
010 07 03 02 − Name the conditions that must be adhered to, when two ACFT are cleared to maintain a specified
vertical separation between them during climb or descent
−
JAR AIR LAW
− Horizontal separation
− List the two main methods for horizontal separation
− Describe how lateral separation of ACFT at the same level may be obtained
− Explain the term “Geographical Separation“
− Describe track separation between ACFT using the same navigation aid or method
− Describe the three basic means for the establishment of longitudinal separation
− Reduction in separation
− Describe the circumstances under which a reduction in separation minima may be allowed
010 07 03 02 − ATC Clearances
− State why ATC clearances must be issued “early enough“ to en-route ACFT
− Prove that you are acquainted with the required contents of a clearance as given in DOC 4444 of ANNEX 11
− Define the term “clearance limit“
− Explain the meaning of the following terms: “cleared via flight planned route“, “cleared via (designation) departure” and
“cleared via (designation arrival”
− State whether or not a clearance for a controlled flight can only concern level flight, climb or descent whilst maintaining own
separation in VMC
− Explain the meaning of the term “essential traffic“
− List the content of essential traffic information
− State whether in case of a level change en-route if more than one level has been given in the
original flight plan all levels shall be included in the re-clearance or only the changed level
JAR AIR LAW
010 07 03 02 − Emergency and communication failure

− State the Mode and Code of SSR equipment a pilot might operate in a (general) state of emergency or (specifically) in case
the ACFT is subject to unlawful interference
− state the special rights an ACFT in a state of emergency can expect from ATC
− Describe the expected action of ACFT after receiving a broadcast from ATS concerning the emergency descent of an ACFT
− State how it can be ascertained, in case of a failure of two-way communication, whether the ACFT is able to receive
transmissions from the ATS unit
− Explain the assumption based on which separation shall be maintained if an ACFT is known to have COM failure in VMC or in
IMC
− State on which frequencies appropriate information, for an ACFT encountering two way COM failure, will be sent by ATS
− Describe the expected activities of an ATS-unit after having learned that an aircraft is being intercepted in or outside its area
of responsibility
JAR AIR LAW
010 07 03 03 Approach Control Service / APP

− Departing ACFT
− Describe
− the essential content of an Air Traffic Control CLR for departing ACFT
− the considerations the PIC has to make whenever ATC gives a take-off direction other than into the wind
− Explain the kind of general CLR limits used in the case of a CLR for a climb “maintaining own separation in VMC“
− Mention the kind of significant changes in the MET conditions in the take-off or climb-out area that should be transmitted to a
departing ACFT without delay
− List the information in addition to MET conditions which shall be transmitted to departing ACFT
− Arriving ACFT
− State where arriving aircraft may be required to report to enable ATC to expedite departing ACFT
− State whether it is possible to clear descending ACFT to maintain own separation whilst in VMC
− Explain the meaning of the term “Visual Approach “Inform about the required provisions to perform a visual approach.
Indicate if separation will be provided between an ACFT performing a visual approach and other arriving and departing ACFT
JAR AIR LAW
010 07 03 03 − Define the term “Ceiling“

− State the primary requirement for the execution of a visual approach and for the issuance of the appropriate CLR
− Describe what conditions must be met concerning the reported ceiling if a visual approach is
planned
− State which information shall be given to the pilot by ATC if he is obviously not familiar with the
instrument approach procedure and no CLR for a straight-in approach may be expected
− Explain how a pilot has to react when visual contact with terrain is established before completion
of the APP procedure and when he desires to continue visually
− Describe who establishes procedures in accordance with which holding and holding pattern entry
shall be accomplished
− Describe how levels at holding points shall normally be assigned
− State in which situations an ACFT may be given a special priority with regard to the APP sequence
010 07 03 03 − Name two alternative ways to issue an appropriate clearance to an aircraft within an approach sequence if the pilot indicates
his intention to hold for weather improvement or for other reasons, when other holding aircraft indicate their intention to
continue their approach-to-land
− Define the term “expected approach time (EAT)” and explain the difference to the “estimated time of arrival (ETA).
− State the reason for determining an EAT and state the time involved
− Name the anticipated delay which causes a revised EAT to be forwarded
− List the four main groups of information which shall be transmitted to the ACFT as early as practicable after communication
has been established with the unit providing APP control service
− Define the term “final approach“
− List the three main groups of information which shall be transmitted to the ACFT at the commencement of final approach
− List the five main groups of information which shall be transmitted without delay to an ACFT on final approach
JAR AIR LAW
010 07 03 04 Aerodrome Control Service

− Function of an Aerodrome Control Tower
− General
− Describe the general task of a TWR with regard to issuing information and CLR to ACFT under its control
− List for which ACFT and their given positions or flight situations TWRs shall prevent collisions
− Name the AD equipment the operational failure or irregularity of which shall be immediately reported by the TWR
− State that, in case that an ACFT does not land within a certain period of time, the TWR shall report to the ACC or FIC.
State the duration of that period of time
− Describe the procedures to be observed by the TWR whenever VFR operations are suspended
− Selection of RWY in use
− Explain the term “RWY-in-use“
− State the reasons which could eventually lead to the decision to use another take-off or landing direction than the one into the
wind
010 07 03 04
− Name the possible consequences for a PIC if the “RWY-in-use“ is not considered suitable for the operation involved
− Information to ACFT by TWR

− List the series of information TWRs should give to ACFT
Prior to taxi for take off
Prior to take off
Prior to enter the traffic circuit
− Control of aerodrome traffic / Circuit

− State who is responsible for the avoidance of collision with other ACFT when operating in VMC
− Explain the term “essential local traffic“
− Give examples of essential information on AD conditions as listed in Doc. 4444
− State the sequence of priority between ACFT landing (or in the final stage of an approach to land) and ACFT intending to
depart
− Indicate the order in which departures normally shall be cleared
−
JAR AIR LAW
10 07 03 04 − State three basic conditions that must be fulfilled before a departing ACFT will normally be permitted to commence take off
− Describe the required action when, in the interest of expediting traffic, a “clearance for immediate take-off“ has been issued to
an ACFT before it enters the RWY
− State the three basic conditions that must be fulfilled before a landing ACFT will normally be permitted to cross the beginning
of the RWY on its final approach
− List the three categories of ACFT on which wake turbulence separation minima are based
− State the minimum ground visibility required for the authorization of a special VFR flight to enter a CTR for the purpose of
landing or to take off and depart directly from a CTR
− State the minimum ground visibility required for the authorization of a Special VFR flight to operate locally within a CTR
010 07 03 05 FIS and Alerting Service
− Define the term “Air Traffic Advisory Service“
− Describe the objective of the air traffic advisory service
− State to which ACFT air traffic advisory service will be provided
− Explain why air traffic advisory service does not deliver “Clearances“ but only “Advisory Information“
− Describe the various aspects of the “Alerting Service“
010 07 03 06 Radar Services
− State to what extent the use of radar in air traffic services may be limited
− State what radar derived information shall be available for display to the controller as a minimum
− Define the term “SSR“
− State the SSR Codes reserved for emergency, COM failure or unlawful interference
− Name the two basic identification procedures used with radar
JAR AIR LAW
010 07 03 06 − Define the term “PSR“

− Describe the circumstances under which an aircraft provided with radar service should be informed of its position
− List the possible forms of position information passed to the aircraft by radar services
− Define the term “radar vectoring“
− State how radar vectoring shall be achieved
− Describe the information which shall be given to an aircraft when radar vectoring is
terminated and the pilot is instructed to resume own navigation
− State the aims of radar vectoring as shown in Doc. 4444
− Indicate the standard horizontal radar separation in NM
− State the wake turbulence radar separation for ACFT in the APP and DEP phases of a flight when an ACFT is operating directly
behind another ACFT at the same ALT or less than 300 m (1000 ft) below
− Describe what kind of action (concerning the transponder) the pilot is expected to perform in case of emergency if he has
previously been directed by ATC to operate the transponder on a specific code
010 08 00 00 AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION SERVICE / AIS ANNEX 15

ANNEX 15
010 08 01 00 − Introduction
− State (in general) the object of the aeronautical information service
− Name the three most important implementations in air navigation which have significantly changed the role and importance of
aeronautical information/data within recent years
− Recall the following definitions to such an extent that you can choose the correct one from an
offered series of samples:
Aeronautical information circular (AIC), aeronautical information publication (AIP), AIP amendment, AIP supplement,
AIRAC, danger area, integrated aeronautical information package, international airport, international NOTAM office,
manoeuvring area, movement area, NOTAM, pre-flight information bulletin (PIB), prohibited area, restricted area,
SNOWTAM
JAR AIR LAW
010 08 01 00 − General
− State during which period of time an aeronautical information service shall be available with reference to an ACFT flying in the
area of responsibility of an AIS, provided a 24-hours service is not available
− Name (in general) the kind of aeronautical information / data which an AIS service shall make available in a suitable form for
flight crews
− Summarize the duties of an aeronautical information service concerning aeronautical information data for the territory of the
State
− Give a brief statement about the WGS 84 system
− Aeronautical Information Publications (AIP)
− State the primary purpose of the AIP
− List the main parts of an AIP
− Name that chapter of the AIP in which the pilot can find a List of significant differences between the national regulations and
practices of the State and the related ICAO Standards, Recommended Practices and Procedures
− State how permanent changes to the AIP shall be published
010 08 01 00 − Explain what kind of information shall be published in form of AIP Supplements
− Describe how conspicuousness of AIP Supplement pages is achieved
− NOTAM
− Describe how information shall be published which in principal would belong to NOTAMs but includes extensive text and/or
graphics
− Summarize essential information which lead to the issuance of a NOTAM
− Summarize information which should not be notified by NOTAMs
− State to whom NOTAMs shall be distributed
− Explain how information regarding snow, ice and standing water on AD pavements shall be reported
− State which information an ASHTAM may contain
− Describe the means by which NOTAMs shall be distributed
JAR AIR LAW
010 08 01 00 − Aeronautical Information Regulation and Control (AIRAC)

− List circumstances to which information are concerned which shall or should be distributed as AIRAC
− State the sequence in which AIRACs shall be issued and state how many days in advance of the effective date the
information shall be distributed by AIS
− Aeronautical Information Circulars (AIC)

− Describe reasons for the publication of AIC
− Pre-flight and Post-flight Information

− List (in general) which details shall be included in aeronautical information provided for pre-flight planning purposes at the
appropriate Ads
− Summarize the additional current information relating to the AD of departure that shall be provided as pre-flight information
− Describe how a recapitulation of current NOTAM and other information of urgent character shall be made available to flight
crews
010 08 01 00 − State which post-flight information from aircrews shall be submitted to AIS for distribution as required by the circumstances
− Contents of Aeronautical Information Publication / AIP

− Name the different parts of the AIP
− State in which main part of the AIP the following information can be found
− for training purposes the sequence of topics should be varied,
− for questions a considerable reduction in the number of used topics is advisable
− entry, transit and departure of ACFT, passengers, crew and cargo
− ACFT instruments, equipment and flight documents
− Differences from ICAO Standards, Recommended Practices and Procedures
− Location indicators, aeronautical information services, minimum flight altitude, VOLMET-service, SIGMET-service
JAR AIR LAW
10 08 01 00 − General rules and procedures (especially general rules, VFR, IFR, ALT setting procedure, interception of civil ACFT,
unlawful interference, air traffic incidents)
− ATS airspace (especially FIR, UIR, TMA)
− ATS routes (especially lower ATS routes, upper ATS routes, area navigation routes
− Navigation warnings (especially prohibited, restricted and danger areas)
− Aprons, TWYs and check locations/positions data
− AD surface movement guidance and control system and markings
− RWY physical characteristics, declared distances, APP and RWY lighting
− AD radio navigation and landing aids
− charts related to an AD
010 09 00 00 AERODROMES ANNEX 14, Volume I

010 09 01 00 ANNEX 14
− Recall the following definitions to such an extent that you can choose the right one from
a series of offered samples, all definitions issued in ANNEX 14 except the following:
Accuracy, aircraft classification number, cyclic redundancy check, data quality, effective intensity, ellipsoid height
(geodetic height), geodetic datum, geoid, geoid undulation, integrity (aeronautical data), light failure, lighting system
reliability, orthometric height, station declination, usability factor
− Reference Code
− Describe, in general terms, the intent of the AD reference code as well as its composition of two elements
JAR AIR LAW
010 09 01 01 Aerodrome Data

− Conditions of the movement area and related facilities
− List the four most important declared RWY distances and recall the appropriate definitions
− List the matters of operational significance or affecting ACFT performance which should be reported to AIS and ATS units for
the transmission to ACFT involved
− Describe the four different types of water deposit on the RWY
− Name the three defined states of frozen water on the RWY
− Physical Characteristics of Ads
− Define the term “RWY strip“
− State the length, width and grading of RWY strips
− Define the term “RWY end safety area“
− State the length and width of a RWY end safety area
− Define the term “Clearway“
− State the origin, length and width of a clearway
− Define the term “Stopway“
010 09 01 01 − State the width of a “Stopway“
− Describe where a radio-altimeter operating area should be established and how far it should extend laterally and
longitudinally
− State the reason for a taxiway widening in curves
− Explain when holding bays should be provided
− Describe where taxi-holding positions shall be established
− Define the term “road-holding position“
JAR AIR LAW
010 09 01 02 Visual Aids for Navigation
− Indicators and Signaling Devices

− Describe the wind direction indicators with which ADs shall be equipped
− Describe a landing direction indicator
− Explain the capabilities of a signaling lamp
− State which characteristics a signal area should have
010 09 01 02 − Markings
− Name the colours used for the various markings (RWY, TWY, ACFT stands, apron safety lines)
− State where a RWY designation marking shall be provided and how it is designed
− Describe the application, location and characteristics of
RWY centre line marking, THR marking, aiming point marking, TDZ marking, RWY side stripe marking, TWY centre line
marking, taxi-holding position marking, TWY intersection marking, ACFT stand markings, apron safety lines, road holding
position marking, information marking
− Lights
− Describe mechanical safety considerations regarding elevated approach lights and elevated RWY-, stopway- and taxiway-
lights
− Discuss the relationship of the intensity of RWY lighting, the approach lighting system and the use of a separate intensity
control for different lighting systems
− List the conditions for the installation of an AD beacon and describe its general characteristics
JAR AIR LAW
010 09 01 02 − Name the different kinds of operations for which a simple APP lighting system shall be used
− Describe the basic installations of a simple APP lighting system including the dimensions and distances normally used
− Describe the principle of a precision APP category l lighting system including such information as location and characteristics
− Describe the principle of a precision APP category II and III lighting system including such information as location and
characteristics, especially mentioning the inner 300 m of the system
− Describe the wing bars of PAPI and APAPI
− Describe what the pilot will see during approach, using PAPI or APAPI
− Name application, location and characteristics of:
RWY edge lights, RWY threshold and wing bar lights, RWY end lights, RWY centre line lights, RWY touchdown zone
lights, stopway lights, taxiway centre line lights, taxiway edge lights, stop bars, taxiway intersection lights, RWY
guard lights, road holding position lights
− No knowledge is required about light spacing
010 09 01 02 − Signs
− State the general purpose for installing signs
− Explain what signs are the only ones on the movement area utilizing red
− List the provisions for illuminating signs
− State the purpose for installing mandatory instruction signs
− Name the kind of signs which “mandatory instruction signs“ shall include
− Describe by which sign a pattern “A“ taxi-holding position (i.e. at an intersection of a taxiway and a non-instrument, non-
precision approach or take-off RWY) marking shall be supplemented
− Describe by which sign a pattern “B” taxi-holding position (i.e at an intersection of a taxiway and a Precision approach
Category l, ll or lll RWY) marking shall be supplemented
− Describe the location of a RWY designation sign at a taxiway / RWY intersection, of a NO ENTRY
sign and a category I, II or III holding position sign
JAR AIR LAW
010 09 01 02 − Name the sign with which it shall be indicated that a taxiing ACFT is about to infringe an obstacle limitation surface or to
interfere with the operation of radio navigation aids (e.g. ILS/MLS critical / sensitive area)
− Name the colours used with a mandatory instruction sign
− Describe the various possible inscriptions on RWY designation signs and on holding position signs (Category I, II, III or joint
Category II/III )
− Describe the inscription on a taxi-holding position sign “en-route“ on a taxiway (i.e. other than a taxiway / RWY-, RWY /
RWY- or taxiway / taxiway-intersection)
− State when information signs shall be provided
− State the role of “information signs“
− Describe the colours used with information signs
− Describe the possible inscriptions on information signs
− Explain application, location and characteristics of aircraft stand identification signs and of road-holding position signs
010 09 01 02 − Markers
− Describe the following:
Markers used to delimit a RWY when no lights are provided, Application, location and characteristics (especially colour) of
unpaved RWY edge markers, TWY edge markers, TWY centre line markers, unpaved TWY edge markers, boundary
markers
010 09 01 03 Visual aids for denoting obstacles

− Marking of Objects
− State how fixed or mobile objects shall be marked if colouring is not practicable
− Describe marking by colours (fixed or mobile objects)
− Explain the use of markers for the marking of objects, overhead wires, cables etc.
− Explain the use of flags for the marking of objects
JAR AIR LAW
010 09 01 03 − Lighting of objects

− Name the different types of lights to indicate the presence of objects which must be lighted
− State the time period/s of the 24 hours of a day during which high-intensity lights are intended for use
− Describe (in general terms) the location of obstacle lights
− Describe (in general and for normal circumstances) colour and sequence of low-intensity obstacle
lights, medium-intensity obstacle lights and high-intensity obstacle lights
− State where you can find information about lights to be displayed by ACFT
010 09 01 04
Visual Aids for Denoting Areas of Restricted Use
− Describe (in general) closed markings on RWYs and taxiways or portions thereof (including colours)
− State how the pilot of an ACFT moving on the surface of a taxiway, holding bay or apron shall be warned that the shoulders of
these surfaces are “non-load-bearing”
− Describe the pre-threshold marking (including colours)when the surface before the threshold is not
suitable for normal use by ACFT
010 09 01 05 Emergency and other services
− Name the principal objective of a rescue and fire fighting service

− List the most important factors bearing on effective rescue in a survivable ACFT accident
− Explain the basic information the AD category (for rescue and fire fighting) depends upon
− Describe what is meant by the term “response time“ and state its normal and maximum limits
− State the reasons for emergency access roads and for satellite fire fighting stations
− Describe the reason for providing a special apron management service and state what has to be observed if the AD control tower
is not participating in the apron management service
− State who has a right of way against vehicles operating on an apron
− Describe the actions ground servicing of an ACFT with regard to possible event of a fuel fire
JAR AIR LAW
010 09 01 06 Attachment A to ANNEX 14

− Calculation of declared distances
− List the four types of “declared distances” on a runway and also the appropriate abbreviations
− Explain the circumstances which lead to the situation that the four declared distances on a runway are equal to the length of
the runway
− Describe the influence of a clearway, stopway and/or displaced threshold upon the four “declared distances“
− Radio altimeter operating area
− Describe purpose, physical characteristics, dimensions and position of a radio altimeter operating area
− Approach lighting systems
− Name the two main groups of approach lighting systems
− Describe the two different versions of a simple approach lighting system
− Describe the two different basic versions of precision approach lighting systems for CAT 1
010 09 01 06 − Describe the diagram of the inner 300 m of the precision approach lighting system in the case of CAT II and III
− Describe how the arrangement of an approach lighting system and the location of the appropriate threshold are interrelated
between each other
010 10 00 00
FACILITATION ANNEX 9
− Foreword
− Explain the aim of ANNEX 9, as indicated in the foreword
− Recall the following definitions to such an extent that you can choose the correct one from a series of offered samples:
- Aircraft equipment, airline, airline and operator‘s documents, baggage, cargo, crew member, flight crew member, ground
equipment, international airport, pilot-in-command, State of registry
010 10 01 00
Entry and departure of ACFT
− Describe, purpose and use of ACFT documents - as far as the “General declaration“ is concerned
010 10 01 00 − State whether or not a “General Declaration“ will be required by an ICAO Contracting State under normal circumstances
−
JAR AIR LAW
− State the kind of information to be given by crew members whenever a “General Declaration“ is required by a Contracting
State
010 10 02 00 Entry and departure of persons and their baggage
− Requirements and procedures only as far as the crew and other operators personnel are concerned
− Explain the reasons for the use of Crew Member Certificates / CMC for flight crews and cabin attendants engaged in International
Air Transport
− Explain in which cases ICAO States shall accept the CMCs as an identity document instead of a passport or visa
− State whether the entry-privileges for crews of scheduled international air services can be extended to other flight crews of ACFT
operated for remuneration or hire but not engaged in scheduled International Air Services
010 11 00 00 SEARCH AND RESCUE / SAR (Based on ANNEX 12)
010 11 01 00 ANNEX 12
alert phase, distress phase, emergency phase, operator, pilot-in-command, radio direction-finding station, rescue co-
ordination center, rescue unit, State of registry, uncertainty phase
010 11 01 01 Organisation
− Establishment of SAR regions and service units
− Describe the areas within which SAR services shall be established from ICAO contracting States
− State the period of time per day within which SAR services shall be available
− State who delineates SAR regions
− Describe for which areas rescue coordination centres shall be established
010 11 01 02 Co-operation
− Co-operation between States and services
− Describe why contracting States should develop common SAR procedures
− State why contracting States shall arrange for all ACFT, vessels and local services and facilities which do not form part of the
SAR organisation to co-operate fully with the latter
JAR AIR LAW
010 11 01 03
Operating Procedures
− State how long a PIC who observes that either another ACFT or a surface craft is in distress should keep the “craft in distress“ in
sight.
− List the information a PIC shall report to the rescue co-ordination centre or air traffic services unit when he observes that another
ACFT or a surface craft is in distress
− Describe the duties of the first ACFT reaching the scene of an accident (and not being a SAR ACFT) with regard to all other
ACFT subsequently arriving at the scene of distress
010 11 01 04 Search and rescue signals

− Describe the required reaction of a PIC of an ACFT whenever a distress signal and / or message or equivalent transmission is
intercepted by RTF or radiotelegraphy
− Show knowledge of all SAR signals
010 12 00 00 SECURITY (based on ANNEX 17)

010 12 01 00 ANNEX 17 (Safeguarding International Civil Aviation Against Acts of Unlawful Interference)
010 12 01 01 General
− State the aims and objectives of aviation security
010 12 01 02 Organisation
− Co-operation and co-ordination
− Describe how (ICAO) States shall co-operate with other States in respect to aviation security and which co-ordination
between States is suggested by ICAO
− Preventive Security Measures
− Describe the objects not being allowed (for reasons of aviation security) from being introduced on board an aircraft engaged
in international civil aviation
010 12 01 02 − Management of Response to Acts of Unlawful Interference
− Describe the assistance each (ICAO) State shall provide to an ACFT subjected to an act of unlawful seizure
− State the circumstances which could prevent a State to detain an ACFT on the ground after being subjected to an act of
unlawful seizure
JAR AIR LAW
− Connection to other Annexes and Documents

− Explain where further information in addition to ICAO ANNEX 17 concerning aviation security is available
(Name the various annexes and documents and list these annexes and documents)
The following learning objectives all refer to situations

in which unlawful interference occurs to an ACFT
− ICAO ANNEX 2
− Describe what the PIC should do unless considerations aboard the ACFT dictate otherwise
− Describe what the PIC should do in case that the ACFT must depart from its assigned track or cruising level
− what should he attempt in regard to broadcast warnings
at which level should he proceed if no applicable regional procedures for in-flight-contingencies are established
010 12 01 02 − ANNEX 6
− Describe the special considerations referring to flight crew compartment doors in regard to aviation security
− Explain what an operator shall do to minimize the consequences of acts of unlawful interference
− Explain what an operator shall do to have appropriate employees available who can contribute to the prevention of acts of
sabotage or other forms of unlawful interference
− ANNEX 14
− Describe what minimum distance an isolated ACFT parking position (after the ACFT is subject of unlawful interference)
should have from other parking positions, buildings or public areas
− Document 4444
Describe the considerations that must take place with regards to a taxi clearance in case an ACFT is known or believed to be subject of
unlawful interference
JAR AIR LAW
010 13 00 00 AIRCRAFT ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT INVESTIGATION

− ANNEX 13
010 13 01 00
- aircraft, flight recorder, incident, investigation, maximum mass, operator, serious incident, serious injury, State of design,
State of manufacture, State of occurrence, State of the operator, State of registry
− Recall the definition of the term “Accident“ in general terms
− Define the between “Serious Incident“ and “Accident“
− Applicability
− Describe the geographical limits, if any, within which the specifications given in ANNEX 13 apply
− General
− State the real objective of the investigation of an accident or incident
− List of examples of serious incidents
− Determine whether a certain occurrence has to be defined as a serious incident or as an accident
010 14 00 00
JAR-FCL 1 and 3 see 010 04 00 ICAO (Annex 1)
− National Law
Learning objectives with reference to National Law will be published after decision of the JAR-FCL C
JAR ALTERNATING CURRENT
021 02 02 00 ALTERNATING CURRENT

021 02 02 01 General
− State the advantages and disadvantages of AC compared with DC.
− Describe the nature of an alternating current.
− Describe how a simple generator produces an AC output.
− Explain how that output relates to a sine function.
− Define the terms applicable to a sine wave format, cycle, phase, frequency, period, amplitude, RMS value.
− Determine the output frequency for a particular AC generator.
− Describe the relationship of current and voltage in an AC circuit containing only resistance.
− Define inductance, state the voltage and current phase relationship.
− Define inductive reactance
− State the effects of increasing or decreasing frequency in an inductive circuit.
− State units of inductance and inductive reactance
− Define capacitance, state the voltage and current phase relationship.
− Define Capacitive reactance.
− State the effects of increasing and decreasing frequency in a capacitive circuit.
− State units of capacitance and capacitive reactance
− Define Impedance and state units

− State the relationship between Impedance, Resistance and Reactance

− State the derivation of power in a resistive, inductive and capacitive circuit
− State units of power (kW, kVA and kVAR)

− Define power factor
021 02 02 02 Generators
− State the difference in construction between a DC generator and an AC generator
− Describe the differences between a rotating armature and a rotating field AC generator and state the relative advantages.
− Describe the mechanical difference between a single phase and three phase alternator and the electrical relationship between
the output phases of a three phase machine
− State the two different methods of connection of three phase alternators (star, delta) and the relationship between phase and
line voltage and current for each type
− State the units of rated output for an AC generator.
− Describe two methods of field excitation and their relative merits. (Brushed, Brushless).
− State the difference between internal and external excitation.
− State the requirement for Voltage control.
− Describe the method of controlling voltage.
− State the difference between constant frequency and frequency wild AC and give examples of use for each.
− State the method of obtaining constant frequency AC from a frequency wild supply.
− State the purpose of a CSDU.

− Describe the principle of operation of a CSDU.
− Describe two methods of generator cooling.
− State the nature of CSDU fault indications.
− Describe the disconnect unit and state its purpose.
− Describe an IDG and its method of generator cooling.
− State that the voltage and frequency output of a VSCF is identical to the output of a hydraulic constant speed driven AC
generator as well as to an IDG.
021 02 02 03 Ac power distribution
− Describe the nature and layout of a typical split bus AC distribution system to block diagram level.
− State bus bar priority, derivation of DC, DC distribution and bus bar priority, failure capability, load shedding, control and
indication.
− Describe the nature and layout of a paralleled AC distribution system to block diagram level.
− State bus bar priority, purpose of a synchronising bus bar, derivation of DC, DC distribution and bus bar priority, failure
capability, load shedding, control and indication.
− State the conditions necessary for paralleling AC generators.
− State the conditions necessary after AC generators are paralleled.
− Describe the principles of generator control and protection (over and under voltage and frequency protection)
− Describe alternative methods of driving a generator. (Ram air turbine, battery powered inverter, hydraulic motor driven
generator)
021 02 02 04 Transformers
− Describe the types, construction, operation and function of transformers in an AC circuit.
− Identify their electrical symbol.
021 02 02 06 Transformer / rectifier units
− Describe the function of rectifiers (half wave, full wave, three phase)
− State the function of a transformer/rectifier unit and its use in an AC distribution system
Inverters
− State the function of an inverter and its use in an AC distribution system.
021 02 02 05 Ac motors
− Describe the principle of operation of synchronous and induction motors, their control and application.
021 02 03 00 SEMICONDUCTORS
− Describe the principle of operation of a semiconductor.
− Describe the construction and application of a diode and identify its electrical symbol.
− Describe the construction and application of a transistor and identify its electrical symbol.
021 02 04 00 BASIC KNOWLEDGE OF COMPUTERS
− Differentiate between an analog and a digital computer.
− Explain the functional principles of an analog computer.
− Name the components of a digital computer and describe their purposes.
− Explain what is meant by the terms ”hardware” and ”software”.
− Describe the task of the input interface.

− Describe the task of the output interface.
− Name the components of the CPU and explain their function.
− State that all operations of a digital computer are based on logic 0 and logic 1 (binary system).
− State that certain voltage values are assigned to the levels 0 and 1.
Identify the following numerical systems
− decimal system
− binary system
− octal system
− hexadecimal system
− Explain and convert the following numerical systems:
− decimal
− binary
− State that digital memory can accept information only in binary form.
− Explain the various types of memory.
− State that a bit is the smallest information element in a digital system.
− Explain the relationship between ”bits” and ”bytes”.
− State that memory capacity is expressed in bytes.
− Describe the purpose of an analogue/digital (A/D) converter.
− Describe the purpose of a digital/analogue (D/A) converter.
− State that with digital data processing the information is converted into steps
− Describe the function and components of an integrated circuit (IC).

− List the applications of IC’s.
021 02 04 01 Define a logic circuit.
− Identify two logic states.
− Define positive and negative logic.
021 02 04 02 − Identify the six main logic gates and describe their function.
021 02 04 03 − Describe how logic gates may be used to build a switching circuit.
− Explain the basic operating principle of a flip flop.
JAR AS & DE-ICE
REFERENCE LEARNING OBJECTIVE
021 01 08 00 AIR DRIVEN SYSTEMS (piston engines only)

021 01 08 01 Pneumatic systems
− List the Power sources which drive pneumatic systems
− Interpret diagrams showing the schematic construction and functioning of pneumatic systems including cockpit indication
− State that in some pneumatic systems the compressed air is cooled by an air to air heat exchanger
021 01 08 02 Air conditioning system
− Describe the construction, principle of operation and the controls of a piston engined aircraft air conditioning system.
− List the factors that effect the internal temperature of an aircraft cabin.
− Identify the methods by which environmental control of cabin
conditions may be achieved.
− Name the components and describe the operation of a ram air heating and ventilation system with : -
− a) exhaust heater
− b) combustion heater
For vapour cycle system see turboprop and jet aircraft
airconditioning systems
021 01 08 03 Pressurisation (See turboprop/turbojet air conditioning
021 01 09 02)
021 01 08 04 De-ice systems
− Describe the principle of operation of mechanical (pneumatic) de-icing.
− List the possible pneumatic sources used for inflating and deflating the de-icer boots (overshoes).
− Identify the components and describe the operation of a pneumatic de-icing system with the aid of a schematic diagram.
JAR AS & DE-ICE
− Describe the controls and indicators associated with a typical pneumatic de-icing system.
− State how mechanical (pneumatic ) is initiated and how varying icing conditions are accommodated giving typical cycle times.
021 01 09 00 AIR DRIVEN SYSTEMS (turbopropeller and jet aircraft)
021 01 09 01 List the sources of supply of compressed air for aircraft
pneumatic systems.
− engine driven compressor

− engine bleed air
− APU bleed
− ground power unit
− State the reasons for the use of compressed air as a system operating medium
− List the aircraft systems that may use compressed air for their operation:-
− Air conditioning
− Pressurisation
− Engine starting
− Hot air anti-icing
− Thrust reverser operation
− Cargo compartment heating
− Hydraulic reservoir and potable water tank pressurisation
− Leading edge flap emergency operation
− Air turbine motors driving hydraulic pumps
JAR AS & DE-ICE
− State the type of failure that may occur:- i.e.

− duct failure due to rupture or overheat
− List and describe the valves that are used to manage the system e.g.
− engine isolation valves
− H.P.shut-off valves
− cross-bleed valves
− overpressure valves
− pressure regulating valve
− start valve
− fan air pre-cooler
− State that indication of duct pressure in the form of a pressure gauge must be provided
− State that valve position indicators must be fitted and that overheat indicators must be fitted both inside and outside the supply
ducts.
021 01 09 02 Air conditioning system
− State the function of an air conditioning system i.e. regulation of temperature ,humidity, quantity and quality of air supply.
− Describe the reasons for the use of pressurisation systems i.e. maintains cabin pressure at a comfortable level so that the
aircraft can fly at an altitude where it can operate efficiently and avoid the worst weather conditions.
− List and describe the construction of typical air cycle systems and state the functions of components e.g :-
JAR AS & DE-ICE
− heat exchangers
− cold air unit compressors and turbines.
− ground cooling air fan
− water separator
− check valves, flow control valves, pressure regulating valves, mass flow controller, isolation valves, ram air valves, mixing
valves.
− temperature sensors and controllers
− recirculation fans, recirculation ducting and filters
− trim air, gasper air and window demist air lines.
− Describe the working principle of typical air cycle machines i.e.
− the turbine drives the compressor and in some cases the fan
− the compressor increases air temperature so that the heat exchanger can extract heat more efficiently
− the temperature of the air leaving the pack is controlled by cabin temperature monitoring system operating the cold air unit
by-pass valve .
− the temperature of cooler zones of the aircraft is controlled by trim air,
− recirculation fans are used to increase the ventilation flow at relatively low pack flow
− airflow through the packs is controlled by the operation of the mass flow controller
− the cabin may be ventilated by ram air in the event of total pack failure.
− List the controls, indications and warnings used in monitoring the air conditioning system
JAR AS & DE-ICE
− Pressurisation.
− State the JAR OPS requirements for pressurisation systems

− State that pressurisation air supply is conditioned air from the packs.
− List and identify the principal components of a pressurisation system
− Outflow (discharge) valve and actuator, pressure controller.
− inwards vent (relief) valve
− excess differential pressure relief valve
− Define the terms “CABIN ALTITUDE, MAXIMUM CABIN ALTITUDE , CABIN DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE and GROUND
PRESSURISATION ( PRE- PRESSURISATION)”
− State the reasons why differential pressure must be controlled and that this is achieved by the cabin pressure being controlled
by regulation of the position of the outflow valve(s)
− Differential pressure can be controlled in an emergency by manual operation of the outflow valve, monitoring cabin vertical
speed or selection of a pneumatically controlled vertical speed.
− State that STRUCTURAL MAX. DIFF PRESSURE is controlled by the cabin relief valve and this will determine the normal
maximum operating altitude
− State that the inwards (negative differential) relief(vent) valve protects against negative differential pressure.
− Describe the use of blow out panels to prevent excessive pressure differences between the passenger cabin and the cargo
compartment.
− Describe the principle of operation of the electronic cabin pressure controller In climb and descent (proportional control), in the
cruise at constant differential pressure(Isobaric control) and at max. diff (max diff. control) and state how cabin altitude and
cabin rate of change are selected and maintained.
JAR AS & DE-ICE
− State the normal maximum regulated cabin altitude is 8000ft, that the rate of change of cabin pressure or cabin altitude can be
controlled and for normal operation are between 300 and 500 feet per minute.
− State that the ground/flight logic system has inputs to the cabin pressure controller and will equalise cabin pressure with
ambient at a rate not exceeding 500 feet per minute.
− Sketch and describe a flight pressurisation profile for a typical flight identifying significant features.
− State that the indications required for a pressurisation system are:-
− Cabin altimeter
− Cabin vertical speed indicator
− Differential pressure gauge
- State that there must be an AURAL and VISUAL warning when the cabin altitude exceeds 10 000ft.
021 01 09 03 Thermal anti-icing
− List the parts of the aircraft that are protected by against ice formation by hot air
− i.e. mainplanes, tailplanes and fin leading edges.
− engine nacelles
− small aircraft windscreens
− List the three main sources of hot air used in a typical hot air system
− Turbine engine compressor bleed, combustion heated ram air, heat exchanger in exhaust gas flow.
− List the component parts of the of the anti -ice system stating the function of each.
− system valves such as shut-off valves, isolation valves temperature control valves
− temperature sensing devices and indicators , overheat warning .
− distribution ducts , piccolo tubes etc.
JAR AS & DE-ICE
− Describe the working principle of the hot air system and state that the system is manually selected on after receipt of an ice
build up warning and that some systems can be automatic in operation if selected in “auto” .
− List the methods of detecting ice formation i.e.
− Visual (hot rod and /or spotlights)
− Vibrating probe(Rosemount)
− Smiths (differential pressure type)
− Serrated rotor
− Sangamo Weston (moisture/temperature sensing
− Beta particle ice detector
021 01 10 01 Non-pneumatic operated de-ice and anti-ice systems.
− Describe the construction and the principle of operation of propeller de-icing and anti-icing systems :
− State which part of the propeller requires de-icing
− Describe a typical propeller fluid ice protection system stating the function of the components
− Describe a typical propeller electrical ice protection system stating the function of the components
− Describe a typical areofoil fluid ice protection (weeping wing) system stating the function of the components.
− Describe the normal methods of protecting the following;
− Pitot heads or probes
− Alpha probes
− Q feel probes
JAR AS & DE-ICE
− P1 probes
− TOAT probes
− Waste water drain probes
− Windscreen anti-icing and side window demisting
− Describe typical windscreen rain protection systems;
− windscreen wipers
− washers
− rain repellent systems
JAR DC ELECTRICS
021 02 00 00 ELECTRICS
021 02 01 00 Direct Current
021 02 01 01 Understand the basic principles, laws and values
pertaining to DC electricity and the common components
used therein
− Describe a DC Electrical circuit
− Define Voltage, Current and Resistance as applicable to DC electricity
− State Ohm’s law
− State and transpose the formulae associated with Ohm’s law
− Calculate the total value of resistance in both series and parallel DC electrical circuits
− Describe the effect on the resistance value of a material as a function of temperature
− Describe electrical power and electrical work and state the associated formulae.
− Describe different types of switch – switchlight, toggle, guarded, bi-metallic, proximity.
− State the function of an electrical fuse
− State the types of electrical fuse and their mode of operation
− State the function of an electrical circuit breaker
− State the types of electrical circuit breaker and their modes of operation
− State when a circuit breaker may be used as a switch
− Define electrical field, State the principle of construction and operation of a capacitor, series and parallel connection.
021 02 01 02 Demonstrate knowledge of the electrical batteries used in
aviation
− State the characteristics and components of a simple cell.
JAR DC ELECTRICS
− Describe the types of batteries used in aviation and their characteristics. (Lead Acid, NiCd)
− State the capacity of the types of batteries used in aviation
− Describe the uses of batteries in aviation
− State the hazards associated with batteries
021 02 01 03 Demonstrate an understanding of magnetism as applicable
to DC electricity
− State the properties of a magnet.
− Define the term “permanent magnet”
− Define the term “electromagnetism”
− Describe the principle, function and application within a DC electrical circuit of:-
- A relay.
- A circuit breaker.
- A solenoid.
− Describe electromagnetic power - factors affecting inductance
− Describe electromagnetic induction - factors affecting induced voltage
021 02 01 04 Demonstrate an understanding of DC generators and
motors
− Describe the principle of operation of a DC generator
− State the types of DC generator
− Describe the functions and applications of a DC generator
− Describe typical devices used to monitor a DC generator
− Describe the methods used to regulate, control and protect a DC generator
JAR DC ELECTRICS
− Describe the modes of excitation of a DC generator

− Describe the principle of operation of a DC motor
− Describe the principle of operation of an Alternator and describe the differences in construction to a DC generator.
− State the advantage of an alternator over a DC generator.
− Describe generator bus bar switching and requirement for operating DC generators in parallel.
− State the types of DC motor
− Describe the functions and applications of a DC motor.
− Describe the typical devices used to monitor a DC motor.
− Describe the methods used to regulate, control and protect a DC motor
− Describe the construction and operation of a DC actuator
− Describe the operation of a DC “starter generator”
021 02 01 05 Demonstrate an understanding of electrical distribution in
aircraft
− Define a Bus Bar
− State the instruments used to monitor electrical supplies in an aircraft
− Describe the operation of an ammeter
− State the number of ammeters in a multi generator system
− Describe the operation of a voltmeter
− State the number of voltmeters in a multi generator/bus bar system
− Describe how electrical consumers/loads are connected to a bus bar.
− Describe the construction, operation and monitoring of a DC distribution system. Voltage, power.
JAR DC ELECTRICS
− Describe the operation of elementary switching circuits and annunciation

021 02 01 06 Demonstrate an understanding of inverters as used in an
aircraft electrical system
− Describe the operation of rotary and static inverters
− State the purposes for which inverters are used on aircraft
021 02 01 07 Describe how the aircraft structure acts as an electrical
conductor
− Describe the construction of a Di-pole aircraft electrical system.

− Describe the construction of a Uni-pole aircraft electrical system.
− State the requirement for aircraft bonding.
− Describe the function of a static discharge wick.
JAR EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
021 04 00 00 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

021 04 01 00 DOORS AND EMERGENCY EXITS
− Describe accessibility to crew, passengers under normal and emergency conditions.
− Explain internal and external markings for access/egress
− Describe location of floor exit markings
− Explain crew emergency exits and descent devices
− Explain passenger emergency exits including overwing hatches.
− Describe evacuation slides in automatic and semi-automatic mode. Explain usage as slide or flotation device with survival aids
fitted.
021 04 02 00 SMOKE DETECTION
− Explain basic operation and purpose of use
− Describe location and flight deck indication of activation
− Describe system functional test.
− Explain use and operation of toilet/washroom smoke detector
021 04 03 00 FIRE DETECTION
− Describe various fire detection methods - melting link, differential expansion, continuous wire, gas filled.
− Explain flight deck indications for fire, overheat warning
− Describe flight deck functional test for fire, overheat warning systems.
021 04 04 00 FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
− Explain classes of compartments for fire fighting.
− Describe location of Fixed, Portable and Mixed systems
− Explain operation of systems fire extinguishants - automatic or manual from flight deck.
− Describes various types of extinguishers and use. Explain functional test for contents, gauging.
021 04 05 00 AIRCRAFT OXYGEN EQUIPMENT
− Describe the effects of lack of oxygen on the human body
− State the reasons for the use of oxygen systems on pressurised passenger aircraft
− List the methods used for storage of oxygen on passenger aircraft
− Describe how oxygen is supplied to both crew and passengers
− Describe the operation of the passenger ‘drop down’ masks
− Describe the operation of a continuous (constant) flow system including flight deck indications and system protection devices
− Describe the operation of a diluter demand system including flight deck indications and protection devices
− Describe the operation of chemical oxygen generators
− List the possible causes and effects of sudden decompression and the associated flight deck indications
− Describe the loss of pressurisation and emergency drill to be carried out
− Explain the dangers of oxygen use and list and describe the general safety precautions associated with oxygen systems
021 04 06 00 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
− Describe use, container colour and positioning of hand held fire extinguishers.
− Describe crew/passenger portable oxygen system. Explain usage.
− State the occasions when portable oxygen systems may be required
− List the locations and describe the operation of portable oxygen systems
− Describe smoke mask/protection hood. Explain usage
− Describe life jacket, life raft. Explain usage and aids carried
− Describe emergency locator beacon. Explain usage

− Describe positioning and types of aircraft emergency lighting. Explain flight deck and cabin controls for lighting.
− Describe location and usage of: Pocket lamp, Megaphone, Crash axe and Fireproof gloves.
JAR FUEL SYSTEMS
021 01 11 00 FUEL SYSTEMS

021 01 11 01 List the types of fuel tanks in use and describe their
Construction, advantages and disadvantages
− Rigid tanks
− Bag tanks
− Integral tanks
− List the possible locations for fuel tanks and state the advantages of the various locations
− Fuselage
− Mainplanes
− Horizontal and vertical stabiliser
− Given a schematic diagram of a fuel system ,list and identify the fuel system components e.g.-
− tank-vent valves and vent system
− vent surge tanks
− filters (screens)
− booster pumps
− upper and lower limit float valves
− fuel drains
− baffles
− overpressure relief valve
− State that the fuel drain is at the lowest point of the tank and that the fuel outlet point is higher than the fuel drain resulting in a
certain amount of unusable fuel.
JAR FUEL SYSTEMS
− Describe two methods of refueling i.e. overwing(manual) and pressure.

− Describe the precautions to be observed before, during and after fuelling operations.
− State that the sequence of refueling can adversely effect the position of the centre of gravity particularly when the aircraft has
stabiliser tanks .
021 01 11 02 Describe the methods of fuel feed to the engines and
identify the types of aircraft where each method is used
− gravity feed
− pressure feed
− List and identify the component parts of a typical aircraft fuel system (Given a schematic diagram of a fuel system) stating their
function.
− fuel tanks
− booster pumps
− fuel lines
− purpose of double skinned fuel lines
− valves(selector valves, check valves, fire shut-off valves, re-fuel/de-fuel valves, cross-feed valves, float valves,)
− float switches
− diffusers
021 01 11 03 Describe the fuel jettison (dump) system including
− jettison (dump) valves
− fuel remaining limitations
− state which aircraft have fuel jettison (dump) systems
JAR FUEL SYSTEMS
021 01 11 04 Describe the fuel management system and its operation

during:-
− take-off and landing
− other flight phases
− by cross-feed valve and fuel pump selection
− Describe the method of measuring fuel quantity i.e.
− pacitor (capacitance units)
− State that quantity is given in units of mass rather than volume with individual and total tank quantities given
− Describe the method of fuel temperature measurement and control
− Describe the fuel low pressure indications
− Describe the purpose and use of dipsticks, dripsticks and magnetic level indicators.
JAR FUSELAGE, WINGS & STABILISING SURFACES
021 00 00 00 AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE - AEROPLANES

021 01 00 00 AIRFRAME AND SYSTEMS
021 01 01 00 Fuselage
− State the purpose of the fuselage of a civil air transport aircraft:
- to provide accommodation for the payload(passengers and/or freight)
- to provide the crew with an effective control position
- to transfer loads to and from mainplanes , vertical and horizontal stabilisers, landing gear and, in certain types, the power
plants
- to support the stresses of pressurisation
− List and describe the types of construction:
- Monocoque
- Semi-monocoque
- Framework
− Describe sandwich construction and state where it may be
used
− Identify structural components and materials:
- Frames, Stiffeners, Doublers, Skin, Machined mounting points
- Main planes, Horizontal and Vertical stabilisers, Landing gear
- Rivets, Adhesive bonding, Screwed fasteners, shear pins
− List the types of materials used in airframes and state typical applications:-
- Metals
- Composites
- Plastics
− Compare the characteristics of materials used in airframes:-
- relationship between strength, weight and stiffness
- fatigue behaviour
− Describe the stresses present in airframe components i.e. tensile, compressive, shear and torsional
− State where these stresses occur and their causes e.g hoop and axial stress of fuselage, bending stresses of main planes
etc
− List the type of damage that may occur following a heavy landing
− State the type of damage possible due to a heavy landing or other hazardous incident e.g. flight through turbulent air etc.
− List the structural safety factors and their relationship to each other:-
- Limit load
- Ultimate load
− State that airframe life is limited by fatigue
− List the factors involved in fatigue
- Take-off
- Landing
- Pressurisation cycles
- Load cycles
− Describe the load path philosophies used in airframes:-
- Safe life
- Fail safe
- Damage tolerant
− Briefly describe airframe structure reference systems:-
- Datum zero
- Station numbers
021 01 02 00 Flight deck and Cabin windows
− Describe the construction and materials used for the flight deck windows e.g. layers, heating
− List typical loads and limitations :-
- Pressurisation
- Bird impact (JAR 25 -4lb bird up to Vc or 0.85 Vc)
- Structural limitations
- Impact resistance increased by heating
− State the requirements for crew visibility i.e. that certain horizontal and vertical angles are specified
021 01 03 00 Wings (Mainplanes)
− Identify the types of wing construction:-
- Braced
- Cantilever
- Single spar
- Multi-spar
- Torsion box
- Torsion nose box
− List structural components:-

- Spars
- Skins
- Webs
- Attachment fittings
- Ribs
- Integral stiffeners
− List materials used in the wing:-
- Metals
- Expanded materials
− Compare the characteristics of the materials used:-
- Relationship between stiffness, strength and weight
- Fatigue behaviour
− Describe wing bending and torsion loads:
- Ground cases: landing and taxying
- Flight cases: lift, drag, thrust, engine and fuel weight
− Describe the effect of engine position, fuel tank position and fuel quantity and distribution on stress relief and wing flutter
characteristics:-
- Wing mounted engines and fuel in outer tanks provide bending stress relief
- Wing mass balance provided by mounting the engines ahead of the wing on pylons
- List the structural ”factors” that determine the maximum zero fuel weight (MZFW)
021 01 04 00 Stabilising Surfaces
− List and identify empennage configurations:-

- Conventional
- T-tail
- H-tail
- V-tail
- Foreplanes (canard)
− List the functions of the horizontal and vertical elements of the empennage components:-
- Upward and downward acting loads
- Side loads and control moments
− List the types of forces that may be encountered by the stabilisers :-
- Bending
- Torsion
− List the structural components of the empennage:-
- Spars
- Skins
- Ribs
- Webs
- Attachment fittings
- Integral stiffeners
− List the materials used in the construction of the empennage:-
- Metals
- Composites and expanded (foam)
− Compare the characteristics of the materials used
− List the factors involved in flutter of control surfaces and the structure to which they are attached:-
- Mass distribution
- Backlash
- Aero-elastic coupling
- Speed
− Use of sandwich construction for high stiffness/ low-weight in-flight control surfaces
− Describe methods of preventing and compensating for “flutter”
− Explain why “mach trim” is required
− Describe the methods of achieving “mach trim”
PISTON ENGINES
JAR LEARNING OBJECTIVE
REFERENCE
021 03 00 00 POWERPLANT
021 03 01 00 Piston Engine
021 03 01 01 General
− Describe the various types of engine design with regard to cylinder arrangement and working cycle.
− Describe the gas state changes, the valve positions and the ignition time during the four strokes of the theoretical piston
engine cycle.
− Explain the main differences between the theoretical and practical four stroke piston engine cycles.
− Define the term “specific fuel consumption“.
− Define the term “engine efficiency“.
− Define the term “compression ratio“
− Describe the main mechanical engine components and state their function.
021 03 01 02 Lubrication system
− Describe tasks of a piston engine lubrication system.
− Describe the schematic construction of both a wet and dry sump lubrication system, list the main components with their
function and state the disadvantages of each system.
− List the basic lubrication system monitoring instruments.
− Describe the term ‘viscosity’ including the effect of temperature.
− Describe the viscosity grade numbering system used in aviation.
− Compare straight oil and compounded oil.
− Describe all typical operational procedures regarding the lubrication system.
PISTON ENGINES
REFERENCE
021 03 01 03 Air cooling
− Specify the reasons for cooling a piston engine.
− Compare and contrast the advantages of liquid and air cooling systems.
− State that the majority of modern aero piston engines are air-cooled.
− Identify the cylinder head temperature indication to monitor engine cooling.
− Describe the task and the operation of cowl flaps.
− Describe all operational procedures regarding the cooling system.
021 03 01 04 Ignition
− State why aero piston engines are equipped with two electrically independent ignition systems.
− Describe the construction and operation of a magneto ignition system with the aid of a schematic diagram.
− Identify the auxiliary methods of spark augmentation, state their task and describe their operating principle.
− Describe all checks to be carried out to ensure the serviceability of the ignition system.
021 03 01 05 Engine fuel supply
− State the basic tasks of a carburettor.
− Describe the operating principle of the simple float chamber carburettor.
− Explain the purpose of the venturi.
− Describe the method of achieving correct mixture ratio over the engine speed range.
− Describe the method of achieving reliable idle operation.
− Describe the methods of obtaining mixture control including provision of a method of stopping the engine.
− Explain the purpose and the operating principle of an accelerator pump.
− Describe the purpose of a priming pump and explain its operation.
PISTON ENGINES
REFERENCE
− Describe the causes and effects of carburettor icing and the action to be taken if carburettor icing is suspected.
− Name the meteorological conditions within which carburettor icing may occur.
− Describe the indications that will occur upon selection of carburettor heat if ice is present or not.
− Describe the functional check of the carburettor heat system.
− Explain the effect of carburettor heat on mixture ratio.
− Explain the reason for the use of alternate air on fuel injection systems and describe its operating principle.
− Name the meteorological conditions within which intake icing may occur.
− Describe the low pressure, continuous flow type fuel injection system used on light aircraft piston engines with the aid of a
schematic diagram.
− Explain the requirement for two different pumps in the fuel injection system and describe their operation.
− Describe the task and explain the operating principle of the fuel and mixture control valves in the injection system.
− Describe the task and explain the operating principle of the fuel manifold valve, the discharge nozzles and the fuel flow meter
in the fuel injection system.
021 03 01 06 Engine performance
− Define the terms “pressure/density altitude“ and write down a simple equation to determine the pressure altitude.
− Describe engine performance as a function of pressure and temperature.
− Explain the effect of changes in aircraft altitude on the engine power.
− Define the term “normally aspirated“ engine.
− Define the term “critical altitude“.
021 03 01 07 Power Augmentation Devices
− Summarise the reason for the installation of Turbochargers and Superchargers in aircraft engines.
PISTON ENGINES
REFERENCE
− Describe the difference between turbochargers and superchargers.
− Describe the principle of operation of a turbocharger.
− Explain the difference between an altitude-boosted turbocharger and a ground-boosted turbocharger.
− Explain the function of an intercooler.
− Describe the purpose of the waste gate, its location and its operating principle.
− List and describe methods of controlling the waste gate position.
− Describe the positions of the waste gate throughout a normal flight.
− Compare and contrast the curves of maximum power versus altitude of normally aspirated, turbo-charged and supercharged
engines identifying significant points.
− Describe the purpose and the operating principle of manifold pressure gauges.
− Define the terms “full throttle height“ and “rated altitude“.
− Define the term “turbo lag“.
021 03 01 08 Fuel
− Name the types / grades of fuel used today for aero piston engines.
− Describe how different fuel grades are identified.
− Define the term “octane rating“.
− Describe the combustion process inside a piston engine cylinder.
− Define the term “flame rate“ and describe its variations depending on the fuel-air mixture.
− Define the term “detonation“ and describe the causes and effects of detonation.
− Identify situations and power settings that promote detonation.
− Describe how detonation is recognized and prevented.
PISTON ENGINES
REFERENCE
− List two anti-detonation fuel additives.
− Describe the method of checking the fuel for water content.
− State the typical value of fuel density for aviation gasoline.
021 03 01 09 Mixture
− Define the terms “chemically correct ratio“, „best power ratio“, “lean (weak) mixture” and “rich mixture“.
− Describe the advantages and disadvantages of weak and rich mixtures.
− Describe the relation between specific fuel consumption and mixture ratio.
− List the mixture ratios used for normal operation, depending on engine power.
− Describe the use of the exhaust gas temperature as an aid to mixture setting.
− Identify the mixture setting required for maximum power and for maximum fuel economy.
021 03 01 10 Propeller
− Describe the fixed pitch propeller, its operating modes and explain its disadvantage.
− Explain why the propeller is twisted.
− Describe a variable pitch propeller and explain its advantages by comparing it with the fixed pitch propeller.
− Define the terms “Alpha range“ and “Beta range“ as applied to a variable pitch propeller.
− Describe the operating principle of a single acting and a double acting variable pitch propeller.
− Describe the operating principle of a constant speed propeller system for both single and multi engine aircraft with the aid of a
schematic diagram.
− Describe the operation of a constant speed propeller system during flight. Describe the operating principle of a constant speed
propeller system when feathering and unfeathering a propeller, including the operation of cockpit controls.
PISTON ENGINES
REFERENCE
− Explain the purpose and the basic operating principle of an auto-feather system.
− Describe the purpose of the beta range and how it is selected on the flight deck.
− State the purpose and describe the operation of a low pitch stop (centrifugal latch).
− State the purpose and describe the operation of a low pitch stop (centrifugal latch).
− Define the terms “synchronising“ and “synchrophasing“.
− Describe the basic operating principle of synchronising and synchrophasing systems.
− Define the term “propeller efficiency“.
− Describe how the efficiency of fixed and variable pitch propellers varies with flightspeed
− State the highest propeller efficiency usually attained.
− Describe the checks to be carried out on the propeller after engine start.
− State the purpose of reduction gearing.
− Name the two typical types of reduction gearing.
− State the purpose of a torque-meter and describe its operating principle.
021 03 01 11 Engine handling and manipulation
− Describe the necessity for checking the propeller for its physical condition before flight.
− Describe the general procedures for setting the engine controls during a normal flight from engine start until shut-down.
− State the possible use of time limits for take-off and climb power.
− Define the term “rated power“ or “maximum continuous power“.
021 03 01 12 Operational criteria
− State that for normal operations there is a maximum and minimum rpm.
− Define the term “critical rpm“ and state the consequence for engine operation
JAR GAS TURBINES
021 03 02 00 Turbine Engines

021 03 02 01 Principles of Operation
− Describe how the thrust force is developed by turbojet and turbofan engines.
− Describe how power is developed by turboprop engines.
− Describe the gas state changes in a gas turbine engine with the aid of a working cycle diagram.
− Explain why the available engine thrust is limited by the turbine inlet temperature of the gas.
− Name the main components of the different types of gas turbine engines.
− Define the terms ‘propulsive efficiency’ and ‘thermal efficiency’.
− Describe the influence of total compression ratio on thermal efficiency.
− Explain the variations of propulsive efficiency for turbojet, turbofan and turboprop engines.
− Define the term ‘specific fuel consumption’ for turbojets and turboprops.
021 03 02 02 Types of Construction
− Describe the term ‘equivalent horsepower’.
− Describe the operating principle of turbojet, turbofan and turboprop engines.
− Define the term ‘bypass ratio’.
− List the advantages and disadvantages of turbojet, turbofan and turboprop engines.
021 03 03 00 Engine Construction
021 03 03 01 Air Inlet
− Name the most important tasks of the engine air inlet.
− Describe the geometry of a pitot type subsonic air inlet.
− Describe the gas parameter changes in a pitot air inlet at different flight speeds.
JAR GAS TURBINES
− State the function of secondary air inlet doors.

− Describe the purpose and the principle of operation of multi shock air inlets at supersonic flightspeeds.
− Name the different types of multi shock air inlets and identify them on different aircraft.
− Describe the reasons for and the dangers of the following operational problems concerning the engine air inlet:
− airflow separations, especially in crosswinds on the ground
− inlet icing
− inlet damage
− foreign object ingestion
− heavy in-flight turbulence
− Describe the action taken by the pilot to counteract the above problems
− Describe conditions and circumstances during ground operations in which the danger may arise of foreign objects or persons
being sucked into the air inlet.
021 03 03 02 Compressor
− List the purposes of the compressor.
− Describe the types of centrifugal and axial compressors used in aircraft engines.
− Name the main components of a compressor stage and describe their function.
− Describe the gas parameter changes in a compressor stage.
− Define the term pressure ratio and state its order of magnitude for a centrifugal compressor stage and for an axial
compressor stage.
− State the advantage of a double stage centrifugal compressor.
− List the advantages and disadvantages of a centrifugal compressor compared with an axial type.
JAR GAS TURBINES
− State that some engines use both axial and centrifugal compressors.
− Explain the convergent air annulus through an axial compressor.
− State the entrance and the outlet velocity of an axial compressor stage.
− State that axial compressors have pressure ratios of up to 35 and outlet temperatures of up to 600°C.
− Describe the reason for twisting the compressor blades with the aid of velocity triangles.
− State the task of inlet guide vanes.
− State the reason for the clicking noise if the compressor rotates on the ground, e.g. due to windmilling.
− Describe the two (and three) shaft compressor design in modern engines and its principle, and list its advantages.
− Define the terms ‘compressor stall’ and ‘surge’.
− State that the following conditions are causes for stall and surge
− rapid increase in fuel flow during increase of RPM
− low engine RPM, e.g. idle
− engine air inlet icing
− contaminated or damaged compressor blades
− damaged engine air inlet
− Describe, in full, the following indications of stall and surge

− thrust loss
− abnormal engine noise
− vibrations
− RPM variations
JAR GAS TURBINES
− increased EGT
− sometimes burning gas out of inlet and exhaust
− List the actions to be taken by the pilot in the case of surge.
− Describe the constructional methods used to minimize the occurrence of stall and surge.
− State measures taken by the pilot to prevent stall and surge.
− Describe a compressor map (surge envelope) with RPM-lines, stall limit, steady state line and acceleration line.
021 03 03 03 Diffuser
− Describe the function of the diffuser.
021 03 03 04 Combustion Chamber
− Define the task of the combustion chamber.
− List the requirements for combustion.
− Describe the principle of operation of the combustion chamber.
− State that the low flame front velocity is the reason for diffusing the airflow at the combustion chamber entrance.
− Define the terms ‘primary airflow’ and ‘secondary airflow’.
− Explain the mixture ratios fuel: primary airflow and fuel: total airflow.
− Describe the change of the gas parameters (p,t,v) through the combustion chamber.
− State that the outlet temperature of the combustion chamber is between 1000°C and 1500°C.
− Name the main components of a combustion chamber and their tasks.
− Describe the ‘multiple combustion chamber system’, the ‘turbo-annular, the annular and the reverse-flow annular combustion
chamber’ and state the differences between them.
− Describe the principle of operation of the different fuel spray nozzles.
JAR GAS TURBINES
021 03 03 05 Turbine
− Explain the tasks of the turbine in single- and multi-shaft turbojets, turbofans and turboprops.
− Name the main components of a turbine stage and their function.
− Describe the gas parameter (p,t,v) changes in a turbine stage.
− Describe the principles of operation of impulse, reaction and impulse-reaction axial turbines.
− Explain the divergent gasflow annulus through the turbine.
− Describe turbine blade convection, impingement and film cooling.
− Explain why there is high mechanical and thermal stress in the turbine blades.
− State that the exhaust gas temperature, measured after the high pressure turbine or after the low pressure turbine, is used to
monitor the turbine stress.
− Describe the effect of acceleration and deceleration on the EGT.
021 03 03 06 Jet Pipe
− Define the task of the jet pipe of the gas turbine engine.
− Specify the danger created by the high velocity exhaust gas.
− Explain the operating principle of the jet pipe.
− Describe the gas parameter changes and exhaust mach-numbers in both a convergent and a convergent-divergent nozzle.
− Define the term ‘choked exhaust nozzle’.
− Describe the two different exhaust nozzle systems of turbofan engines.
− Explain how engine exhaust noise can be reduced.
021 03 03 07 Pressure, Temperature and Airflow in a Turbine engine
− Describe the variation of the static pressure, the temperature and the axial velocity inside a gas turbine engine during cruise
JAR GAS TURBINES
− Describe the differences between absolute, circumferential and axial velocity

021 03 03 08 Reverse Thrust
− Describe the principle of thrust reversal.
− List the occasions where reverse thrust may be required during operations.
− Identify the advantage and disadvantage of using reverse thrust during normal operations.
− Describe the operating problems which may occur when using reverse thrust, and explain what measures may be taken by
the pilot to reduce these problems.
− Describe the following reverser types: ‘clamshell’, ‘external’ and ‘blocker door’.
− Identify pneumatically-, hydraulically- and mechanically-driven thrust reversers.
− Describe the control levers, their operation and the monitor lights provided for reverse thrust.
021 03 03 09 Performance and Thrust augmentation
− Describe the operating principle of an afterburner.
− Describe the operating principle of a water/methanol injection system, its purpose and the different points of injection.
− Explain how a water/methanol injection system is activated.
021 03 03 10 Bleed air
− Explain the different functions of bleed air.
− Describe the effects of bleed air extraction on RPM, EGT, thrust, EGT and specific fuel consumption.
− Identify situations in which the cabin air bleeds need to be closed.
021 03 03 11 Auxiliary Gearbox
− Define the tasks of the auxiliary gearbox.
− Describe how the auxiliary gear is normally connected with the high pressure shaft of the engine.
JAR GAS TURBINES
021 03 04 00 Engine Systems

021 03 04 01 Ignition
− Name the components of a gas turbine ignition system with the help of a schematic ignition system.
− Describe the function of the components
− energy source
− igniter plugs
− start lever / eng. master switch
− start switch / eng. start selector / ign. selector
− Name the different modes of operation of the ignition system and state when they are used
− ground start
− in-flight start
− continuous ignition
− automatic ignition
021 03 04 02 Starter
− Explain the principle of a turbine engine start.
− Describe the following types of starters
− electric
− pneumatic
− Describe a typical start sequence for a two-spool turbofan engine with a pneumatic starter.
− Define the self sustaining speed and state its order of magnitude as approx. 30% N2
− State the idle speeds as approx. 60% N2 and approx. 25% N1.
JAR GAS TURBINES
021 03 04 03 Engine Start Malfunctions

− Describe an in-flight restart.
− Describe the causes, indications and actions in the case of a wet start, hot start and hung start.
021 03 04 04 Fuel system
− Identify the components of a gas turbine fuel system and describe their function with the help of a schematic fuel system:
− low pressure pump
− fuel heater
− fuel filter
− high pressure pump
− fuel control unit
− high pressure shut off valve
− pressurization and dump valve
− fuel injector nozzles
− Name the two types of high pressure pump, both driven by the engine high pressure shaft.
− Define the tasks and describe the operating principle of the fuel control unit.
− Identify the input signals for the fuel control unit.
− Name the different types of fuel control units.
− Name the controls and indicators of the fuel system.
021 03 04 05 Lubrication
− Name the type of oil used in gas turbine engines.
− Describe the tasks of the lubrication system.
JAR GAS TURBINES
− Name the components of a gas turbine engine lubrication system and describe their tasks with the aid of a system
schematic:
− oil tank
− pressure pump
− oil cooler (oil-fuel heat exchanger)
− oil filter
− return pumps
− magnetic chip detectors
− centrifugal breather
− Identify the indications used to monitor the lubrication system.
021 03 04 06 Fuel
− List the types of fuel used for gas turbine engines and their flash and freezing points, their colour and their specific weight.
− Identify the possible problems with the fuel at low temperatures.
− State that the fuel must be checked for dissolved water.
021 03 04 07 Thrust
− Describe the simple form of the thrust equation.
− State the idle values of RPM and thrust as approx. 25% N1 and 5% of takeoff thrust.
− Describe the variation of thrust with altitude.
− Describe the thrust variation with TAS for turbojets, turbofans and turboprops with the help of the simple thrust equation.
− Define the term ‘engine pressure ratio’ (EPR).
− Describe the variation of thrust with outside air temperature.
JAR GAS TURBINES
− Interpret the term flat rated engine by describing the change of take-off thrust, turbine inlet temperature and engine RPM with
OAT.
− Define the term ‘engine thrust rating’.
021 03 04 08 Powerplant Operation and Monitoring
− Name all engine ratings (takeoff, go-around, max. continuous, max. climb, max. cruise) and their use during operation.
− Distinguish between ground idle and flight idle by stating the reasons for the differences (short acceleration time, bleed air
supply).
− Describe how thrust/power are controlled in turbojet, turbofan and turboprop engines.
− Describe the terms α-range and β-range of the turboprop power lever.
− Describe the differences in thrust lever operation between FADEC and non-FADEC equipped aircraft.
− Name the turbofan engine monitoring instruments and state their use.
− Name the turboprop engine monitoring instruments and state their use.
021 03 05 00 Auxiliary Power Unit (APU)
021 03 05 01 General
− Explain the operating principle of the auxiliary power unit (APU) and list its tasks.
− State that the APU is able to generate electric and pneumatic power.
− State that the APU usually provides power on the ground when the engines are shut down, but also can be used to provide
emergency power during flight, especially for ETOPS operations.
− Define maximum operating and maximum starting altitude.
− Describe how an APU is protected against overloading at high altitudes.
− Name the typical APU controls and monitoring instruments.
− Describe the APU’s automatic shut-down protection in case of malfunctions.
JAR GAS TURBINES
021 03 05 02 Ram air turbine

− Explain the operating principle and the use of an extendable ram air turbine (RAT).
JAR HYDRAULICS

021 01 07 00 Hydraulics
021 01 07 01 − Demonstrate understanding of the basic principles of hydro-mechanics
− Identify problems and statements associated with PASCALS LAW
− State the formula which shows the relationship between FORCE, AREA and PRESSURE
− Explain the principles of BRAHMAHS PRESS
− State the formula which shows the relationship between FORCE, DISTANCE and WORK.
− Explain the effect of fluid pressure on hydraulic actuators in a closed system
− Interpret the “Hydrostatic Paradox” and explain its relationship to cavitation
− State the ideal properties of a hydraulic fluid
− State the types of hydraulic fluids in common use and identify the seal materials used with each type of fluid
− State the effect on a hydraulic system, and its component parts, of using the wrong fluid and/or mixing fluids
− Explain the principles of basic hydraulic systems including:
- Open centre system.
- Closed centre system
− Explain the functions and identify the properties of the component parts of a hydraulic system:-
- Reservoir
- Filter
- Hand pump
- Constant delivery pump
- Constant pressure pump
− Hydraulic pump control:-
JAR HYDRAULICS
- Automatic cut-out
- Control piston
- Off-load
− Accumulators:-
- The purpose of.
- The effect of high pre-charge pressure
- The effect of low pre-charge pressure
- Hydraulic acurators
- Servodynes as used in flying control units
− Powerpacks
- Construction
- operation
− Hydraulic pressure control:-
- Relief valve
- Pressure maintaining valve
- Pressure reducing valve
- Thermal relief valve
− Hydraulic system flow control:-
- Non return valve
- Restrictor valve
− Hydraulic system selectors:-
- Electrical
- Manual
021 01 07 02 Hydraulic Systems
− Identify aircraft hydraulic systems and explain their principle of operation
JAR HYDRAULICS
− Define:-
- Main system
- Standby system
- Emergency systems, including shuttle valve and fuse unit
− State typical flight indications of normal and abnormal operation with regard to:-
- Quantity
- Pressure
- Flow indication
- Temperature
Ancillary systems
− Identify ancillary hydraulic systems and explain their principle of operation, including:-
- Hydraulic motors, including flow control valve
- Air Turbine Motors (ATM)
- Hydraulic Ram AIR Turbines (HYDRAT)
- Electrically driven hydraulic supplies
− State the services which can be powered/assisted by hydraulic means:-
- Flaps
- Slats/leading edge devices
- Brakes
- Doors, ramps, stairs, thrust reversers, windscreen wipers
- Spoilers
- Speed brakes
- Flying Controls
-
JAR LANDING GEAR

021 01 05 00 Landing Gear
Types
− Describe the types of landing gear in common use
− Fixed
− Spring steel
− Rubber cord
− Oleo Pneumatic
− Construction
− Operation
− Spats
− Retractable
− Under wing
− Engine Nacelle
− Inwards Retracting
− Fuselage Mounted
− Vertical Raise/Lower.
− Articulated Raise/Lower
− TRICYCLE/TAILWHEEL
− Advantages and Disadvantages of.
JAR LANDING GEAR
Construction
− Describe the component parts of a typical aircraft landing gear including the advantages and disadvantages of various types
of construction
− Main gear
− Loads sustained by the Main Gear
− Types of bogie - (single wheel/multi wheel)
− Wing growth
− Nose gear
− Loads sustained by the Nose Gear.
− Requirements of the Nose Gear
− Castoring.
− Self centering.
− Steering.
− Shimmy (causes and prevention).
Operation
− State the systems that can be used for normal landing gear extension and retraction
- Hydraulic.
- Electrical.
- Pneumatic
Emergency Operation
− State the methods that may be used to lower the landing gear in an emergency
JAR LANDING GEAR
- Free fall
- Blow down
- Alternate hydraulic system
Landing gear locking systems
− Describe the methods used to prevent inadvertent landing gear retraction
− Hydraulic
− Down locks
− Mechanical
− Geometric.
− Spring applied.
− Internal jack locks
− Ground locks
− Types
− Pins
− Sleeves
− When fitted and when removed.
− Where stowed.
− Warning flags
− Ground/Air Logic Solenoid
− Landing gear solenoid
JAR LANDING GEAR
Landing Gear Extension and Retraction

− State the sequence of a typical landing gear extension and retraction operation and the associated flight deck indications
− Extension Sequence
− Landing gear travel.
− Door travel
− Retraction Sequence
− Landing gear travel.
− Door travel
Indications
− State the indications of landing gear extension and retraction
− Normal
− Extension.
− Retraction
− Emergency
− Extension
Warnings
− State the typical warnings associated with landing gear
- Ground Proximity Warning
- Speed
- Throttle/Flap Position
-
JAR LANDING GEAR
Wheels
− Describe the types of wheel used in aviation and show an understanding of their construction
- Materials used in Construction
- Loose/Detached Flange
- Dived/Split Rim
- Fusible Plugs
- Tubed/Tubeless
Tyre Creep
− State the methods used to prevent tyre creep
- Knurled Flange
- Tapered bead seat
- Creep marks
Tyre Construction
− Describe the constituent parts of a tyre.
− Construction
− Bead, plies, breaker strips etc.
− Side wall, shoulder, crown.
− Tread patterns
− Ribbed.
− All weather
JAR LANDING GEAR
− Tubeless.
− Inner tubes.
− Inflation valves
Tyre Categories and tyre information

− State the main categories of tyre and the information found on the side wall of a tyre
− Categories
- Low pressure.
- Medium pressure.
- High pressure.
- Extra high pressure
− Information Markings
- Size.
- Ply rating.
- Speed rating.
- DRR.
- Awl vents - colour.
- Light spot - colour
Tyre Pressures
− State the percentage factor that must be applied to the quoted tyre pressure
JAR LANDING GEAR
- As a result of changes in aircraft weight.

- As a result of tyre heating
Aqua Planing
− State the equation applicable to aqua planing
- 9 /Tyre pressure (PSI).
-
Tyre Wear
− Identify the conditions requiring tyre change and the recommended methods to reduce tyre wear
- Cuts.
- Bulges.
- Foreign bodies.
- Wear.
- Creep.
- Maximum taxi speed.
- Turn radius
Aircraft Brakes
− Describe a typical aircraft breaking system
− Construction
− Single plate.
− Multi plate
− Construction Materials
− Brake adjusters
JAR LANDING GEAR
− Brake drag.
− Brake fade
− Brake wear
− Operation
− Normal brakes.
− Emergency brakes.
− Parking brake
− Anti-skid systems
− Mechanical.
− Electrical
− Auto braking systems
− Modes
− Advantages
− Associated systems
− Indications
− Pressures
− Temperatures
− Warnings
- Brake Kinetic Energy Capacity
JAR LANDING GEAR
-graphs
interpretation
courses of action
consequences
020 AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE – FLIGHT CONTROLS
JAR LEARNING OBJECTIVES
REFERENCE
021 01 06 00 FLIGHT CONTROLS (CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION)
021 01 06 01 Primary Controls
− List the various forms of primary flight control surfaces , identifying their specific features:
- Longitudinal control – elevators, flying tail,
- Lateral control – ailerons, spoilers, high speed ailerons
- Directional control – rudder
- Combination control surfaces – elevons, ruddervators , stabilators.
− Describe the methods of actuation including control linkages and the relationship to the flight deck control movements and forces
- Manual with aerodynamic balance as required depending on aircraft size and speed.
− Balance tab
− Servo tab
− Spring tab
− Horn balance
− Pressure balance
− Inset hinge
REFERENCE
- Hydraulic power assisted with manual signalling
- Hydraulic fully powered irreversible
− Mechanical signalling
− Electrical signalling
− Fly by wire – electronically or fibre optical signalled with computer modulation and/or limiting
- Safety features
− Multiple systems
− Split(multiple) control surfaces
− Redundancy
- Position indication
− Mechanical
− Electronic EICAS ECAM
Artificial feel systems
− Spring
- q-feel
- Hydraulic q-feel
- V3 feel
- State that the pilots control loads are related to the strength of the average pilot and airworthiness requirements.
REFERENCE
021 01 06 02 Secondary controls, lift augmentation and wing flaps
− List the secondary flight controls and describe their operation
- Methods of trimming
− Tabs
− Variable incidence tailplane
- Operating systems
− Mechanical
− Electrical
− Hydraulic
- Spoilers
− Flight
− Ground
− Autospoilers
− Lift dumpers
− Speed brakes
− Airbrakes
− Wheel spin up / gear deflection relationship to auto spoiler/auto-brake systems, system arming
− Excess IAS protection
REFERENCE
- Lift augmentation devices (trailing edge)
− Plain flaps
− Split flaps
− Slotted flaps
− Fowler flaps
− Excess IAS and asymmetric protection
- Lift augmentation devices(leading edge)
− Leading edge flaps
− Kreuger flaps
− Variable camber flaps
− Slats
− Asymmetric protection
− Ice protection
- Describe the methods of actuating secondary flight controls and list the sources of power used.
− Automatic (aerodynamic)
− Mechanical /hydraulic/pneumatic,
− Electric
− Normal and alternate operation.
REFERENCE
- Describe the secondary flight control selectors, indicators and warning devices:
− Flap lever
− Flap position indicator
− Trim wheels, levers, switches, position indicators, “green band” longitudinal trim position range
- Describe configuration warnings and possible dangers:
− Leading edge devices not in position
− Spoilers deployed
− Tailplane incidence out of “green band” range
− Tailplane leading edge position/aft cg limit warning
− Explain why “mach trim” is required
− Describe the methods of achieving “mach trim”
JAR BASIC RADIO PROPAGATION
021 02 00 00 ELECTRICS
021 02 05 00 BASIC RADIO PROPAGATION THEORY
021 02 05 01 BASIC PRINCIPLES
Electromagnetic waves
− List the bands of the frequency spectrum for electromagnetic waves.
− Define the following terms:
− superposition
− beat frequency
− fading
− mixture
− modulation
Wave length, amplitude, phase angle, frequency
− With reference to a sine wave, and using a line and vector diagram, define the following terms:
− amplitude
− angular frequency
− frequency
− wavelength
− Explain the relation between frequency, wavelength, and velocity of propagation.
Frequency bands, sideband, single sideband

− State the characteristics of the frequency bands.
− Identify typical applications for the frequency bands.
− Name the frequency band and corresponding wavelengths of different types of radio-electric equipment
− Define the term ”bandwidth”.
− State the relationship between bandwidth and minimum frequency spacing of transmitters.
− State the relationship between bandwidth and minimum frequency spacing of receivers.
− Explain how VHF communication is achieved.
− Explain how HF communication is achieved.
Pulse characteristics
− Define the following terms, as associated with a pulse string:
− pulse length
− pulse power
− continuous power
Carrier, modulation, demodulation
− Define the term ”Carrier Wave”.
− Explain the purpose of a modulator and demodulator.
Types of modulation, (amplitude, frequency, pulse, multiplex)
− Define the following types of modulation:

− amplitude modulation (AM)
− frequency modulation (FM)
− pulse modulation, pulse coded modulation (PM, PCM)
− State that FM modulation causes an increase in bandwidth if compared with AM.
− Compare and contrast AM and FM with regard to interference and complexity of the equipment used.
− List typical applications for AM, FM, PM.
− State frequency range, channel spacing and type of modulation for a VHF-COM system.
Oscillation circuits
− Explain the functional principle used in an oscillator.
− Describe how an electrical resonant circuit is constructed.
− Explain how a resonant circuit works.
− Define the term ”resonant frequency”.
− Define resonant frequency, bandwidth and selectivity.
− Explain the piezo-electric effect in the case of a quartz crystal.
− Compare and contrast an inductive/capacitive resonant circuit with a quartz crystal controlled resonant circuit with regard to
frequency stability and frequency selection.
− Name typical applications for inductive/capacitive resonant circuits and quartz crystal controlled resonant circuits.
− Explain how capacitive reactance depends on the frequency.
− Explain how the inductive reactance depends on the frequency.
− Using diagrams, explain the functional principles involved in the magnetron and klystron.
NB THE RELEVANCE OF THE FOLLOWING (UNDERLINED) SECTION ON ‘R/T AIRBORNE EQUIPMENT’ IS, AT PRESENT,
THE SUBJECT OF DISCUSSION BY THE JAR-FCL EXAMINATIONS SUB COMMITTEE
R/t airborne equipment
− Identify the task of a transmitter.
− Name the major components of a transmitter.
− Explain the purpose of an amplifier.
− Name types of amplifier.
− Explain the purpose of an oscillator.
− Explain the purpose of a channel selector.
− Explain the purpose of a frequency synthesizer.
− Explain the purpose of the power amplifier.
− Explain the purpose of a receiver.
− Name the main components of a receiver.
− Explain the purpose of filters.
− State that digital filters can be used in addition to as analog types.
− Explain the functional principles involved in:

− automatic volume control (AVC)
− automatic frequency control (AFC)
− squelch
− beat frequency oscillator (BFO)
− Explain the purpose of the audio selector panel.
− Name the components of an audio selector panel
− Explain the purpose of:
− crew interphone
− maintenance interphone
− cabin interphone
− Explain the purpose of the VHF communication system.
− List the components of a VHF-COM system
− Describe how the microphone selector switch, receiver selector switch and filter switch are operated
− Explain the purpose of the HF-COM system.
− List the components of an HF-COM system.
− State the range of an HF-COM system.
− State the purpose of the SELCAL system.
− List the components of a SELCAL system
− Explain the functional and operating principles involved in a SELCAL system

− Describe the task of an emergency locator transmitter.
− State the VHF and UHF emergency frequencies
− Identify the switch-on options for the emergency locator transmitter:
− Describe the technical construction and principal function
− of a GPS, including the satellite and airborne equipment
021 02 05 02 ANTENNAS
Characteristics
− Describe the current and voltage distribution for a dipole/monopole antenna
− Define the term ”antenna diagram” or ”polar diagram”.
− Draw the radiation diagram of a dipole.
− Define the term ”loaded antenna”
− List the different kinds of loaded antennas
− Explain the skin effect in relation to frequency
− Explain the bending of radio beams.
− Define the terms ”parasitic antenna” and ”parasitic radiator”.
− List causes of deflection of beams
− Indicate the characteristics of the radiation diagram of glide-slope (GS) transmitters which may involve risks
− Indicate the characteristics of the radiation pattern of the localizer (LOC) which may involve risks
− State the difference between VOR and DVOR

− Interpret the radiation pattern and polar diagram of the following ground equipment:
− marker
− glide-path transmitter, glideslope (GS)
− localizer (LOC)
Polarisation
− Define vertical and horizontal polarization.
− State that the antenna polarization is identical to the alignment of the antenna’s electrical field component
Types of antennas
− Name the applications for different antenna arrays
− Illustrate the radiation patterns and applications for different antennas
021 02 05 03 Wave Propagation
− State that, where the atmosphere is subject to intensified ionization due to solar radiation, the propagation range of a radio
signal is affected.
− List the factors that affect the degree of ionization.
− Show how ionization intensities vary with time and altitudes.
− List the layers of the ionosphere by height and diurnal variation.
− State the reasons for frequency-dependent physical phenomena of electromagnetic waves
− Explain the connection between frequency and range.
Ground waves
− Define ‘ground wave’
− Define ‘skip zone’ and ‘skip distance’
Space waves
− Define ‘sky wave’
Propagation with the frequency bands
− State how VHF and higher frequencies are propagated
− Calculate the reception range for VHF frequencies.
− State the reasons why ranges may vary from those expected.
− State the range of ground waves in the HF band.
− State that multiple reflections (from the ionized layers) can result in such large ranges that worldwide communication is
possible
− Name the ionized layer which absorbs frequencies in the LF/MF band.
− State that the range of the ground wave is greater over water than over land, and is also significantly affected by the
transmitting power
− State that the range in this band is increased at twilight and at night
− State that radio waves in the VLF band propagate between the surface of the Earth and the ionosphere like a wave guide
− State that the range permits global coverage if the transmitter is sufficiently powerful.
Frequency prognosis (prediction, MUF)
− List the ranges of frequencies of the different navigational aids
Fading
− Explain the reason for fading.
Factors affecting propagation (reflection, absorption, interference, twilight)
− State that the direction of propagation is altered by refraction at shore-lines.
− State that there may be reflections by terrain elevations, buildings, etc., leading to multi-path propagation effects
Shoreline, mountain, static
− List bearing errors arising from atmospheric disturbances, and explain their causes and effects
JAR AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEMS
022 02 00 00 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEMS

022 02 01 00 FLIGHT DIRECTOR
– State the function and application of a flight director system.
– Describe the system components.
– Describe the type of indications and nature of failure warning.
– Mode of operation
– Interpret the different operating modes and state the input information required
– Operation set up for various flight phases
– Describe the sequential logic switching for different vertical and lateral modes.
– Describe the selection and operation, by the pilot, of the following modes:
− take off
− climb
− cruise
− descent
− approach
− land
− go around
– Limitations, operational restrictions

– Explain that the commands of the flight director are given in such a way that structural limits of the aircraft for pitch and
bank attitude will not be exceeded
– Describe the task of the gain program in the approach mode.
– State the task of lateral and vertical beam sensors.
– Describe the disturbances which can be compensated for with the flight director.
– State how the commands of the flight director are affected by the rate of change of deviation.
022 02 02 00 AUTOPILOT
– State the function and operation of a simple inner loop auto stabilisation circuit to block diagram component level.
– Describe the basic function of each component.
– State the requirements prior to and during engagement.
– Describe single axis, two axis and three axis control.
– Describe typical outer loop control inputs to the autopilot in roll, pitch and yaw, their data sensors and method of
connection.
– Describe pilot inputs and operation.
– Describe methods of system monitoring and annunciation for aircraft with mechanical and electronic instrumentation.
– Define the ”control law” of an autopilot
– Define Fail Operational and Fail Passive autopilot status.
– State the requirements for an automatic flight control system to be able to complete an automatic landing.
– Describe a typical autoland sequence.
– State pilot inputs, aircraft inputs, external inputs, switching and annunciation, system redundancy and failure capability.
022 02 03 00 FLIGHT ENVELOPE PROTECTION

– State the requirement for and function of a flight envelope protection system.
– Describe the input and output data signals and system monitoring .
022 02 04 00 YAW DAMPER
– Function
– State the purpose of the yaw damper computer.
– Identify the inputs of the yaw damper computer.
– State that the yaw damper computer compares reference signals with actual signals and passes control commands to the
yaw damper servo of the rudder.
– State that fuselage vibrations can be reduced with the aid of the yaw damper computer and the rudder
– Interpret the information given by the yaw damper indicator
– Name the component units of a yaw damper.
– State that the yaw damper movement is added/subtracted to/from the rudder deflection controlled by the autopilot or
rudder pedals
022 02 05 00 AUTOMATIC PITCH TRIM
– State the requirement for and function of autotrim.

– Describe indication and failure warning.
022 02 06 00 THRUST COMPUTATION
– State the purpose of a thrust computer.

– Describe its data inputs and outputs and related indications
– Name the different modes for which the thrust computation will be calculated.
– Describe the functions of the Full Authority Digital Engine Control (FADEC)
022 02 07 00 AUTO THRUST
– State the function and application of an auto thrust system.

– Describe the components to block diagram level.
– State the different modes of operation and the required sensory inputs.
– Describe any system monitoring and annunciation.
– Describe the limitations relative to ambient conditions and engine rating selection
JAR FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
022 00 00 00 INSTRUMENTATION AEROPLANES

022 01 00 00 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
022 01 01 00 AIR DATA INSTRUMENTS
− List the instruments fitted in aircraft
− Describe how to read the instruments
− Indicate the source of pitot/static pressure
− Define Total Air Temperature
− Define Static Air Temperature
− Define Ram Rise
− Describe types of thermometer used
022 01 01 01 Pitot Static System
− Indicate the source of static pressure
− Indicate the source of pitot pressure
− Describe the construction of Static Vent
− Describe the construction of a Pitot Tube
− Explain the need for a Pitot Heater
− Explain the effect of blockages in the Static system
− Explain the effect of blockages in the Pitot system
− Describe the alternate static source system
− State that when the alternate pressure system is used, correction values can be taken from the Flight Manual
022 01 01 02 Altimeter
− State the principle of operation of the Altimeter
− State how the non-linear distribution of atmosphere is converted to linear indication
− Indicate methods of temperature compensation and matching to the barometric pressure gradient
− Describe the construction of a Simple Altimeter
− State the purpose of vibration (knocking or vibrator) in some altimeters
− Explain the use of the three pointer Altimeter
− Describe the Sensitive Altimeter
− Explain the advantages of the Sensitive Altimeter
− Define the errors of the Altimeter
− Illustrate and define QNH, QFE, SPS (1013), RQNH,TDZE
− Explain Transition Altitude
− State the Standard Pressure Setting
− Describe Temperature error
− Describe Barometric error
− Explain static pressure blockage
− Explain problem of static pressure leaks
− Describe the Servo-assisted altimeter
− Describe the height encoding system
− List the errors of the Servo-assisted altimeter
− Apply corrections from the Aircraft Operating Manual (AOM) to altimeter readings
022 01 01 03 Airspeed Indicator

− State the principle of operation of the Airspeed Indicator(ASI)
− Describe the construction of the ASI
− Explain the use of pitot static pressure
− Define dynamic pressure
− List the errors of the ASI
− Explain the errors of the ASI
− Describe the relationships between IAS, RAS, EAS,TAS
− Define VSO, VS1, VFE, VNO, VNE, VLO, VLE, VYSE
− Explain pitot/static pressure blockage in a climb or descent
− Identify the coloured areas of the ASI
− Explain and define the use of the coloured arcs of the ASI
022 01 01 04 Mach Meter
− State the principle of operation of the Mach Meter
− Describe the construction of the Mach Meter
− Explain the need for two aneroid capsules
− List the errors of the Mach Meter
− Explain the definition of Mach Number(MNo)
− Define Critical Mach Number

− Explain variations of Mach Number with altitude and temperature
− Illustrate calculations of LSS, Mno, TAS
− Explain the use of the CRP5 in calculations
− Explain and describe the Mach / TAS Indicator(MASI)
− Describe the Maximum speed Indicator, VMO / MMO pointer
− List the errors of the MASI
022 01 01 05 Vertical Speed Indicator – VSI - IVSI
− State the principle of operation of the VSI
− Describe the construction of the VSI
− Indicate the different displays of the VSI
− List the errors of the VSI
− Explain the result of static pressure blockage
− State the principles of the IVSI
− Describe the construction of the IVSI
− List the errors of the IVSI
022 01 01 06 Air Data Computer - ADC
− List the inputs and outputs of the Air Data Computer(ADC)
− Explain and understand Built-in-Test(BIT)
− Explain the difference between analogue and digital ADCs
− Explain what is meant by “configuration module”
− Using a Block Diagram, Illustrate a simple ADC, showing the processing of the input data to the final result as used by the
relevant instruments
− Describe the effect of loss of input/output signal of the ADC to the pilots instrument indications
022 01 02 00 GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS
− List the instruments that make use of Gyroscopic Theory
- Artificial Horizon
- Turn and Slip
- Turn Coordinator
- Gyro Compass
- Inertial Navigation System
- Inertial Reference System
022 01 02 01 Gyro Fundamentals
− State the properties of a Gyroscope
− Explain Rigidity and Precession
− Explain Drift, Topple and Wander
− Explain planes of freedom and axis
− Describe different methods of drive and control
− List the advantages and disadvantages of different systems
− Name the different types of gyro in use:
- Vertical
- Directional
- Rate
- Rate Integrating
- Single Degree of Freedom
- Ring Laser Gyro
022 01 02 02 Directional Gyro
− State the principles of the Directional Gyro(DG)
− Describe the construction of the DG
− Define the relationship with the Direct Reading Magnetic Compass
− Explain the need to set and reset the DG
− Identify the difference between Air Driven and Electrically Driven Directional Gyro Indicators(DGI)
− Explain - Total Drift = Real Drift and Apparent Drift
− Define - Real Drift = Real wander +/- Latitude Driver Nut
− Define - Apparent Drift = Earth Rate rotation +/- Transport Wander
− Explain the formula - Latitude Nut = +/- 15 Sin set Latitude
− Explain the formula - Earth Rate = +/- 15 Sin Lat
− Explain Transport Wander
− Explain how Northern or Southern Hemisphere affects Total drift
022 01 02 03 Slaved Gyro Compass

− State the principles of the Slaved Gyro Compass(SGC)
− Describe the parts construction of the SGC
− Explain the Detector Unit operation
− Describe and explain the Master Indicator
− Explain the Amplifier System
− Describe and explain the Gyro Unit
− Describe in detail the working of the SGC
− List the Limitations of the SGC
− Explain the advantages and disadvantages of the SGC
− Explain the term “synchronisation” and the Annunciator Circuit
− Describe and explain the control panel of the SGC
022 01 02 04 Attitude Indicator (vertical gyro)
− State the principles of the Attitude Indicator - Artificial Horizon(AH)
− Describe the construction of the AH
− Explain the need for a Vertical Axis gyro
− Explain the control system of an Air driven AH
− List the advantages and disadvantages of an Air Driven AH
− List the errors of the AH
− Explain the limitations of the Air Driven AH
− Describe the construction of the Electrically Driven AH
− List the advantages and disadvantages of an Electric AH

− State the principle of the Remote Vertical gyro
022 01 02 05 Turn and Bank Indicator (Rate Gyro)
− State the principle and purpose of the Turn and Bank Indicator(TBI)
− Describe the construction of the TBI
− List the different types of display in use
− Explain the Rate of Turn relationship with TAS
− List the errors of the TBI
− Explain the limitations of the Air Driven TBI
− State the principle of the Turn Coordinator(TC)
− Describe the difference between the TBI and the TC
− Explain why the TC gyro is mounted at 30deg to the fore and aft axis of the aircraft
022 01 02 06 Gyro Stabilised Platform (Gimballed Platform)
− State and describe the principles and construction of an Inertial Navigation System(INS)
− Explain Accelerometer principles
− Explain the INS Platform operation
− Explain the need for Alignment and Stabilisation of the platform
− Describe a Rate Integrated Gyro
− Describe and explain Schuler Loop Theory
− List the errors of an INS
− Describe and explain the Mode Selector Unit(MSU)
− Describe and explain the Control Display Unit(CDU)

− List and explain the Warning Light system
− Describe the INS in use
− List the faults and remedies related to the INS
− Calculate Radial error in the INS
022 01 02 07 Fixed Installation (Strap Down Systems)
− State the principle of the Ring Laser Gyro(RLG)
− Describe the construction of the RLG
− Explain the function of a Fibre Optic Gyro (FOG)
− Explain the difference between Inertial Navigation Systems and Inertial Reference Systems(IRS)
− Explain the term “Dither” with regard to the RLG
− List the advantages and disadvantages of the Strap Down System
022 01 03 00 MAGNETIC COMPASS
− Describe Elementary Magnetism
− Describe Terrestrial Magnetism
− Explain “Dip” and the resolution of the Earth’s magnetic field
− Discuss magnetic meridians
− Explain Variation
− Explain Deviation
− Explain why every magnetic compass requires a Deviation Card or Curve mounted in the cockpit for pilot information
− Explain “Horizontality”
− Explain “Sensitivity”
− Explain “Aperiodicity”
− Describe the principle of the Magnetic Compass(MC)
− Describe the construction of the MC
− List the errors of the MC
022 01 04 00 RADIO ALTIMETER
− List the components of the Radio Altimeter(RA)
− List the frequency band of the RA (4200 to 4400Mhz - SHF Band)
− State and explain the principle of operation of the RA
− Illustrate and examine the display and explain:
- Height
- Mask
- Failure Warning Flag
- Press to test
- Low Height Warning
− Digital Readout
- Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) Display
- Discuss the Auto Pilot link and the FD response to ILS Glide-path
− List the errors of the RA
022 01 05 00 ELECTRONIC FLIGHT INSTRUMENT SYSTEM

− State the principle of the Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS)
− Identify and describe the components of a typical EFIS
− Explain the Primary Flight Display(PFD)
− Explain the Navigational Display(ND)
− Explain the Multi-Functional Display(MFD)
− Describe the basic EFIS signals
− Explain and describe the selection of “Map, Plan, Nav, VOR/ILS”
− Describe the display colour-codings
022 01 06 00 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
− State the principles of Flight Management Systems(FMS)
− Describe the Flight Management Computer(FMC)
− Describe the Control Display Unit(CDU)
− Interpret fuel cost and time related cost in relation to speed, and fixed cost in relation to maintenance.
− Detail and describe the use of the Scratch Pad
− Describe the differences between the Attitude Flight Director Indicator(AFDI) and the Electronic Attitude
Director Indicator(EADI)
− Describe the Horizontal Situation Indicator(HSI)
− Describe the Course Deviation Indicator(CDI)
− Explain the Warning Flag system
− Explain the function of the Mode Control Panel(MCP)
JAR POWERPLANT AND SYSTEMS MONITORING INSTRUMENTS
022 04 00 00 POWERPLANT AND SYSTEMS MONITORING INSTRUMENTS

022 04 01 00 Pressure Gauge
− State the units that pressure gauges indicate.
− Name the different pressure measuring elements and explain their method of operation.
− List and describe the different types of sensor according to the pressure to be measured measurement customarily
used for pressure.
− Pressure indicators
− Explain the functional principles involved in different pressure measurements.
− Meaning of coloured arcs
− Interpret the coloured markings on the indicator units for pressure measurement.
022 04 02 00 Temperature Gauge
− Identify applications of temperature gauges in aircraft engine monitoring systems.
− Sensors
− Identify temperature measuring elements and state their field of application.
− List and describe the different types of sensor according to the temperature to measure
− Explain the operating principle of each type of temperature gauge
− Compare the advantages and drawbacks of each temperature gauge
− Identify thermocouple applications.
− Define Total Air Temperature (TAT) and Static Air Temperature (SAT)
− Calculate SAT according to TAT
− Ram rise, recovery factor
− Explain the meaning of ram rise and the recovery factor

− Temperature indicators
− Identify different types of temperature indications.
− Describe the relationship between the sensed signal and the indicator.
− Explain the meanings of coloured arcs.
022 04 03 00 RPM Indicator
− Interfacing of signal pick-up to RPM gauge
− Name the component units of an RPM indicator.
− Describe the different types of interfacing of signal pick-up to RPM gauge
− Identify types of RPM indicator which, in the case of airborne power supply failure, will continue to indicate.
− RPM indicators, piston and turbine engines
− List different designs of RPM pick-ups and describe their method of operation.
− Name types of measured value transmission.
− Describe different designs of indicator units and their methods of operation.
− Name different types of RPM indicators.
− Explain the operating principles of each of these types
− State the advantages and drawbacks of each of these types
− Name the task and method of operation of the synchroscope.
− State the maximum RPM which can be shown by a trailing pointer.
− Identify and explain markings on the indicator.

022 04 04 00 Consumption Gauge
− Fuel flowmeter (function, indicators)
− Explain the role of the fuel-flow indicator.
− Interpret the indications of the fuel flow indicator.
− Explain the principles of fuel flow measurement.
− Compare volumetric fuel flow-meter with mass fuel flow meter
− Explain in qualitative terms the connection between fuel pressure and fuel flow.
− State the units of fuel flow measurement.
− Compare the units: volume per unit time with mass per unit time.
− Compare and contrast different designs for fuel flow measurement systems.
− State that the total consumption is obtained by integrating the rate of fuel consumption over time.
− High pressure line fuel flow-meter (function, indications, failure warnings)
− State that on jet engines and turboprop engines impeller type fuel flow transmitters are used in the high-pressure fuel
line.
022 04 05 00 Fuel Gauge
− Measurement of volume/mass units
− Describe the task of the fuel quantity gauges.
− State that a quantity of liquid can be measured by volume or by mass
− Measuring sensors
− Identify options for measuring the volume of liquids and describe their methods of operation and calibration.
− Identify options for measuring the mass of liquids and describe their methods of operation and calibration.
− Compare the advantages and drawbacks of each of these options
− Explain the functional principle involved in capacitive quantity measurement.
− Explain how measuring errors due to changes in aircraft attitude, are compensated.
− Content, quantity indicators
− Interpret the indication for
− oil supply
− fuel supply
− hydraulic fluid supply
− Explain the purpose of a totalizer.
− Describe how a quantity gauge system can be checked.
− Reasons for incorrect indications
− Describe the effects of temperature changes and accelerations on the indications given by simple types of fuel
quantity measurements.
022 04 06 00 Torque Meter
− Explain the task of the torque indicator.
− Name methods of measurement used for torquemeters.
− Describe the connection between power, torque and RPM.
− Indicators, units
− Name the components of a torque measuring system.

− State the units of measurement customarily used.
− Name the components of a torque measuring system.
− Interpret the meaning of coloured arcs and limit markers.
022 04 07 00 Flight Hour Meter
− Drive source
− Describe the purpose of the flight hour meter system as used for aircraft engines
− Explain the principle of operation of the flight hour meter system
− State that a flight hour meter can be coupled to an airborne sensor which becomes activated at a certain speed.
− Indicators
− Explain the indication of a flight hour meter
022 04 08 00 Vibration Monitoring
− Indicators, units
− Explain the task of the vibration meter.
− Name the components of the vibration meter.
− Explain the functional principle involved in vibration measurement.
− State that vibrations of all engines are typically indicated at the same time.
− Identify the units of measurement customarily used in vibration measuring devices.
− Interfacing to bypass turbofan engines
− Indicate the location of engine vibration sensors in the case of turbofan engines.
− Warning system
− Identify possible warning outputs.
022 04 09 00 Remote (signal) Transmission System
− Mechanical
− State that flap and gear position can be given by mechanical transmission
− Electrical
− Describe how analogue sensors transmit positions of different systems.
− Describe how the positions of different systems are transmitted.
− Explain the function of a remote control system.
− Describe the construction, function and principles of operation of different remote control systems.
− Compare the advantages/disadvantages of different remote control systems.
022 04 10 00 Electronic Displays (ECAM, EICAS)
− State that the Engine Indication and Crew Alerting System (EICAS) has, in principle, the same task as the Electronic
Centralized Aircraft Monitoring (ECAM) system
− State the purpose of the ECAM/EICAS .
− Explain how to operate the ECAM/EICAS system.
− Describe the inhibiting functions in relation to different flight phases.
− Identify the display units (DU) of ECAM/EICAS System.
− Identify the types of DU’s.
− Interpret the important colours used by the DU’s.
− Explain the function of the control panel and how it is operated.
− Explain how to select different pages on the DUs.

− State that, in the case of a DU failure, switching to another DU is possible.
JAR WARNING AND RECORDING EQUIPMENT
022 03 00 00 WARNING AND RECORDING EQUIPMENT

022 03 01 00 WARNINGS GENERAL
- State that the function of the flight warning system.
- List the components of the Flight Warning System (FWS).
Classification of warnings
− State that depending on the classification different alerts can be given.
− State that the FWS can produce general alerts and dedicated alerts
Display, indicator systems
− Name different types of indicator systems.
− Identify different types of alert lights and their meanings.
− Identify and describe other kinds of warning indications.
022 03 02 00 ALTITUDE ALERT SYSTEM
Function
− State the function of an altitude alert system.
− Describe how to operate the altitude alert system and how to interprete the information
Block diagram, components
− Explain the function of an altitude alert system using an appropriate block diagram.
Operation and system monitoring
− State that the altitude alert system compares the selected altitude with the actual altitude.
− Explain how the system is monitored.
022 03 03 00 GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING SYSTEM (GPWS)

Function
− Describe the role of the ground proximity warning system (GPWS).
− State the range of operation of the GPWS.
− Identify the standard GPWS warning profiles.
− Explain the function of the enhanced ground proximity warning system (EGPWS) and describe its modes.
− State the JAR-OPS requirements relative to the GPWS
− Identify the components of the GPWS and explain their function.
Input data, signals
− Identify the inputs of a GPWS computer.
− Identify the outputs of a GPWS.
Warning modes
− List and describe the different modes
System integrity test
− Explain the functions of the test device provided with the GPWS installation.
022 03 04 00 TRAFFIC COLLISION AVOIDANCE SYSTEM II (TCAS II)

Principles
− Describe the task of the TCAS II system.
− List the necessary TCAS II components.
− Explain the principle of TCAS II interrogations.
− State that ”escape manoeuvres” can be calculated only for the vertical axis (climb or descent).
− State how many ”escape manoeuvres” TCAS II equipment can calculate simultaneously.
− Define the types of antennas in use.
− Identify the equipment with which an intruder must be fitted in order to be detected by TCAS II.
− Identify the inputs and outputs of TCASII.
− Define the different TCAS warnings in order to priority.
− Explain how the crew has to react on receipt of a given advisory.
− List and explain the appropriate TCAS II graphic symbols and interpret their position on the display.
− Describe the test result when testing the system
− Define a Resolution Advisory (RA) and a Traffic Advisory (TA).
022 03 05 00 OVERSPEED WARNING
Function
− Explain the function of the overspeed warning system.
− Name the different types of warning.
Input data, signals
− List the overspeed warning system inputs.
Display, indicators
− State where the maximum allowable speed is shown.
Function test
− Describe the typical warning sound which will be heard in case of activating the test function
Effects on operation in case of failure
− State that in case of system-failure the pilot will receive no warning if vMO or MMO is exceeded.
022 03 06 00 STALL WARNING
Function
− Describe the function of the stall warning system.
− Explain how the stall warning is given to the pilot.
− Indicate the regulatory margin between stall and stall warning
Constituent components of a simplified system
− List the components of a stall warning system.
Block diagram, components of a system with angle of attack indicator
− Using a simple block diagram of the stall warning system, explain the task of the components.
− Identify the inputs of a stall warning system
022 03 07 00 FLIGHT DATA RECORDER

Function
− State that commercial aircraft record parameters throughout the entire duration of the flight
− Name the different designs of flight recorder.
− Explain the relation between the flight recorder and the Aircraft Integrated Data System.
− State the JAR-OPS requirements relative to flight recorder
− Name the components of a flight data recorder (FDR).
− List the parameters that are recorded by the FDR.
− State that data from the flight maintenance recorder can be printed out for purposes of maintenance.
− State that aircraft relevant data can be transmitted from the aircraft integrated data system, at certain intervals, to ground.
− Define the information which is entered into a flight maintenance recorder.
Operation
− Identify the power source of the FDR.
System monitoring
− Explain how the system is monitored.
022 03 08 00 COCKPIT VOICE RECORDER

Function
− Explain the purpose of the voice recorder.
− State the recording time of the voice recorder.
− State that the voice recorder is a shock-, temperature- and fire-proofed recording unit
− Explain the principle function of a voice recorder.
− State the JAR-OPS requirements relative to cockpit voice recorder
− List the components of the voice recorder.
− Identify the information recorded by the voice recorder
Operation
− Describe how the voice recorder is energized.
− Define the conditions for starting and stopping the recording.
− State that it is possible to erase the recording and the conditions.
JAR MASS AND BALANCE
030 00 00 00 FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING

031 00 00 00 MASS AND BALANCE – AEROPLANES
031 01 00 00 INTRODUCTION TO MASS AND BALANCE
031 01 01 00 Centre of Gravity
031 01 01 01 − Give a definition of Centre of Gravity
031 01 01 02 − State the importance of centre of gravity in regard to aircraft stability
031 01 02 00 Mass and Balance Limit
031 01 02 01 − State where the Centre of Gravity limits for take off, cruise and landing configurations are to be found
031 01 02 02 − State that maximum floor/ loading running load have to be considered when loading small heavy items. Calculate examples
and extract necessary information from the aeroplane operating manual.
031 01 02 03 − Define maximum ramp and taxi mass
031 01 02 04 − State the factors that determine the maximum permissible mass.(structural, performance)
031 01 02 05 − State the factors that determine the cg. limits (stability, configuration change, variation of cg. due to fuel burn, passenger
movement
031 02 00 00 LOADING
031 02 01 00 Terminology
031 02 01 01 − Define empty mass
031 02 01 02 − Define dry operating mass
031 02 01 03 − Define zero fuel mass
031 02 01 04 − Determine standard mass for crew, passengers and baggage.

− Determine standard mass for fuel oil or water using standard density.
− Determine standard mass for carry on baggage
031 02 01 05 − Define Traffic Load
031 02 02 00 Aircraft Mass Checks
031 02 02 01 − State general procedure for determining the aircraft Empty Mass and cg. Position by weighing
031 02 02 02 − State the requirements for re-weighing aircraft according to JAR – OPS 1
031 02 02 03 − State the purpose of an Equipment List and that it details the items required to be installed for the weighing process
031 02 03 00 Mass and Balance Documentation

031 02 03 01 − Extract a Dry Operating Mass and Index from the aircraft operating manual.
031 02 03 03 − Determine a Zero Fuel Mass, check that is within limiting value.
− Determine a Take off Mass having added fuel.
031 02 03 04 − Check that Maximum Mass is within limiting value
031 02 03 05
031 02 04 00 Effects of Overloading
031 02 04 01 − State the effect on take off speed
031 02 04 02 − State the effect on take off and landing distances.
031 02 04 03 − State the effect on Rate of Climb.
031 02 04 04 − State the effect on range and endurance
031 02 04 05 − State the effect on engine-out performance.

031 02 04 06 − State the effect on aircraft structure
031 03 00 00 CENTRE OF GRAVITY (CG)
031 03 01 00 CG. Calculations
031 03 01 01 − Define cg. Datum.
− State the cg. Datum location and its use in cg. calculations
031 03 01 02 − Define moment arm.
− State its use in cg. calculations and how it determines algebraic signs
031 03 01 03 − Define a Moment and state how it is calculated. Explain the term Index, interpret and calculate an example of an index
031 03 01 04 formula.
− Express a cg. as a percentage of mean aerodynamic chord (%MAC).
031 03 02 00 Calculations of CG
031 03 02 01 − State how an empty mass cg. Is determined and where documented.
− Calculate an empty mass cg
031 03 02 02 − Calculate the movement of a cg. With the addition of fuel, load and ballast.
031 03 02 03 − State practical methods of calculation. Slide rule, graphical and tables
031 03 03 00 Securing of load
031 03 03 01 − State the importance of adequate tie down.
− Describe aircraft cargo compartment systems for securing baggage containers and pallets
031 03 03 02 − State the effects of load-shift
031 03 04 00 − Define Area Load, Running Load, Load Supporting (Spreading)

JAR FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
033 00 00 00 FLIGHT PLANNING

033 01 00 00 FLIGHT PLANS FOR CROSS COUNTRY FLIGHTS
033 01 01 00 Completing a Navigation Plan
033 01 01 01 Selection of routes, speeds, heights(altitudes) and alternate airfield(s)
− Select a route and altitude based upon the following criteria:
− Weather situation
− Prescribed inbound/outbound routes
− Minimum Safe Altitudes
− Controlled and uncontrolled airspace ( A, D, E and G)
− Restricted Areas
− Extract and interpret, prior to a flight, the relevant Air Traffic Control information from Aeronautical Information Publications
(AIP) and NOTAMS, published by the Aeronautical Information Service (AIS) for:
− Departure
− En-route
− Destination
− Alternative airfields
− Select routes, alternate airfields and heights and calculate TAS with reference to:
− Weather situation
− Published inbound/outbound routes
− Restricted areas
− Navigation aids
− Minimum safe altitudes

− Navigation Aids
− Conspicuous navigational features
− ICAO Semi-circular rules
− Calculate, given the required terrain and/or obstacle clearance, Outside Air Temperature (OAT) and QNH, the minimum
pressure altitude
− Calculate how many feet to climb from take-off at an aerodrome to a given level
− Extract from the chart the frequencies and identities of navaids
033 01 01 02 Measure track directions and distances

− Identify, with reference to Airspace Restrictions, Danger/Restricted/Prohibited areas, the route
− Identify and plot the turning points/checkpoints
− Draw the intended route on the chart
− Record on the navigation plan form the true track (course) directions, and track distances in nautical miles as measured at
the meridian scale
− Locate the highest obstacle within a given distance either side of a track.
033 01 01 03 Obtaining forecast weather information and wind velocity
− Extract forecast visibility, cloud type, cloud base, meteorological information/hazards for all stages of flight
− Extract wind velocity at pertinent airfields and for cruising levels
Computation - headings, groundspeeds, route times, TAS and

Wind velocities
− Update, if necessary, chart variation using annual variation change and record on the navigation plan
033 01 01 04 − Calculate, given flight level, temperature and ASI instrument/position error, TAS
− Calculate, given true track/course, TAS and wind velocity, Magnetic Heading
− Calculate, given TAS, track/course and wind velocity/wind component, Groundspeed
033 01 01 05 Completion of pre-flight portion of the navigation plan
− Calculate top of climb (TOC) and top of descent (TOD) position
− Compute leg times and total en-route time
− Nominate departure and arrival routes
− Identify omitted track/course and distance values from a partially completed flight plan
− Calculate or obtain from the chart said items and complete said flight plan
033 01 02 00 Completing the Fuel Plan
033 01 02 01 Computation of planned fuel for each leg and total flight plan
Fuel
− Compute the planned flight planned fuel using:
− En-route times from the navigation plan
− Fuel consumption tables/graphs contained in Pilot's Operating Handbook
− Calculate the maximum range given the appropriate data
033 01 02 02 Compute fuel for holding or diversion to an alternate airfield
− Define alternate and final reserve fuel and state the requirements for piston and turbine engines
− Extract data to calculate the holding fuel
− Calculate fuel required destination to alternate
0033 01 02 03 Reserve Fuel
− State the possible events and incidents that necessitate the carriage of contingency fuel
− Quote and describe the requirements for contingency fuel for small aircraft as detailed in JAR-OPS
− Calculate contingency fuel
− Enumerate the components of reserve fuel
− State that additional fuel is required in special circumstances when trip, contingency, alternate and final reserve fuel are in
sufficient for:
− Holding at 1500'(450m) above the airfield in ISA conditions
− an engine failure and /or depressurisation at the critical point between alternates and/or destination
− Calculate the additional fuel if necessary
033 01 02 04 Total Fuel required for the flight−
− Calculate the block fuel for a flight:
− Trip fuel
− Contingency fuel
− Alternate fuel
− Extra fuel at captain's discretion
− Taxi fuel (depending on aircraft type and airfields)
− Final reserve fuel
033 01 02 05 Completion of the pre-flight portion of the fuel log.

− Complete a part finished fuel log, using fuel tables/graphs or other appropriate data
033 01 03 00 Flight Monitoring and In-flight replanning
033 01 03 01 In-flight fuel computations
− Calculate and record in-flight fuel quantities remaining at navigational checkpoints

033 01 03 02 Calculate actual rate of fuel consumption
− Calculate actual fuel consumption rate given:
− the fuel used
− flight time
− Compare actual consumption with planned consumption, by calculation or a Flight Progress Chart
− Compare fuel remaining with fuel required
033 01 03 03 Revision of the estimates of the fuel reserves
− Calculate the remaining fuel at a checkpoint with reference to the fuel used and actual fuel flow
033 01 03 04 Replanning the flight in the event of fuel problems
− Revise fuel plan by:
− selecting a new destination if necessary
− selecting cruise altitude and power settings for original or new destination
− calculating revised flight time given distance, track/course, wind velocity and TAS
− calculating current fuel state, fuel required and reserves
State that, in the case of a flight revision, the commander has to check the traffic at, and the condition of, the new destination
airfield and its designated alternate. The commander must also check the meteorological conditions at the new destination and
designated alternate airfield before the decision to continue the flight to the new destination or alternate. The aircraft must be able
to land with the final ( minimum ?) reserve fuel
033 01 04 00 Radio communication and navigation aids
− Extract communication frequencies from the manuals/ directories and charts provided.
033 01 04 01 Communication frequencies and callsigns for appropriate control agencies and in-flight services such as weather stations
− Obtain communication frequencies and callsigns for appropriate control agencies and in-flight service facilities, Flight
Information Services, Automatic Terminal Information Service stations, and weather information
033 01 04 02 Radio navigation and approach aids
− Locate selected radio navigation aids and determine the:
− type of facility and service available
− frequency
− identification
− modulation/emission designator, where appropriate
033 02 00 00 ICAO ATC FLIGHT PLAN

033 02 01 00 Types of Plan
− Quote the difference between an Individual and Repetitive Flight Plan (RPL)
ICAO Flight Plan
− Explain the format of an ICAO flight plan
− Enumerate the reasons for its format
− State and describe the information required:

− Aircraft identification as ICAO airline identification/ flight number, or aircraft registration
− Flight rules
− Type of flight
− Number of aircraft/wake turbulence category
− Communication/navigation equipment carried
− Four letter aerodrome identification, or ZZZZ with name stated at "Other Information"
− Estimated "Off Block" time (EOBT)
− First cruising speed and level
- Route (including changes of speed, level and/or flight rules)
− Destination aerodrome and total estimated elapsed time (EET), alternate aerodrome(s). Use of ICAO four letter aerodrome
designator or ZZZZ with name stated at "Other Information"
− Other information in the preferred sequence
− Supplementary Information:
− Endurance
− Persons on board
− Emergency and survival equipment, aircraft colour and markings and remarks
− State the regulations regarding a repetitive Flight Plan
033 02 02 00 Completing the flight plan
033 02 02 01 Information for the plan
− Obtain information for the completion of the Flight Plan from the navigation plan, the fuel plan, the operator=s records for
basic aircraft information plus the mass and balance records.

033 02 03 00 Filing the flight plan
033 02 03 01 Procedures for filing

− State, in relation to EOBT, the earliest and latest ATC filing time, for onward transmission by the Aeronautical Fixed
Telecommunications Network (AFTN)
− Describe the procedure if take-off is delayed
033 02 03 02 Agency responsible for processing the flight plan
− Nominate the ATC agency responsible for:
− checking adherence to the correct format and presentation of data, and accuracy
− taking necessary corrective action
− advising the operator of acceptance and/or changes
033 02 03 03 Explain the circumstances when a State requires earlier filing of a Flight Plan
033 02 04 00 Closing the flight plan
033 02 04 01 Responsibilities and Procedures
− State who is responsible for closure of the flight plan
− Indicate the closure time-scale
033 02 04 02 Nominate the flight plan processing agency
033 02 04 03 Checking slot time
− Define slot time/calculated take-off time produced by Central Flow Management Unit (CFMU)
033 02 05 00 Adherence to flight plan
033 02 05 01 Tolerances allowed by the state for types of flight plan
− State that there are national differences (Details not required)
− State where these differences are published

− List the items subject to differences
033 02 05 02 In-flight flight plan amendment
− State the agency responsible for filing an amendment
− Nominate the ATC unit tasked with handling the amendment
− List the items which can be amended in the air
− Quote, in reference to those filed, the maximum time and/or speed differences allowed, before an amendment should be
made
033 03 00 00 PRACTICAL FLIGHT PLANNING VFR
033 03 00 00 Chart Preparation
033 03 01 00 Plot tracks and measure distances
033 03 01 01 − Locate and plot the checkpoints and draw the route with reference to:
− Prohibited Areas
− Danger areas
− Prohibited areas
− Other airspace restrictions
− Locate the highest obstacle within 5nm either side of intended track
− Extract the following data from the chart and record it on the navigation form:
− Checkpoints/turning points
− Distances in nautical miles as measured at the meridian scale
− True track/course
033 03 02 00 Navigation Plan

Completing the navigation plan
− Record on the flight log the tracks/courses and distances derived from the prepared chart
− Calculate headings using:
− Variation
− Wind velocity provided
− TAS
− Track/course
033 03 03 00 Simple Fuel Plans
033 03 03 01 Preparation of fuel logs showing planned values
− Calculate the fuel for each leg using:
− flight level
− temperature
− distance
− wind velocity
− Calculate the fuel remaining at the end of each leg
− Compute the endurance based upon the fuel remaining and the planned consumption at the end of a sector
033 03 04 00 Radio Planning Practice

033 03 04 01 Communications
− Extract the frequencies and callsigns of ATC agencies and in-flight services e.g. weather information.
033 03 04 02 − Obtain the frequencies and identifiers of en-route and terminal facilities
033 04 00 00 IFR (AIRWAYS) FLIGHT PLANNING

033 04 01 00 Meteorological Considerations
033 04 01 01 Analysis of weather patterns affecting routes
− Locate and name different weather systems :
− Warm/cold fronts
− Occlusions
− Depressions/high pressure areas
− Thunderstorms
− Hurricanes
033 04 01 02 Analysis of wind patterns affecting routes
− Interpolate and extract wind velocities and temperatures for chosen routes and flight levels
033 04 01 03 Analysis of existing and forecast weather conditions at destination and alternate aerodromes
− Analyse departure, destination and alternate TAFs and METARs to determine:
− Wind velocity
− Visibility
− Runway visual range (RVR)
− Precipitation
− Cloudbase
− Temperature
033 04 02 00 Selection of routes to destination and alternates

033 04 02 01 Preferred airways routings
− Select the preferred airways routing with reference to:
− AIP standard routes
− Domestic routes
− Obstacles
− Shortest distance
− Wind velocities
− North Atlantic Track System (NAT)
− Westbound tracks A, B, C - G or H
− Eastbound tracks Z, Y, X - T or S
− Define:
− Minimum Time track (MTT)
− Minimum Cost Track (MCT)
033 04 02 02 Extraction of tracks and distances from RAD/NAV chart
− Extract tracks/courses and distances from the chart(s)
033 04 02 03 Selection of frequencies and identifiers of en-route navigation aids
− Locate frequencies and identifiers of en-route navigation facilities from the chart(s)
033 04 02 04 Selection of the minimum en-route altitudes/heights for a given route or route sector.
− Locate and explain the following:
− The Minimum safe En-route IFR Altitude (MEA)
− The Minimum Obstacle Clearance Altitude (MOCA)

− The Minimum Off Route altitude (MORA)
− The Minimum Sector Altitude (MSA)
− The Minimum Authorised Altitude (MAA)
− The Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA)
− The Minimum Descent Height (MDH)
− The Minimum Crossing Altitude (MCA)
− The Minimum Holding Altitude (MHA)
033 04 02 05 Standard Instrument Departure (SID) and Standard Arrival Route (STAR) charts
− Explain why SIDs and STARs indicate pictorial, as opposed to scale, presentations
− Elucidate the following from a SID/STAR
− Frequencies and identifications of navaids
− Radials/tracks/courses
− Distances and DME distances
033 04 03 00 General Flight Planning Tasks
033 04 03 01 Checking of AIP and NOTAM for latest airfield information
− Extract the follow up-dated airfield and route information from the above documents:
− Opening hours
− Navaids
− Maintenance that effects procedures
− Frequency changes
− Status of en-route navaids
− Frequency changes to en-route navaids
− Airway restrictions/closures
− Information on Prohibited, Danger and Restricted areas
033 04 03 02 Selection of the altitudes or flight levels for each leg of the flight.
− Select the correct altitude/flight level for each sector of the flight
− Calculate the MSA for the flight
− Calculate true altitudes to ensure statutory minimum clearance
− Calculate , given mass, TAS and air distance, the altitude which gives the wind component for the best fuel mileage
− Compute the fuel mileage penalty when the optimum altitude is not available
033 04 03 03 Obtaining true heading and groundspeed on each leg

− Calculate the above given track/course, wind velocity/component and TAS
033 04 03 04 Calculation of the en-route times for each leg to the destination and alternate, and to determination of the total en-route
time.
− Calculate the time for each leg to the destination and the diversion
− Summate the total en-route time
033 04 03 05 Completion of a fuel plan
− Complete the fuel block and compute the total fuel:
− Trip fuel
− Alternate fuel
− Extra fuel
− Taxi fuel
− Calculate the final reserve fuel
033 04 03 06 Pre-flight briefing on Instrument Approach Procedures and Instrument Approach Minima at destination and alternate
aerodrome(s)
− State the reasons for the above requirement
− Select, given a wind velocity, an appropriate STAR at a destination and alternate
033 04 03 07 See 033 02 00 00 ICAO ATC FLIGHT PLAN
033 05 00 00 JET AEROPLANE FLIGHT PLANNING (Additional considerations)
− Explain, interpret and apply ETOPS rules
− State and interpret decision point procedures
− Calculate the fuel required for an Extended Range Twin Operations (ETOPS) flight
033 00 01 00 Additional Flight Planning aspects for Jet Aeroplanes (Advanced Flight Planning)
033 00 01 01 Fuel planning
− Calculate:
− en-route time, distance and fuel
− the fuel flow from appropriate data
− the air distance and fuel consumption for a given leg/route
− Determine time and fuel for climb, cruise and descent
− Determine time and fuel, overhead to overhead, at the given flight level, making allowances for additional time and fuel for
the climb and descent
− Calculate required trip fuel from an average fuel flow
− Compute required trip fuel by summating the fuel needed for each component sector of a route, using the integrated range
tables and air nautical miles flown in the separate sectors
− Determine the following fuel amounts:
− Taxi fuel
− Trip fuel
− Alternate fuel
− Extra fuel for safety or economy
− Block fuel take-off fuel
− State the principle of the Are-clearance point@ ( RECPLT) or Adecision point@ flight planning procedure
− State the reason for implementing the re-clearance flight plan when the difference between Minimum Take-off Fuel
(MINTOF) and the Allowable Take-Off Fuel (ALLTOF) is equal to, or smaller than, the Contingency FUEL (CONT)
− Explain :
− Mass re-clearance
− Fuel re-clearance
− Determine the first possible RECPLT/decision point using
the rule of thumb, given flight plan and re-clearance airport
− Calculate the fuel quantities required for MINTOF
− Calculate the fuel from departure to re-clearance aerodrome

− Calculate the MINTOF for re-clearance
− Calculate MINTOFF from departure to re-clearance airfield
− Calculate the fuel required from the RECLPT to the re-clearance airfield using the integrated range tables
− Compute the fuel quantities at the RECPLT
− Calculate and log the navigation data from the RECPLT to the re-clearance airport
− Calculate the fuel required when the destination is an Aisolated aerodrome@
− Enumerate the reasons for the use of computer and manually produced flight plans and why manual flight planning is used
as a back-up
03 05 01 02 Computation of a CRITICAL POINT (CP) OF EQUAL TIME (PET), POINT OF NO RETURN(PNR)/POINT OF SAFE
RETURN(PSR).
− Find the distance to the CP/PET

− Calculate the time and distance to the PNR/PSR
033 05 02 00 Computerised Flight Planning
033 05 02 01 General principles of the present systems
− State, and describe, the advantages and disadvantages of a computer navigation plan
033 06 00 00 PRACTICAL COMPLETION OF A FLIGHT PLAN (navigation plan/flight log)
033 06 01 00 Extraction of data
− Extract from the planning charts, SID/STARs and instrument approach and landing charts, the following :
− Variation
− Waypoints (bearing and distances from beacons, co-ordinates
− tracks/courses
− distances
− obstacle heights and elevations
− classification of airspace
033 06 01 02 Extraction of meteorological data
− Decode and extract:
− Wind velocity and required levels
− Jetstream position
− Areas of turbulence and clear air turbulence (TURB)
− Temperatures at different levels
− Icing conditions and freezing level
− Cloud base/thickness
− Precipitation
− thunderstorms
033 06 01 03 Extraction of aircraft performance data
− Determine, from performance data
− TOC/TOD time, distance and fuel
− TAS
− Fuel flow
− Short distance cruise altitude
033 06 01 04 Completion of a navigation plan

− Calculate and log:
− TAS
− Total ground distance
− Block Fuel
− State the method of recording time information inoperation flight plans
− Define departure and arrival time
033 06 01 05 Completion of a fuel plan
− Extract the following data:
− TOC/TOD time, distance and fuel
− Cruise altitude, distance and fuel to TOD and destination
− Fuel required from destination to alternate for a missed approach, climb to en-route altitude, cruise, descent, approach
and landing
− Extract TAS at a flight level from a graph or table
− Calculate payload and maximum additional payload and landing mass at an alternate
033 06 01 06 See 033 05 01 02 CP/PNR
033 06 01 07 Completion of air traffic flight
− Complete an air traffic flight plan using the instructions from the nominated airways charts and latest AIC.
JAR 040 HUMAN PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS
040 01 00 00 HUMAN FACTORS BASIC CONCEPTS
040 01 01 00 Human Factors in aviation

− State that Human Factors training is an ICAO and JAA requirement.
− Justify the relevance of Human Factors in aviation.
040 01 01 01 Competence and limitations

− Define the roles played by various participants in aviation activities with respect to flight safety
and the limitations of individuals and organisations in the improvement to flight safety.
040 01 01 02 Becoming a competent pilot

− Describe the general classification of the factors to be considered in assessing the competency
of any individual pilot.
− Outline the factors in training that will ensure the future competency of the individual pilot,
e.g. the relationship between self-confidence and expertise.
040 01 03 00 Flight safety concepts

− Analyse the flight accident statistics and point out the proportion of human error. Discuss its implication for flight safety concepts.
− Indicate the importance of error detection and list various methods of detection.
− Explain the importance for flight safety of understanding the causes and categories of accidents
and incidents.
− Describe and compare the elements of the SHELL model.
− Summarise the relevance of the SHELL model to work in the cockpit.
− Analyse the interaction between the various components of the SHELL model.
− Explain how the interaction between individual crew members can affect flight safety.
− Identify and explain the interaction between flight crew and management as a factor in flight safety.
040 02 00 00 BASIC AVIATION PHYSIOLOGY AND HEALTH MAINTENANCE
040 02 01 00 Basics of flight physiology

− List those factors which may affect the normal working of the human body when in flight.
040 02 01 01
The atmosphere
− State the units used in measuring total and partial pressures of the gases in the atmosphere.
− State in terms of % and mm Hg the values of Oxygen, Nitrogen and other gases present in the atmosphere.
− State that the volume percentage of the gases in ambient air will remain constant for all altitudes
at which conventional aircraft operate.
− State the physiological significance of the following Laws and be able to carry out calculations using
those laws:
- Boyle’s Law
- Dalton’s Law
- Henry’s Laws
- The General Gas Law
− State the ICAO standard temperature at Mean Sea Level and the Standard Temperature Lapse Rate.
− State at what altitudes in the standard atmosphere the atmospheric pressure will be 1/4, 1/3 and 1/2
of MSL pressure.
− State the effects of increasing altitude on the overall pressure and partial pressures of the various
gases in the atmosphere.
− Explain the differences in gas expansion between alveolar and ambient air when climbing.
− State the condition required for human beings to be able to survive at any given altitude.
− With regard to respiration, identify the most important gases of the atmosphere.
040 02 01 02
Respiratory and circulatory systems
− List the main components of the respiratory system and their function.
− Identify the different volumes of air in the lungs which are important for determining pulmonary function.
− State the values for the normal rate of breathing and the volume of air exchanged with each normal breath ('tidal volume').
− State how oxygen and carbon dioxide are transported throughout the body.
− Explain the process by which oxygen is transferred to the tissues and carbon dioxide
is eliminated from the body.
− Explain the role of carbon dioxide in the control and regulation of respiration.
− Describe the process of inhalation and exhalation ('external respiration') and the
metabolism of carbohydrates in the body ('internal respiration').
− List the factors determining pulse rate.
− Name the major components of the circulatory system and describe their function.
State the values for a normal pulse rate and the average cardiac output (heart rate x stroke volume) of an adult at rest.
− Name the four chambers of the heart and state the function of the individual chambers.
− Differentiate between arteries, veins, and capillaries in their structure and function.
− State the functions of the coronary arteries and veins.
− State the function of pressoreceptors.
− Define 'systolic' and 'diastolic' blood pressure and give standard values for an adult at rest.
− State the normal blood pressure ranges and units of measurement.
− Classify the effects of age on normal blood pressure range.
− List the symptoms of a person in circulatory shock.
− List the composition of the blood and the purpose of the constituent parts.
− Explain the function of the hemoglobin and state the percentage of oxygen saturated in the
blood at MSL and at 10,000 ft.
− Indicate the effect of increasing altitude on hemoglobin oxygen saturation.
− Define the following terms associated with failures in the respiratory/circulatory systems and analyse their significance for the conduct
of a safe flight:
− Hypoxia
− Define 'hypoxia' and state why living tissues require oxygen.
− State that healthy people are able to compensate for altitudes up to 10 - 12,000 ft.
− Identify at least three conditions causing hypoxia in flight.
− List the signs and symptoms of hypoxia, define their characteristics and determine
their role in flight safety.
− Name the three physiological thresholds and allocate the corresponding altitudes for each of them.
− State the altitude at which short term memory begins to be affected by hypoxia.
- Define the terms 'Time of Useful Consciousness' (TUC) and 'Effective Performance Time' (EPT).
− State the TUC for 20,000 ft, 30,000 ft, 35,000 ft and 43,000 ft for a person at rest and for 25,000 ft when the person is moderately
active.
− Explain why it is unsafe to fly above 10 - 12,000 ft without using additional oxygen or being in a pressurised cabin.
− List the factors determining the severity of hypoxia.
− State the precautions to be taken when giving blood.
− State the equivalent altitudes when breathing ambient air and 100% oxygen for MSL, 10,000 ft, 35,000 ft, and 38,000 ft.
- State how adequate oxygen is provided above 38,000 ft.
- Hyperventilation
- Describe the role of carbon dioxide in hyperventilation.
- Describe the effects of hyperventilation on the acid-base balance of the blood, the capacity of the hemoglobin to transport oxygen
and the supply of oxygen to the cells.
- Define the term 'hyperventilation'.
- List the factors causing hyperventilation.
- List the signs and symptoms of hyperventilation and define their charactersitics.
− Identify symptoms of hyperventilation for given flight conditions.

- Describe the effects of hyperventilation on muscular coordination.
- List measures which may be taken to counteract hyperventilation.
- Decompression Sickness
- State the normal range of cabin pressure altitude in pressurised commercial aircraft and describe their protective function for
aircrew and passengers.
− Identify the causes of decompression sickness in flight operation.
- State how decompression sickness can be prevented.
- State the threshold for the onset of decompression sickness in terms of altitude.
- List the symptoms of decompression sickness.
- Indicate how decompression sickness symptoms may be treated.
- List the vital actions the crew has to perform when cabin pressurisation is lost.
- Define the hazards of diving and flying and give the regulations associated with these activities.
− Acceleration
- Define 'linear', 'angular' and 'radial acceleration'.
- Describe the effects of acceleration on the circulation and blood volume distribution.
- List the factors determining the effects of acceleration on the human body.
- Describe measures which may be taken to increase tolerance to positive acceleration.
− List the effects of positive acceleration with respect to type, sequence and the corresponding G-load.
− Anaemic hypoxia
- Define 'anaemia'.
- State how carbon monoxide may be produced.
- State how the presence of carbon monoxide in the blood affects the distribution of oxygen.
- List the signs and symptoms of carbon monoxide poisoning.
- Indicate how carbon monoxide intoxication can be treated.
- State the normal blood pressure ranges and units of measurement.
- Classify the effects of age on normal blood pressure range.
List the factors that may predispose an individual to heart attack.
040 02 01 03
High altitude environment
− Ozone
- State how an increase in altitude may change the proportion of ozone in the atmosphere.
- List the possible harmful effects of ozone.
- List the means to counteract the effects of ozone.
− Radiation
- State the sources of radiation at high altitude.
- List the effects of excessive exposure to radiation.
- State the effect of sun storms on the amount of radiation at high altitude.
- List the harmful effects that may result from the extra radiation that may be generated
as the result of a sun storm (solar flares).
- List methods of reducing the above effects.
− Humidity
- Define the terms ‘humidity’ and ‘relative humidity’.
- List the factors which affect the relative humidity of both the atmosphere and cabin air.
- State the methods of reducing the effects of too high or too low humidity.
- List the physiological effects of dry cabin air and indicate measures to diminish their effects.
- Extreme Temperatures
- Define the oxygen requirements under the exposure of extreme
temperatures.
040 02 02 00 Man and environment: the sensory system
− List the different senses.
− State the multi-sensory nature of human perception.
−
040 02 02 01 Central and peripheral nervous system
− Name the main parts of the central nervous system.
− State the basic functions of the central nervous system.
− Define the function of the brain as the ‘processor’ of different sensory inputs ad the origin of cognitive processes and the site of
memory.
− State the part that the cerebellum plays in balance and coordination.
− Define the division of the peripheral nerves into sensory and motor nerves.
− State the nature of a nerve impulse as an electro-chemical phenomenon.
− Define the term ‘sensory threshold.
− Define the term ‘sensitivity’, especially in the context of vision.
− Give examples of sensory adaptation.
− Define the term ‘habituation’ and state its implication on safety in flight.
− State the basic functions of the autonomous (vegetative) nervous system.
− Define biological control systems as neuro-hormonal processes that are
highly self regulated in the normal environment.
− Define the reaction called 'reflex'.
040 02 02 02 Vision
− Name the most important parts of the eye and the pathway to the visual cortex.
− State the basic functions of the parts of the eye.
− Define 'accommodation'.
− State the effect of speed on the function of the photosensitive cells.
− Distinguish between the functions of the rod and cone cells.
− Describe the distribution of rod and cone cells in the retina and explain their relevance on perception.
− Explain the terms ‘visual acuity’, ‘visual field’, ‘central vision’, ‘peripheral vision’, 'fovea' and
explain their function in the process of perception.
− List the factors which may degrade visual acuity.
− State the limitations of night vision.
− Explain the adaptation mechanism in vision to cater for reduced levels of illumination.
− State the time necessary for the eye to adapt to the dark.
− State the effect of hypoxia and smoking on night vision.
− Explain the basic principles of colour vision and their relevance to flight duties.
− Explain the nature of colour blindness.
− Distinguish between monocular and binocular vision.
− Explain the basis of depth perception and its relevance to flight performance.
− List possible monocular cues for depth perception.
− State the problems of vision associated with higher energy blue light and ultra violet rays.
040 02 02 03
Hearing
− State the audible range of the human ear.
− State the unit of measure for the intensity of sound.
− Name the most important parts of the ear and the associated neural pathway.
− State the basic functions of the different parts of the auditory system.
− Differentiate between the functions of the vestibular apparatus and the cochlea in the inner ear.
− Define the main causes of the following hearing defects:
- 'Conductive deafness'
- 'Noise Induced Hearing Loss' (NIHL)
- 'Presbycusis'.
− Summarise the effects of environmental noise on hearing.
− State the decibel level of received noise that will cause NIHL.
− Indicate the factors, other than noise level, which may lead to NIHL.
− Identify the potential occupational risks to hearing loss.
− State the role of the Eustachian tube in equalizing pressure between the middle ear and the environment
- Indicate the effects of colds or flu on the ability to equalize pressure in the above.
040 02 02 04
Equilibrium
− List the main elements of the vestibular system.
− State the functions of the vestibular organ on the ground and in flight.
− Distinguish between the component parts of the vestibular system in the detection of linear and angular acceleration as well as on
gravity.
− Explain how the semicircular canals are stimulated.
− Describe air-sickness and its accompanying symptoms.
− Indicate the range (Hertz) where vibration and tuned resonances can effect human performance.
− List the causes of motion sickness.
− Describe the necessary actions to be taken to counteract the symptoms of motion sickness.
040 02 02 05
Integration of sensory inputs
− State the interaction between vision, equilibrium, proprioception and hearing to obtain spatial orientation in flight.
− Define the term ‘illusion’.
− Give examples of visual illusions based on shape constancy, size constancy, aerial perspective, atmospheric perspective, the
absence of focal or ambient cues, autokinesis, vectional false horizons and surface planes;
− Relate these illusions to problems that may be experienced in flight and identify the danger attached to them.
− State the conditions which cause the ‘black hole’ effect and ‘empty field myopia’.
− Give examples of approach and landing illusions, state the danger involved and give recommendations to avoid or counteract these
problems.
− State the problems associated with flickering lights (strobe-lights, anti-collision lights, etc.)
− List the type of external stimuli that the components of the inner ear are able to perceive.
− Give examples of vestibular illusions such as somatogyral, coriolis, somatogravic, and g-effect illusions as well as inversion and 'the
leans';
− Relate the above mentioned vestibular illusions to problems encountered in flight and state the dangers involved.
− Be familiar with oculogyral and oculogravic illusions and the associated risks involved in flight.
− List and describe the function of the proprioceptive senses ('Seat-of-the Pants-Sense').
− Relate illusions of the proprioceptive senses to the problems encountered during flight.
− State that the 'Seat-of-the-Pants-Sense' is completely unreliable when visual contact with the ground is lost or when flying in IMC.
− Define 'vertigo', list the corresponding symptoms and identify the flight maneuvers provoking it.
− Differentiate between vertigo, coriolis effect and spatial disorientation.
− Explain flicker-vertigo and give counter measures.
− Explain how spatial disorientation can result from a mismatch in sensory input and information processing.
− List the measures to prevent and/or overcome spatial disorientation and/or vertigo in flight.
040 02 03 00 Health and hygiene
040 02 03 01
Personal hygiene
− Summarise the role of personal hygiene as a factor in human performance.
040 02 03 02
Common minor ailments
− List the negative effects of suffering from colds or flu on flight operations especially with regard to the middle ear, the sinuses, and
the teeth.
− Explain the effects of pressure changes to structures in the ear and the implications of these effects.
− State the role of the Eustachian tube in equalizing pressure between the middle ear and
the environment.
− Indicate the effects of colds or flu on the ability to equalize pressure in the above.
− Describe the measures to prevent and/or clear problems due to pressure changes during flight.
− Define 'Barotrauma'.
− Indicate the major sources of gastro-intestinal upsets , state the effects that may result during flight and exhibit precautions that
should be observed to reduce the possibility of these problems.
040 02 03 03 − Problem areas for pilots
− Hearing loss
- List the main cause of hearing loss.
- List the main sources of hearing loss in the flying environment.
- List the precautions that may be taken to reduce the probability of onset of hearing loss.
Defective vision
- List the major causes of defective vision in:
- Long sightedness (Hypermetropia)
- Short sightedness (Myopia)
- Presbyopia
- Cataracts
- Glaucoma
- Astigmatism.
- State the corrective action necessary to compensate for defective vision.
- Differentiate between the corrective lenses for long/short sightedness.

− State the rules, at present in force, for the wearing of corrective glasses or contact lenses when operating as a pilot.
− Describe the requirements of good sunglasses being used in modern glass cockpits.
− List the type of sunglasses which could cause perceptional problems in flight.
− List the measures which may be taken to protect oneself from flashblindness.
− State the possible effects that low humidity may have on the efficient functioning of the eye.
Techniques in visual perception
- Define the term 'scanning technique'.
- Explain, why it is important to visually scan the area by using regularly spaced eye movements each covering an overlapping sector of
about 10 degrees.
- State the duration of a saccade (dwelling time) while performing the outside visual scan.
- Explain the difference between the scanning technique used during the day and the appropriate
technique to be used when flying at night.
− Describe the significance of the 'blind spot' on the retina in detecting other traffic in flight.
- Hypertension
- Define 'hypotension' and its importance on medical disqualification.
- List the effects that low blood pressure may have on some
normal functions of the human body.
- Hypertension
- Define 'hypertension'.
– State the harmful effects that high blood pressure will have on the normal functioning of the body and on medical qualification.
- List the factors which can lead to hypertension in an individual.
- State the corrective actions that may be taken to reduce high blood pressure.
- Stress that hypertension is the major factor in ‘strokes’ in the general population.
- Coronary disease
− Differentiate between ‘angina’ and ‘heart attack’.

− List the major factors that may make an individual vulnerable to a heart attack.
− State the techniques that may be used to control or reduce the effect of coronary disease.
− State the role played by physical exercise in reducing the chances of developing coronary disease.
− Obesity
- Define 'obesity'.
- State the cause of obesity.
- State the harmful effects of obesity on:
- Possibility of developing coronary problems
- Increased chances of developing diabetes
- Ability to withstand g forces
- The development of problems with joints of the limbs
- General circulation problems
- Higher risk of developing gout
- Ability to cope with hypoxia or DCS
- State the relationship between obesity and Body Mass Index (BMI).
- Calculate the BMI of an individual (given weight in Kg and height in metres) and state whether this BMI indicates that the individual
is underweight, overweight, obese or within the normal range of body weight.
− Nutrition hygiene
- State the major constituents of a healthy diet.
- State the measure to avoid hypoglycamia.
- State the role vitamins and trace elements are playing in a healthy diet.
- List the major contaminating sources in foodstuffs.
- State the actions to be taken to avoid food contamination.
− Tropical climates
- List the problems associated with operating in tropical climates.
- State the possible causes/sources of incapacitation in tropical or poorly developed countries
with reference to:
- Standards of hygiene
- Quality of water supply
- Insect-borne diseases
- Parasitic worms
- Rabies or other diseases that may be spread by contact with animals.
- State the precautions to be taken to reduce the risks of developing problems in tropical areas.
− Epidemic diseases
- State the major epidemic diseases that may kill or severely incapacitate individuals.
- State which preventative hygenic measures, vaccinations, drugs, and other measures, reduce the chances of catching these
diseases.
- State the precautions which must be taken to ensure that disease carrying insects are not transported between areas.
040 02 03 04 − Intoxication
Tobacco
- State the harmful effects of using tobacco on:
- The respiratory system
- The cardio-vascular system
- The ability to resist hypoxia
- The ability to tolerate g forces
- Night vision
− Caffeine
- Indicate the dose where the effects of caffeine are degrading performance.
- Besides coffee, indicate other beverages containing caffeine.
Alcohol
- Indicate a general rule governing flying and drinking alcohol.
- State the effects of consuming alcohol on:
- Ability to reason
- Inhibitions and self control
- Vision
- Sense of balance and sensory illusions
- Sleep patterns
- Susceptibility to hypoxia
- In combination with drugs.
- Identify the WHO definition of ‘alcoholism’.

- List the signs and symptoms of an individual suffering from alcoholism.
- List the factors which may be associated with the development of alcoholism.
- Indicate the basis of the ‘unit’ of alcohol and the factors determining the rate of metabolisation.
− State the maximum daily and weekly intake of units of alcohol which may be consumed without causing damage to organs and
systems in the body.
− State the actions to be taken if a crew member is suspected of being an alcoholic.
- Drugs and self medication
- State the dangers associated with the use of non prescription drugs.
- State the side affects of common non prescription drugs used to treat colds, flu, hay fever and other allergies especially medicines
containing anti-histamine preparations.
- Interpret the general rule that ‘if a pilot is so unwell that he requires any medication then he should consider him/herself unfit to fly.
− Toxic materials
- List those materials present in an aircraft which may, when uncontained, cause severe health problems.
- State the dangers of mercury spillage in an aircraft.
- List the possible sources of mercury in an aircraft.
- List those aircraft component parts which if burnt may give off toxic fumes.
040 02 03 05
Incapacitation in flight
− State that incapacitation is most dangerous when it is insinuating.
− List the major causes of in-flight incapacitation.
− Differentiate between ‘fits’ and ‘faints’.
− State the assistance that my be given by EEG tracings in deciding the likelihood of an individual suffering a fit.
− Recognise the importance of simulator training as a method of reducing accident/incident rate in cases of incapacitation.
040 03 00 00 BASIC AVIATION PSYCHOLOGY
040 03 01 00 Human information processing
Attention and vigilance

− Differentiate between ‘attention’ and ‘vigilance’.
− Define ‘hypovigilance’.
− Identify the factors which may affect the state of vigilance.
− List the factors that may forestall hypovigilance during flight.
− Indicate signs of reduced vigilance.
− Name factors that affect a person's level of attention.
− Distinguish between selective and divided attention.

− Discuss the effects of performing simultaneous tasks in respect to the level of consciousness involved and demonstrated level of
performance.
− Interpret consequences for work in a multi-task environment and name tools which increase safety.
040 03 01 02
Perception
− Name the basis of the perception process.
− Describe the mechanism of perception ('bottom-up'/'top-down' process)
− Illustrate the subjectivity of perception and state the relevant factors which influencing the interpretation of perceived information.
− Describe some basic perceptual illusions.
− Illustrate some basic perceptual concepts and laws.
− State examples where perception plays a decisive role in flight safety.
040 03 01 03
Memory
− List the three types of memory.
− Explain the link between the three types of memory.
− Describe the differences between the three types of memory in terms of capacity and retention time.
- Justify the importance of sensory store memories in processing information.
- State the average maximum number of separate items that may be held in working memory.
− Find examples of items that are important for pilots to be held in working memory during flight.
− Describe how the working memory store’s capacity may be increased.
− State the sub-divisions of long term memory and give examples of their content.
− Define the three different forms of information stored in long term memory.
− Name the common problem with long term memory and how to counteract it.
040 03 01 04
Response selection
Define 'learning'
Explain and distinguish between the following basic forms of learning:
- Classical and operant conditioning (behaviouristic approach)
- Learning by insight (cognitive approach)
- Learning by imitating (modeling).
− Find pilot related examples for each of these learning forms.
− State factors which are necessary for and promote the quality of learning.
− Explain ways to facilitate the memorization of information by the following learning techniques:
- Mnemonics
- Mental training
− Explain the relationship between motivation and learning, performance, and attention
− Describe the advantage of planning and anticipation of future actions.
− Define the term 'skills'.
− State the phases of learning a skill (ANDERSON).
JAR HUMAN PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS
− Explain the term 'motor-programme' or 'mental schema'.
− Explain the following phases in connection with the aquisition of automated behaviour:
- Cognitive phase
- Associative phase
- Automatic phase.
− Describe the advantages and disadvantages of mental schemata.
− Explain the model by RASMUSSEN which describes the guidance of a pilot's actions in different situations.
- State possible problems or risks associated with skill-based, rule-based, and knowledge-based behaviour.
040 03 02 00 Human error and reliability
040 03 02 01
Reliability of human behaviour
− Summarise the current approach to human error in aviation and identify its consequences.
− Name and explain factors which influence human reliability.
040 03 02 02 Hypotheses on reality
− Describe the relationship between perception and various realities.
− List factors which influence one’s sense of reality.
− Define the term 'mental model' in relation to a surrounding complex situation.
− Describe the advantage/disadvantage of mental models.
− Explain the relationship between personal ‘mental models’ and the creation of cognitive illusions.
040 03 02 03
Theory and model of human error
− Define the term 'error'.
− Explain the concept of the error chain.
− Differentiate between an isolated error and an error chain.
− State examples of an isolated error and an error chain.
− Distinguish between different forms/types of errors (e.g. RASMUSSEN, REASON).
− Compare unintended and intended deviations from standards, leading to negative consequences.
− Distinguish between an active and a latent error and give examples.
040 03 02 04
Error generation
− Distinguish between internal and external factors in error generation
− Identify possible sources of internal error generation.
− Define the term 'environmental capture'.
− Define the term 'deterioration effect'.
− List the three main sources for external error generation.
− Give examples to illustrate the following factors in external error generation in the cockpit:
- Ergonomics
- Economics
- Social environment.
− Name major goals in the design of human centred man-machine interfaces.
− Define the term 'error tolerance'.
− List (and describe) strategies which are used to reduce human error.
040 03 03 00
Decision making
04 03 03 01
− Define the term 'deciding' and 'decision making'.
Decision making concepts

− Describe the major factors in the progress of flight on which a decision should be based ('Judgement Concept').
− Describe the main positive capabilities in an individual's decision making mechanism.
− Describe the main error sources and limits in an individual's decision making mechanism.
− State the factors an individual's risk assessment is based on.
− Explain the relationship between risk assessment, commitment, and pressure of time on decision making strategies.
− Describe the positive and negative influence by other group members on decision making.
− Explain the general idea behind the creation of particular models (“recipes”) for decision making processes.
− Illustrate a practical approach of decision making in a crew.
040 03 04 00
Avoiding and managing errors: cockpit management
040 03 04 01
Safety awareness
− Justify the need for being aware of one's own performance before and during a flight and possible consequences of its result as part
of a pilot's professionalism.
− Define the term 'situation(al) awareness'.
− Name the three cognitive elements which are necessary to create an adequate situation awareness.
− Identify factors which interfere with being 'situationally aware'.
− List cues which indicate the loss of situation awareness.
− Name the main steps towards regaining lost situation awareness.
− Justify the value of situation awareness in the context of flight safety
040 03 04 03
Co-operation
− Distinguish between co-operation and co-action.
− Define the term 'group'.
− Illustrate the influence of interdependence in a group.
− List the advantages and disadvantages of team work.
− Explain the term 'synergy'.
− Define the term 'cohesion'.
− Define the term 'groupthink'.
− Define the term ‘risky shift’.
− State the essential conditions for good teamwork.
− Explain the function of role and norm in a group.
− Name the different roles in a group situation.
− Explain how behaviour can be affected by the following factors:
- Persuasion
- Conformity
- Compliance
- Obedience.
− Distinguish between status and role.
− Explain the terms ‘leadership’ and 'followership’.
− Describe the trans-cockpit authority gradient and its affiliated leadership styles.
− Illustrate different leadership styles (BLAKE & MOUTON) and judge their influence on communication patterns and behaviour of crew
members.
− Name the most important attributes for a positive leadership style.
− Explain the duty and role of the Pilot in Command (PIC).
− Explain the duty and role of the First Officer (FO) and other crew member.
040 03 04 04
Communication
− Explain the function and measurement of 'information'.
− Define the term 'communication'.
− List the very basic four components of interpersonal communication (e.g., BERLO).
− Explain the advantages of two-way communication as opposed to one-way communication.
− Interpret the statement "One cannot not communicate." (Watzlawick).
−
− Distinguish between verbal and non-verbal communication.
− Name the functions of non-verbal communication.
− Describe general aspects of non-verbal communication.
− Explain the various levels of communication (SCHULZ VON THUN):
- Factual level
- Appeal level
- Self-disclosure level
- Relation level.
− Describe the advantages/disadvantages of implicit and explicit communication.

− State the attributes of a 'professional' language.
− Name practical interpersonal communication rules to obtain and maintain a good image of the situation.
− Explain the effect of incompatibility between verbal and non-verbal communication.
− Explain the difference between intra- and interpersonal conflict.
− Describe the escalation process in a destructive conflict.
− List typical consequences of conflicts between crew members.
− Explain the following terms as part of communication practice in regard to preventing or solving conflicts:
- Inquiry
- Active listening
- Advocacy
- Feedback
- Metacommunication
- Negotiation
- Arbitration.
040 03 05 00 Personality
040 03 05 01
Personality and attitudes
− Describe the factors determining an individual's behaviour.
− Define and distinguish between personality, attitude, and behaviour.
− State the origin of personality and attitutes.
− Summarise the influence of pilot relevant personality traits and dangerous attitudes on pilots' performance in the cockpit environment.
040 03 05 02
Individual differences in personality
− Describe the individual differences in personality by the mean of a common trait model
(e.g., EYSENCK's personality factors) and use it to describe today's ideal pilot.
− State the most important personality trait for effective crew decision making.
- Motivation
- Define motivation.
- Explain the influences of different level of motivation on performance in respect of arousal and task difficulty.
- Explain the ‘Model of human needs’ (MASLOW).
- Distinguish between the stages of the ’Model of human needs’ by citing practical examples.
- Illustrate the influence of human needs on flight safety.
- Explain the basic model that identifies two independent sources of motivation;
justify its conclusion on possible developments concerning an individual's job satisfaction.
− Summarise the advantages and disadvantages of extreme need for achievement.
− Self-concept
- Define the term 'self-concept'.
- Decribe the likely influence of promotion (e.g., FO to Cpt) on an individual's self-concept.
− Self-discipline
- Define 'self-discipline' and justify its importance for flight safety.
− Summarise examples of mental states and behaviour endagering flight safety.
040 03 05 03 Identification of hazardous attitudes (error proneness)

− Name the hazardous attitudes endangering flight safety.
− Describe the signs of hazardous attitudes and behaviour by a flight crew member.
− Describe the attitude and behaviour of an ideal crew member.
− Summarise the influence of one’s basic attitude on working in the cockpit.
040 03 06 00 Human overload and underload
040 03 06 01
Arousal
− Explain the term 'arousal'.
− Describe the relationship between arousal and performance.
− Recognise the graphical representation of the above relationship.
040 03 06 02
Stress
− Explain the term 'homeostasis'.
− Explain the term 'stress' and why it is a natural reaction.
− State that the physiological response to stress is generated by the ‘fight or flight’ response.
− Describe the function of the autonomic nervous system (ANS) in stress response.
− Explain the biological reaction to stress by means of the 'general adaptation syndrome' (GAS).
− Explain the relationship between arousal and stress by referring to the effects of "good" and "bad" stress.
− State the relationship between stress and performance.
− Explain the differences between stress factors and stress reactions.
− State the basic categories of stress factors.
− Name major stress factors.
− List the major environmental sources of stress in the cockpit.
− State the acceptable amount of workload with regard to crew resources available before it becomes an unacceptable stress factor.
− Name the major sources of domestic stress.
− State that the stress experienced by a particular demand varies between individuals.
− Explain the process which is responsible for the individual differences in experiencing stress.
− Explain the difference between stress factors and risk factors.
− List factors influencing the tolerance of stressors.
− Create and explain a simple model of stress.
− Explain the relationship between stress and anxiety.
− Describe the effects of anxiety on human performance.
− State the general effect of acute stress on the human system.
− Name the symptoms of stress relating to the different phases of the GAS.
− Describe the relationship between stress, attention, and vigilance.
− State the general effect of chronic stress on the human system.
− Explain the differences between psychological, psychosomatic and somatic stress reactions.
− Name typical common physiological and psychological symptoms of human overload.
− Describe effects of stress on the personality.
− Explain how stress is cumulative and stress from one situation can be transferred to a different situation.
− Explain how successful completion of a stressful task will reduce the amount of stress experienced when a similar situation arises in
the future.
− List sources and symptoms of human underload.
− Describe the effect of human under/overload on effectiveness in the cockpit.
040 03 06 03
Fatigue
− Explain the term 'fatigue' and its two types.
− Name causes for both types.
− Identify symptoms and describe effects of fatigue.
040 03 06 04
Body rhythms and sleep
− Name some internal body rhythms.

− Explain the term ‘circadian rhythm’.
− State the approximate duration of a ‘free-running’ circadian rhythm.
− Explain the significance of ‘Zeitgebers’ in regulating the normal circadian rhythm.
− State the effect of the circadian rhythm of body temperature on one’s performance standard and the effect on an individual’s sleep
sequence.
− List and describe the stages of a sleep cycle.
− Differentiate between REM and non-REM sleep
− Explain the function of sleep and describe the effects of insufficient sleep on performance.
− Explain the simple calculations for the sleep/wake credit/debit situation.
− Explain how sleep debt can become cumulative.
− State the time formula for the adjustment of body rhythms to the new local time scale after crossing time zones.
− State the problems caused by circadian disrhythmia (jet-lag) on an individual's performance and sleep sequence.
− Differentiate between the effects of westbound and eastbound travel.
− Explain the interactive effects of circadian rhythm and vigilance on a pilot's performance during flight over the day.
− Describe the main effects of lack of sleep on an individual's performance.
− List possible coping strategies for jet-lag.
040 03 06 05
Fatigue and stress management
− List strategies which prevent or delay the onset of fatigue and hypovigilance.
− List and describe coping strategies for dealing with stress factors and stress reactions.
− Distinguish between short-term and long-term methods of stress management.
− Give examples of short term methods of stress management.
− Give examples of long-term methods of coping with stress.
040 03 07 00 Advanced cockpit automation
− Define and explain the basic concepts of automation.
040 03 07 01 Advantages and disadvantages (criticalities)
− List the advantages/disadvantages of automation in the cockpit in respect of level of vigilance, attention, workload, situational
awareness, and crew coordinat
− State the advantages and disadvantages of the two components of the man-machine system in regard to information input and
processing, decision making, and output activities.
− Explain the ‘ironies of automation’.
− Give examples of methods to overcome the disadvantages of automation.
− Interpret the present philosophy on automation in regard to the usage of automated systems by available man-machine interfaces
and pilots' duties.
040 03 07 02
Automation complacency
− State the main weaknesses in the monitoring of automatic systems.
− Explain the following terms in connection with automation:
- Passive monitoring.
- Blinkered concentration.
- Confusion.
− Give examples of actions to overcome the weaknesses in monitoring.
Define ‘complacency’.
040 03 07 03 Working concepts
− Analyse the influence of automation on crew communication and propose necessary consequences.
− Summarise approaches to counteract negative effects of automation on pilots.
− Interpret the role of automation in respect to flight safety.
JAR METEOROLOGY
References:
− SN = School Notes
− HAM = Handbook of Aviation Meteorology (1994)
− EM = Elementary Meteorology (HMSO 1981)
− MG = Meteorological glossary (HMSO 1991)
− WS = Weather Systems (LF Musk C.U.P 1996)
− GS = Ground Studies for Pilots Vol 1 (1993)
− Annex 3 = Annex 3 to the convention on International Civil Aviation (July 1995)
− AP3307 = Elementary Meteorology for Aircrew
− UK AIP GEN = Meteorological section of UK Air Pilot
− AIC = UK CAA Aeronautical Information Circular
050 00 00 00 METEOROLOGY
050 01 00 00 THE ATMOSPHERE
050 01 01 00 Composition, Extent, Vertical & Division
050 01 01 01 − State the 4 main components of the dry atmosphere and list the 13 trace components.
− State the limits of the WADC atmosphere (chemosphere, stratosphere, troposphere).
050 01 02 00 Temperature
050 01 02 01 − State how temperature varies with height above the surface in an ideal atmosphere.
050 01 02 02 − List and explain the means by which heat is transferred within the atmosphere and variations in effect.
050 01 02 03 − Define the term ‘lapse rate’.
− Explain ‘stability’ and ‘instability’ in the meteorological context
JAR METEOROLOGY
− Understand the connection between lapse rate and stability/instability.

050 01 02 04 − Describe how inversions are caused and their various types
050 01 02 05 − List and explain temperature variations at the surface, causes and effects.
050 01 03 00 Atmospheric pressure
050 01 03 01 − Explain the meaning of ‘Atmospheric Pressure’ and how it is shown on meteorological charts by means of Isobars.
050 01 03 02 − Show how atmospheric pressure varies with height
050 01 03 03 − Explain the need to reduce atmospheric pressure to mean sea level and how this is achieved (QFF/QNH).
050 01 03 04 − Draw typical low and high pressure systems
− Understand their characteristics
− Show surface and upper air wind directions associated with these systems.
050 01 04 00 Atmospheric Density

− (Define atmospheric density and name 3 ways in which it may be measured)
050 01 04 01 − Show the effect of pressure on density
− Show the effect of temperature in density
− Show the combined effect of temperature and pressure on density and explain the apparent anomaly.
050 01 05 00 International Standard Atmosphere (ISA)
050 01 05 01 − List the reasons for the ISA
− List the MSL conditions for ISA
− List the values of lapse rate of temperature in the ISA and heights at which these vary.
JAR METEOROLOGY
− Understand the meaning of the term ‘ISA deviation’ and be able to calculate deviations given different heights and
temperatures.
050 01 06 00 Altimetry
050 01 06 01 − Explain the terms ‘Pressure altitude’, ’Density altitude’ and ‘True altitude’ and show their uses in aircraft operation.
− Explain qualitatively the influence of the air temperature on the distance between
− The ground and the level read on the altimeter
− Two flight levels
− Determine with a rule of thumb the density altitude for a given flight level and a given ISA temperature deviation
050 01 06 02 − Explain the terms ‘Height’, ‘Altitude’ and ‘Flight level’ and their uses in aircraft operation.
050 01 06 03 − Explain the terms ‘QNH’, ‘QFE’, ‘QFF’, ‘Standard setting’ and their relationship to serials 01 and 02 above.
050 01 06 04 − Calculate terrain clearance given terrain height/ elevation, altimeter setting and QFE/ QNH.
− Calculate lowest usable flight level given terrain elevation, QNH, minimum terrain clearance.
− Know the Rule of Thumb for calculating altimeter readings/ true altitudes given variation in pressure and temperature. (HI-
LO-HI)
050 01 06 05 − Understand the effect of accelerated airflow due to topography and its relevance to aircraft operations.
050 02 00 00 WIND
050 02 01 00 Definition and Measurement
050 02 01 01 − State the meteorological definition of wind
− Show how winds are measured at the surface and at altitude
− State the units used world-wide for the measurement of winds
− Know the terms used for the change of direction/ speed of winds.
JAR METEOROLOGY
050 02 02 00 Primary Cause of Wind

050 02 02 01 − Explain why winds occur
− Define ‘Pressure gradient’. And show its relationship with isobars.
− Define ‘Pressure gradient force’
− Define ‘Coriolis force’ and state the formula for ‘Geostrophic force’.
− Show how geostrophic winds are formed, their variation with altitude and latitude and necessary conditions.
− Define ‘Gradient wind’ and explain the difference from geostrophic wind
050 02 02 02 − State the relationship between isobars and winds and state Buys - Ballots Law. Show how winds may be measured on
isobaric charts.
050 02 02 03 − Show how convergence and divergence due to surface friction or change of pressure affect winds.
050 02 03 00 General Circulation
050 02 03 01 − Draw the circulation of air around the ideal globe and the resulting winds and bands of latitude.
050 02 04 00 Turbulence
050 02 04 01 − Define turbulence and gustiness
− List the basic divisions of turbulence
050 02 04 02 − List and explain the formation of turbulence:
- In the friction layer
- In cloud
- In clear air.
050 02 05 00 Variation of Wind with Height
050 02 05 01 − Show how wind varies in speed and direction in the friction layer due to the nature of the surface and the time of day.
JAR METEOROLOGY
050 02 05 02 − Show how the passage of a frontal system affects the speed and direction of the wind. Differentiate between cold warm
fronts
050 02 06 00 Local Winds
050 02 06 01 − Describe the formation, location, strength and where applicable, local names of the following types of wind:-
- Anabatic
- Katabatic
- Land and Sea breezes
- Valley or ravine
050 02 07 00 Jet Streams
050 02 07 01 − Understand the principle of thermal winds and calculate approximate speeds given thermal gradient
− Define “Thermal Wind” and find upper winds given lower winds and thermal winds
− Define “Jet Streams” and show their relationship to mean temperature
050 02 07 02 − Describe the two main types of high level jet stream and their locations.
050 02 07 03 − List the names (probably means “types”), heights and seasonal movement of jet streams. (Polar Front, Sub-tropical,
Equatorial)
050 02 07 04 − List the characteristics of jet streams which enable them to be recognised in the air, from the ground and on meteorological
charts.
050 02 07 05 − Explain the reason for CAT in jet streams
− Show by means of a diagram the location of maximum CAT
− Describe how jet stream CAT may be forecast
050 02 08 00 Standing Waves
050 02 08 01 − Describe the formation of standing waves and list the requirements for their occurrence
JAR METEOROLOGY
− List the turbulence effects to be expected

− List the visual recognition features
050 03 00 00 THERMODYNAMICS
050 03 01 00 Humidity
050 03 01 01 − Describe the processes by which water vapour appears in the atmosphere and its importance in meteorology.
050 03 01 02 − Define “dewpoint”
− Define “ mixing ratio” (probably means humidity mixing ratio)
− Define “relative humidity” and show how it varies with temperature.
− Describe how dewpoint, humidity mixing ratio and relative humidity may be measured.
050 03 02 00 Change of State of Aggregation
(This term is connected with the formation of snow flakes and should perhaps be “liquid”)
050 03 02 01 − Define and explain:-
- Condensation
- Evaporation
- Sublimation
- Freezing and melting
- Latent heat
- (Saturation)
- Freezing Nuclei
050 03 03 00 Adiabatic Processes
050 03 03 01 − Define “adiabatic temperature changes”
JAR METEOROLOGY
− Define the “dry adiabatic lapse rate”

− Define the “saturated adiabatic lapse rate”
− Explain the reason for the difference between DALR and SALR and the variations of SALR with Altitude/ temperature
− Understand the significance of the adiabatic lapse rates with regard to stability and instability
050 04 00 00 CLOUDS AND FOG
050 04 01 00 Clouds formation and Description
050 04 01 01 − List and describe the process by which air is cooled to produce condensation
− Describe how clouds are formed by turbulence, orographic up lift, convection, advection, frontal up lift and convergence
050 04 01 02 − Define the 3 main classes of cloud and list their characteristics
− List the 10 basic types of cloud, their height ranges in temperate latitudes and be able to recognise them
050 04 01 03 − Describe how inversions affect cloud development.
050 04 01 04 − Describe the flying conditions to be expected in each of the cloud types in 050 04 01 02(b) above.
050 04 02 00 Fog Mist Haze
− Define fog, mist, haze
050 04 02 01 − Describe the formation, location, timing and dispersal of:
To - Radiation Fog
050 04 02 05 - Advection Fog
- Steaming Fog
- Frontal Fog
- Orographic (probably hill or up slope Fog)
JAR METEOROLOGY
050 05 00 00 PERCIPITATION
050 05 01 00 Development of Precipitation
050 05 01 01 − Describe the Bergeron process
− Describe the coalescence process
050 05 02 00 Types of Percipitation
050 05 02 01 − List the types of precipitation, the clouds in which they form, (their significance to aircraft operations)
050 06 00 00 AIRMASSES AND FRONTS
050 06 01 00 Types of Airmasses
050 06 01 01 − Define the term “air mass”
− State the requirements of source regions
− List the properties of an air mass
− State how these properties are acquired
050 06 01 02 − List the main classification of air masses
− Identify source regions on a chart
− Show how air mass properties are modified when moving away from the source region
− Describe the characteristics of each air mass and weather produced in Europe
050 06 02 00 Fronts
050 06 02 01 − Define the term “front”
− List the main global fronts and show their locations on a chart
050 06 02 02 − Define the term “warm front”
− Contrast ‘ana’ and ‘kata’ fronts
JAR METEOROLOGY
− List the clouds associated with the front, their positions vertically and horizontally
− List the weather expected
− Show how wind changes with frontal passage
− Know the symbology used on charts
050 06 02 03 − Define the term “Cold Front”
− List the clouds associated with the front, their positions vertically and horizontally
− Show how wind changes with frontal passage
050 06 02 04 − Define the term “warm sector”
− List the clouds associated with the warm sector
− Draw a warm sector depression showing changes of temperature pressure and winds
050 06 02 05 − Describe the weather expected after the passage of a cold front
050 06 02 06 − Describe the formation of an occlusion
− Show the difference between warm and cold occlusions
− Draw cross sections through the 2 occlusions showing frontal surfaces, clouds and areas of precipitation
− Identify cold/warm occlusions on weather charts
JAR METEOROLOGY
050 06 02 07 − Define the term “stationary front”

− Describe the weather at the front
− Identify the front on a weather chart
050 06 02 08 − Plot the movement of fronts and pressure systems on weather charts
050 07 00 00 PRESSURE SYSTEMS
050 07 01 00 Location of the Principal Pressure Areas
050 07 01 01 − Name the principal areas on the globe where depressions and anticyclones occur.
050 07 02 00 Anticyclones
050 07 02 01 − Describe the formation, shape, properties of:
- Cold Anticyclones
- Warm Anticyclones
- Ridges and Wedges
050 07 03 00 Non Frontal Depressions
050 07 03 01 − Describe the formation, shape, properties of:
- Thermal depressions
- Orographic depressions
- Secondary depressions
- Troughs
- Cold air pools
050 07 04 00 Tropical Revolving Storms
050 07 04 01 − Describe the formation, development, properties of tropical revolving storms.
JAR METEOROLOGY
050 07 04 02 − List the names, locations and times of occurrence of tropical revolving storms and the WMO warning system
050 08 00 00 CLIMATOLOGY
050 08 01 00 Climatic Zones
050 08 01 01 − Draw a diagram showing air circulation over an idealized globe showing wind flow patterns and pressure distribution.
050 08 01 02 − Draw a diagram showing the climatic zones on an ideal globe and list and describe the associated weather and seasonal
variations
050 08 02 00 Tropical Climatology
050 08 02 01 − Describe and explain:
- The cause and development of tropical showers
- The variation and amount of humidity
- The range and variation of temperature
- The height of the tropopause
- Seasonal Variations of Weather
- Seasonal Variations of Wind
- Typical Synoptic Situations
- Trade winds, doldrums, horse latitudes, roaring forties
050 08 02 03 − Define the ITCZ
− Draw the position of the ITCZ on a map of the world for any time of the year
− Explain the variation in seasonal movement in different areas
− Describe the weather to be expected at the ITCZ
JAR METEOROLOGY
- Monsoons
- Tradewinds
- Sandstorms
- Cold air outbreaks (e.g The Harmattan)
050 08 02 05 − Describe and explain easterly waves.
050 08 03 00 Typical Weather Situations in Mid-Latitudes
050 08 03 01 − Describe and explain westerly waves.
050 08 03 02 − Describe the weather to be expected in mid latitude high pressure areas and their locations
050 08 03 03 − Describe the uniform pressure pattern existing in mid-latitudes. (Continental Europe)
050 08 03 04 − Describe the formation and significance of cold pools over continental Europe
050 08 04 00 Local Seasonal Weather and Winds
050 08 04 01 Describe the formation of, and weather associated with some well-known winds
− Describe the classical mechanism for the development of Foehn winds
− Describe the weather associated with Foehn winds
− Describe the mechanism for the development of large-scale warming winds such as the “Chinook”
− Describe the characteristics of and weather associated with the ‘Mistral’
− Describe the characteristics of and weather associated with the ‘Bora’
− Describe the characteristics of and weather associated with the ‘Sirocco’, the ‘Ghibli’ and the ‘Khamsin’
JAR METEOROLOGY
− Explain the formation of tropical rain showers, called ‘Sumatras’, in the Malacca Straits
− Explain and describe the weather associated with the ‘Pampero’
− Describe the ‘Harmattan’ wind and associated visibility problems
050 09 00 00 FLIGHT HAZARDS

050 09 01 00 Icing
050 09 01 01 − Describe the formation of ice on airframes and engines detailing weather conditions leading to icing, intensity and effects of
topography.
050 09 01 02 − List the various types of icing, detailing:
- Appearance
- Formation
- Effects on operations
- Severity
050 09 01 03 − List the hazards associated with ice accretion and the action to be taken to avoid or lessen the effects.
050 09 02 00 Turbulence
050 09 02 01 − Describe the effects of turbulence on aircraft operations and how it is avoided
− List the reaction of aircraft to light, moderate and severe turbulence.
− Describe wake turbulence
050 09 02 02 − Describe CAT and it effect on flight.
050 09 03 00 Windshear
050 09 03 01 − Define vertical windshear
− List the weather conditions producing vertical windshear
JAR METEOROLOGY
050 09 03 02 − Define horizontal windshear

− List the weather conditions producing horizontal windshear
050 09 03 03 − List and describe the effects of windshear on aircraft operations
050 09 04 00 Thunderstorms
050 09 04 01 − Describe:
- The structure of a thunderstorm cell
- Supercells
- The development of squall lines
- The three stages of development
- The structure of cells during each stage
- The production of electricity in storms cells
- Static charges
050 09 04 02 − List the condition necessary for the formation and development of thunderstorms
− State how thunderstorms are forecast (Clouds, temp, rate)
− List the areas where thunderstorms occur
− Describe the difference between the two types of thunderstorms
050 09 04 03 − List the means by which thunderstorms may be avoided and the recommended avoidance distances.
− Describe the types of ground and airborne thunderstorm radars, stormscope (unable to identify, but may be lightweight
CCWR.)
050 09 04 04 − Describe the development and effects of downbursts (Microbursts?)
JAR METEOROLOGY
050 09 04 05 − Describe the production of lightning within thunderstorm cells and its effect on aircraft operation.
050 09 05 00 Tornadoes
050 09 05 01 − Describe the formation, location and time of occurrence of tornadoes
050 09 06 00 Low and High Level Inversions
050 09 06 01 − Describe the effects of inversions on aircraft performance/handling at low and high level.
050 09 07 00 Stratospheric Conditions
050 09 07 01 − State how variation of tropopause height and wind, temperature, density and turbulence affects aircraft performance
050 09 07 02 − State the effects of ozone and radioactivity (cosmic radiation?) on aircraft operations and measures to be taken to counter
these effects.
050 09 08 00 Hazards in Mountainous Areas
050 09 08 01 − Describe how terrain in mountainous areas will affect:
- Cloud formation
- Precipitation
- Frontal passage
- FÐhn winds
050 09 08 02 − Describe the occurrence, formation and severity of:
- Vertical movements
- Mountain waves and rotor streaming
- Windshear
- Turbulence
- Ice accretion
050 09 08 03 − Describe how valley inversions are formed by:
JAR METEOROLOGY
- Katabatic winds
- Valley winds
− Describe their effect on aircraft operations
050 09 09 00 Visibility Reducing Phenomena
050 09 09 01 − List the meteorological conditions giving rise to the following reductions in visibility giving also where applicable, locations,
time of occurrence, severity, dispersal:
- Mist
- Smoke
- Dust
- Sand
- Precipitation
050 09 09 02 − Describe how low drifting and blowing snow may reduce visibility.
050 10 00 00 METEOROLOGICAL INFORMATION

050 10 01 00 Observation
050 10 01 01 − List and describe the means by which the following are measured:
- Surface wind
- Visibility
- Runway visual range (RVR)
- Instrumented runway visual range
JAR METEOROLOGY
- Cloud type and amount - Oktas

- Height of cloud base and tops – Ceiling/Cloud base
- Cloud movement
- Precipitation
- Air temperature
- Relative humidity
- Dewpoint
- Atmospheric pressure
050 10 01 02 − Describe briefly the means by which upper air observations are made (radiosonde).
050 10 01 03 − (Describe briefly the two satellite systems used for meteorological observations)
− name the main uses of satellite pictures in aviation meteorology
− Define the different types of satellite imagery
− Interpret satellite pictures with regard to fronts, jet streams, heap and layer clouds
050 10 01 04 (See also 050 09 04 03)
− Understand the basic principles underlying the observation of weather by radar and the interpretation of radar images.
050 10 01 05 − Understand the international requirements for aircraft weather reporting
− Understand the principal data link system in use world-wide
− Describe ASDAR
− Describe PIREPS/ AIREPS
050 10 02 00 Weather Charts
050 10 02 01 − Interpret the following aeronautical meteorological charts:
JAR METEOROLOGY
- Significant weather (all levels)

- tropopause and maximum wind velocity
050 10 02 02 − Decode and interpret surface weather charts.
050 10 02 03 − Interpret and extract wind velocities from upper air charts (Includes ‘constant pressure charts’)
050 10 02 04 − Interpret analysed and prognostic charts (synoptic and forecast)
050 10 03 00 Information for Flight Planning
050 10 03 01 − Decode/Interpret the following:
- METAR
- TAF
- SPECI
- SIGMET
- SNOWTAM
- MOTNE runway report (Sic) (additional information on runway state transmission at end of MET).
050 10 03 02 − List the contents of the following:
- VOLMET
- ATIS
- HF-VOLMET
- ACARS
050 10 03 03 − List and describe and interpret pre-flight documentation available
050 10 03 04 − List the regulations covering meteorological briefing pre- and in-flight
050 10 03 05 − List and describe the measuring and warning systems for low-level windshear and marked temperature inversion.
050 10 03 06 − List the regulations covering special meteorological warnings
JAR NAVIGATION GENERAL
061 00 00 00 NAVIGATION GENERAL

061 01 00 00 BASICS OF NAVIGATION
061 01 01 00 Describe the orbital relationship between the Earth and the Sun
− State the main components of the Solar System
− State the shape of the Earth’s orbit
− State Kepler’s laws
− Define ‘perihelion’ and ‘aphelion’
− State approximately when, and at what distance from the Sun ‘perihelion’ and ‘aphelion’ occur.
− State the inclination (tilt) of the Earth
− State the direction of rotation of the Earth
− Briefly explain the cause of the seasons
− Define ‘apparent’ and ‘mean’ sun
− Explain the difference between movements of the apparent sun and the mean sun
− State the latitude of:-
- Tropic of Cancer
- Tropic of Capricorn
- Arctic Circle
- Antarctic Circle
− Define ‘Equinox’ and ‘Solstice’
− State when Equinoxes and Solstices occur.
- Declination
- Hour Angle
- Altitude (of an astronomical body)
- Ecliptic
- Plane of the Ecliptic
− Describe the effect of the Earth’s inclination on the length of a day
061 01 02 00 Describe the Form of the Earth
− State the shape of the Earth
− Define ‘Compression’
− Define the term ‘reduced earth’
− Explain how compression affects navigation
− Define East, West, North, South
− Define ‘Pole’
− Use the Sexagesimal system to define Direction
− Define Great Circle, Small Circle, Rhumb line
− Explain the term ‘Position Reference System’
− Explain how a position reference system may be developed on a sphere
− Define Equator, Meridians, Parallel of Latitude
− Define Latitude, Longitude
− Plot a position on a simple chart
− Measure the Latitude/Longitude coordinates of a position
− Calculate difference of latitude

− Calculate difference of longitude
− Define convergency and state how it varies with latitude
− Calculate convergency between 2 meridians
− Measure convergency between 2 meridians
− Define conversion angle
− Calculate conversion angle
− Calculate Great Circle and Rhumb line directions
− Calculate changes in Great Circle directions with difference in longitude
− Define the vertex of a Great Circle
− Calculate where and at what angle a Great Circle crosses the Equator
− Define the terms:
- Geodetic/Geographic Latitude
- Geocentric Latitude
− State the maximum difference between Geographic/Geodetic Latitude and Geocentric Latitude
061 01 03 00 Solve basic time problems
− Explain the term ‘transit’ as applied to an astronomical body.
− Explain the apparent movement of the heavenly bodies across the sky
− Define ‘apparent’ time
− Define ‘mean’ time
− Explain the differences between apparent and mean time
− Define:-
- ‘Solar day’ (apparent Solal day)
- Sidereal’ day
- ‘Mean Solar’ day (Civil day)
− Define the term ‘Equation of time’ and state its relevance
− Define and state the value of:-
- Sidereal Year
- Tropical Year
- Calendar Year
− Define Local Mean Time. (LMT)
− Convert arc of longitude into units of time
− Define Universal Coordinated Time (UTC)
− State how UTC is regulated
− State the relationship between LMT at a point and UTC
− State how LMT varies across the 180° meridian
− Calculate LMT/ UTC at different longitudes
− Explain Zone Time
− Calculate Zone Time at a given longitude
− Define standard time. (ST)
− Explain why the International Date Line varies about the 180 meridian
− Extract Standard Time corrections for any country listed in the Air Almanac
− Calculate Standard Time for any country listed in the Air Almanac
− Explain the purpose and effect of the Implementation of Summer Time (Daylight Saving Time)
− Solve time problems involving conversion between LMT, UTC and ST
− Define sunrise and Sunset
− Explain how atmospheric refraction affects sunrise/sunset
− Explain the term ‘twilight’
− Define the term ‘Evening Civil Twilight’
− Define the term ‘Duration of Civil Twilight’
− Explain how sunrise, sunset and civil twilight vary with:-
- Declination of the sun (season)
- Latitude
− Extract the LMT for sunrise, sunset and civil twilight from an Air Almanac
− Solve time problems relating to sunrise, sunset and civil twilight
061 01 04 00 Calculate directions on the Earth with relation to true, magnetic, compass and grid datums
− Briefly describe the Earth’s magnetic field
− State the approximate locations of the magnetic poles
− Define the term ‘Magnetic Meridian’
− Define ‘Variation’
− Explain the effect on Variation of the movement of the magnetic poles
− State the relationship between true direction and magnetic direction
− Inter-convert true and magnetic direction
− Define the terms:-

- ‘Isogonal’
- ‘Agonic Line’
- Dip (Inclination)
- Isocline
- Aclinic Line
− Identify Isogonals on a chart
− State how Isogonals are updated
− State the angle of inclination at the magnetic poles
− State the problems of magnetic compass operation near the magnetic poles
− Briefly explain ‘deviation’
− State how deviation varies heading and magnetic latitude
− State how a pilot may obtain the value of deviation
− State the relationship between magnetic direction and compass direction
− Inter-convert true, magnetic and compass directions
− Briefly explain the reasons for using a grid datum
− Define:-
- Datum Meridian
- Grid North
- Grid Convergence
− State how grid convergence changes with difference of longitude from the datum meridian
− Calculate grid convergence

− Interconvert grid direction and true direction
− Define:-
- Grivation
- Isogriv
− Calculate grivation at a point on a gridded chart
− Interconvert true, grid and magnetic direction
− State the datum meridian of a ‘Standard’ gridded chart
061 01 05 00 Describe the principles of distance measurement on the Earth
− Define ‘nautical mile’
− State the average value of a nautical mile in feet and metres.
− State the relationship between nautical miles and degrees/minutes of latitude
− State how the value of a nautical mile varies between the Equator and the geographic poles
− Explain how altitude affects the Arc/Distance relationship
− Define ‘Kilometre’
− State the number of Kilometres between the Equator and the poles
− State the value of a statute mile
− Convert between kilometres, nautical miles, and statute miles using a calculator
− Define ‘metre’, ‘yard’ and ‘foot’
− State which measures are used to define height, elevation or altitude
− Calculate the great circle distance between 2 points:-
- On the same meridian

- On meridian and anti meridian
- On the Equator
− Define ‘departure’
− State the formula for departure
− Calculate the departure between 2 meridians
061 02 00 00 MAGNETISM AND COMPASSES
061 02 01 00 Describe the principles of operation of Magnetic compasses
− Describe elementary magnetism
− Describe terrestrial magnetism
− Explain the resolution of the Earth’s total magnetic field into vertical and horizontal components
− State how the vertical and horizontal components vary with magnetic latitude
− Define variation
− Define directive force
− Define “dip”
− Explain how “dip” varies with magnetic latitude
− Define ‘Isocline’
− Define ‘Agonic Line’
061 02 02 00 Describe Aircraft Magnetism
− Define Permanent Magnetism (Hard Iron)
− Define Induced Magnetism (Soft Iron)
− State the effects of Permanent and Induced Magnetism

− Define ‘deviation’
− State the effects of Permanent and Induced Magnetism
− Define ‘deviation’
− State the effects of change of magnetic latitude on deviation
− Calculate deviation
− Calculate coefficients A, B, C
− Describe Turning errors
− Describe Acceleration errors
− Calculate the effect of Turning errors
− Calculate the effect of Acceleration errors
− State the requirement to keep magnetic materials clear of the compass
061 02 03 00 Describe the principles of standby, landing and remote indicating compasses
− State the principle of the Direct Reading Magnetic Compass (DRMC)
− Describe the construction of the DRMC
− State the serviceability checks for a DRMC
− Explain the effect of ‘liquid swirl’
− State the need for compass calibration
− Explain how a DRMC is calibrated
− Justify the need for compass calibration cards
− List the JAR limits for accuracy of a DRMC
− Describe the principles of landing compasses

− State the principle of a Remote Indicating Compass (RIC)
− Describe the construction of RIC
− Explain the operation of the Detector Unit
− List the limitations of an RIC
− Explain the advantages and disadvantages of an RIC
− Explain the term ‘Synchronisation’
− Explain the operation of the annunciator circuit of an RIC
− Describe the control panel of an RIC
− State the serviceability checks for an RIC
061 03 00 00 Charts
061 03 01 00 Describe the principles of projection and general
properties of miscellaneous aeronautical charts
− Explain briefly how charts are constructed
− List the requirements of an ideal chart
− Explain the term ‘projection’ in relation to charts
− Describe, in general terms, the following projections:
- Plane
- Cylindrical
- Corical
− Explain the following terms in relation to projection surfaces
- Normal
- Transverse
- Oblique
− Define scale
− State how scale can be represented
− Explain the term ‘Representative Fraction’
− Solve simple scale problems
− State where, on a simple chart, scale is correct
− Differentiate between small scale and large scale charts in terms of:-
- Area of coverage
- Amount of detail
− Define ‘ORTHOMORPHISM’
− Define ‘Conformal’
− State the ICAO requirements for a conformal chart
− State 2 properties which are required to make a chart ‘orthomorphic’
− Define Chart Convergence
− Explain the term ‘constant of the cone’ (convergence factor / ‘n’)
− State where Chart Convergence is correct on a chart.
− Explain how Chart Convergence differs from (Earth) Convergency
− For each of the following projections:-
- Normal Mercator
- Lamberts conformal conic
- Polar Sterographic
- Transverse Mercator
- Oblique Mercator
− The student will be able to:-
− Briefly explain the method of projection
− State the great circle of tangency/parallel of origin
− State where the scale is correct and how it varies over the chart
− State where scale may be considered to be constant
− State where chart convergency is correct and how it varies over the chart
− Calculate scale at any latitude (Mercator only)
− Calculate the radius of a parallel of latitude given chart scale (Polar Stereo chart only)
− State the most common uses for the chart
061 03 02 00 For the following charts only:-
- Normal Mercator
- Lamberts conformal conic
- Polar stereo
− The student will be able to:-
− State how meridians and parallels are represented
− State the relationship between Rhumb lines/Great Circles/Straight lines
− Calculate the directions of Rhumb Lines/Great Circles/Straight lines by applying the appropriate values of conversion angle
and/or chart convergency
− State how radio bearings (VOR, NDB, VDF, RADAR) are plotted on each chart.
For Transverse / Oblique Mercator charts
− State the shape of great circles and rhumb lines
061 03 03 00 Use current aeronautical charts
− Plot positions by Latitude/Longitude or by range/bearing
− State how scale and relief are indicated on the chart
− Identify conventional symbology
− Measure tracks and distances
− Plot navigation bearings and ranges
− Find all the information for flight / flight planning purposes on the following charts:
- ICAO topographical map
- VFR chart
- Crossing chart
- Radio facility chart
- Terminal Area chart
- Standard Instrument Arrival Chart (STAR)
- Standard Instrument Departure Chart (SID)
- Instrument Approach and Landing Chart
- Aerodrome Chart
- Aerodrome Obstruction Chart
061 04 00 00 DEAD RECKONING NAVIGATION (DR)

061 04 01 00 Complete basic Dead Reckoning (DR) Navigation exercises
− Differentiate between vector and scalar quantities
- Heading
- Course
- Track
- Indicated Airspeed (IAS)
- Air Speed Indicator Reading (ASIR)
- Equivalent Airpseed (EAS)
- Calibrated Airspeed(CAS)
- Rectified Airspeed (RAS)
- True Airspeed (TAS)
- Mach Number (M)
- Ground-speed
- ETA
- Drift
- Wind correction angle (WCA)
- DR position
- Fix position
− Differentiate between Required Track and Track Made Good (TMG)
− Define Track Error
− Explain the relationship between Required Track, TMG, Track Error (TE) and Drift
061 04 02 00 Use a navigation computer to:-
− Calculate TAS
− Calculate required RAS/Mach Number
− Solve speed/distance/time problems
− Inter-convert units of distance
− Interconvert units of volume (Litres, Imperial Gallons, Us Gallons).
− Calculate fuel weights for a given volume and specific gravity (SG)
− Solve simple fuel consumption problems
− Calculate head/tail/crosswind components
061 04 03 00 Explain the triangle of velocities by:-
− Solving simple triangle of velocity problems on graph paper
− Using a navigation computer to:-
- Calculate drift track and ground-speed
- Calculate heading ground-speed
- Calculate wind velocity
− Calculate a multi-drift wind velocity
061 04 04 00 Explain navigation techniques by:-
− Using the 1:60 rule:-
- Explain the 1:60 rule
- Apply the 1:60 rule to navigation problems
− Using formal navigation techniques:-

- Explain the principle of airplot methods
- Explain the principle of trackplot methods
− Describe the procedure for establishing position when ‘lost’
061 04 05 00 Calculate DR elements
Calculate altitude
− Calculate True Altitude given indicated altitude, elevation, temperature and pressure inputs
− Calculate indicated altitude given true altitude, elevation, temperature and pressure inputs
− Calculate density altitude
− Define and explain QFE, QNH and pressure altitude
− Calculate height on a given glide path
− Calculate distance to touchdown
Explain temperature
− Explain the expression ram-air / Total Air Temperature (TAT)
− Explain the term ‘ram-rise’
− Explain the expression ram-air / Total Air Temperature (TAT)
− Explain the term ‘ram-rise’
− Explain the term ‘recovery coefficient’
− Compare the use of OAT and TAT in airspeed calculations
− Calculate airspeed
− Explain the relationship between IAS-CAS-EAS and TAS
− Calculate CAS for a given value of TAS or Mach No

− Calculate TAS by means of DR computer and given IAS or CAS, with various temperature and pressure inputs
− Calculate TAS and GS for use in DR navigation
− Calculate Mach Numbers
061 04 06 00 − Explain how navigation plotting techniques change with use of the following charts
- Normal Mercator
- Lambert’s conformal
- Polar stereographic
− Solve practical DR navigation problems on any of the above charts
061 04 07 00 Define the following terms
− Maximum Range
− Calculate maximum range of an aircraft
− Critical point (CP) (Point of Equal Time)
− Radius of Action
− Calculate Radius of Action
− Point of No Return (PNR) (Point of Safe Return)
− Calculate CP in a simple navigation situation
− Calculate PNR in a simple navigation situation
− State how CP/PNR vary with changes:-
- TAS
- Wind components
- Fuel endurance
− Solve simple CP/PNR problems
061 04 08 00 Miscellaneous DR uncertainties and practical means of correction
− Describe the concept of ‘Circle of Error’
− List the factors that will affect the dimensions of that circle
− Discuss practical methods of compensating these factors
061 05 00 00 IN-FLIGHT NAVIGATION
061 05 01 00 Use of Visual observations and application to in-flight Navigation
− Define ‘map reading’
− Define ‘visual check point’
− Describe map reading technique
− Discuss the general features of a visual checkpoint and give examples
− State that the flight performance and navigation can be refined by evaluating the differences between DR positions and actual
positions
− Establish fixes on navigational charts by plotting visual derived intersecting lines of position
− Describe the use of a single observed position line to check flight progress
− Describe how to prepare and align a map/chart for use in visual navigation
− Describe visual navigation techniques including:
− Use of DR position to locate identifiable landmarks

− Identification of charted features/landmarks
− Factors affecting the selection of landmarks
− An understanding of seasonal and meteorological effects on the appearance and visibility of landmarks
− Selection of suitable landmarks
− Estimation of distance from landmarks from successive bearings
− Estimation of the distance from a landmark using an approximation of the sighting angle and the flight altitude
− Describe the action to be taken, if there is no check point available at a scheduled turning point
− State the function of contour lines on a topographical chart
− Indicate the role of ‘layer tinting’ (colour Gradient) in relation to the depiction of topography on a chart
− Determine, within the lines of the contour intervals, the elevation of points and the angle of the slope from the chart
− Using the contours shown on a chart, describe the appearance of a significant feature
− Understand the difficulties and limitations that may be encountered in map reading in some geographical areas in due to
nature of terrain, lack of distinctive landmarks or lack of detailed and accurate charted data
− Understand that map reading in high latitudes can be considerably more difficult than map reading in lower latitudes since the
nature of the terrain is drastically different, charts are less detailed and less precise and seasonal changes may alter the
terrain appearance or hide it completely from view
− Understand that in areas of snow and ice from horizon to horizon and where the sky is covered with a uniform layer of clouds
so that no shadows are cast, the horizon disappears, causing earth and sky to blend
− Understand that since there is a complete lack of contrast in a ‘white-out’, distance and height above ground distance and
height above ground are virtually impossible to estimate
061 05 02 00 − Describe how navigation calculations are adjusted for climb and descent
− Calculate average airspeed for a climb a descent

− Calculate the wind velocity to be applied in climb and descent
− Calculate the distance covered in climb and descent
− Calculate ETAs in the climb/descent phases of flight
− Find climb/descent gradients
− Evaluate rate of climb/descent to achieve a stated gradient
− Calculate rate of climb or descent to achieve a 3º slope
− Recognise the need to accurately determine position prior to descent
061 05 03 00 − Maintain a navigation plot on a current aeronautical chart, to include:-
- Plotting fixes
- Calculating wind velocity
- Making corrections of heading
- Revising ETA
061 05 04 00 − Maintain a navigation flight log to record information and actions in 061 05 03 00
061 05 05 00 State the principles and purposes of Flight Management Systems (022 02 06 00 refers)
− Indicate the primary functions of an FMS
− Name the two major units of an FMS
− Explain the role of the Flight Management computer (FMC)
− List the components of a standard data package as held in a typical FMC
− Describe the contents of the navigation database
− Indicate how the validity or currency of the navigation data is maintained
− Describe the contents of a typical performance database in an FMC

− List the order of priority applied by the FMC to the selection of radio navigation aids for position fixing
− Explain the role of the Control Display Unit (CDU)
− With the aid of a suitable diagram, locate and explain the role of
− The information blocks on the CRT component of the CDU
− The various keys and key sections the annunciators
− Describe the alert and advisory signals listing typical examples of each category and describing how such signals are
displayed
− Describe the use of the scratch pad/message block
− Describe the role of the FMS in:
- Route management
- Performance management
− Describe the sequence of page display normally appearing during initial power application to the EFIS
061 06 00 00 INERTIAL NAVIGATION SYSTEMS (INS)

061 06 01 00 Describe the principles of Inertial Navigation Systems (INS)
− State the properties of a Gyroscope (022 01 02 01 refers)
− State the principle of construction of INS
− Explain platform mounting
− Explain the principle of accelerometers
JAR RADIO NAVIGATION
062 00 00 00 RADIO NAVIGATION

062 01 00 00 RADIO AIDS
062 01 01 00 GROUND D/F
Principles
− Describe the role of a Ground Direction Finder
− Explain why the services provided are subdivided into VHF and UHF direction finding
− Describe, in general terms, the propagation path of VHF/UHF signals with respect to the ionosphere and the Earth’s surface.
− Describe the principle of operation of the VDF in the following general terms
− radio waves emitted by the radio telephony (R/T) equipment of the aircraft
− directional antenna.
− determination of direction of incidence of the incoming signal
− Indicator
− Recognise the Adcock antenna with its vertical dipoles
Presentation and Interpretation
− Describe the common types of bearing presentations on VDU and radar display.
− Define the terms QDM; QDR; QTE;
− Explain how, using more than one ground DF station, the position of an aircraft can be determined and transmitted to the pilot.
Coverage and Range
− Calculate the line of sight range (quasi optical visual range)
Errors and Accuracy

Factors affecting Range and Accuracy
− Explain that the range is affected by gradients of temperature and humidity
− Differentiate between the phenomena ‘super refraction’ and ‘sub refraction’
− Explain how intervening terrain can restrict the range
− Explain why synchronous transmissions will cause errors
− Describe the effect of multipath signals
062 01 02 00 AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDING (ADF)
(including NDBs and use of RMI/RBI)

Principles
− Name the approved frequency band assigned to aeronautical NDB's (190 - 1750 kHz)
− Recognise typical antenna arrangements for ground station (NDB) and aircraft (ADF)
− Explain the difference between NDB and locator beacons
− State which beacons transmit input signals suitable for use by the ADF
− Define the abbreviation ‘NDB’
− Describe the use of NDBs for navigation
− Describe the use of locator beacons
− Interpret the term 'cone of silence' in respect of a NDB.
− State that the transmission power limits the ranges for locators, en-route NDBs and oceanic NDBs.
− Explain why it is necessary to use a directionally sensitive receiver antenna system in order to obtain the direction of the
incoming radio wave
Presentation and interpretation

− Name the types of indicator in common use and state the indications given on the :
− radio magnetic indicator
− fixed card indicator/ radio compass
− Describe and sketch the presentation on the following ADF indicators:
− radio magnetic indicator (RMI) and
− fixed card indicator/ radio compass
− Describe the procedure for obtaining an ADF bearing including the following :
− switch on instrument (on ADF),
− scan frequency,
− regulate volume,
− receive and identify the NDB,
− read bearing.
− State the function of the BFO (tone generator) switch.

− Calculate the compass bearing from compass heading and relative bearing.
− Convert compass bearing into magnetic bearing and true bearing.
− Describe how to fly the following in-flight ADF procedures (in accordance with DOC 8168 Vol.I) :
− homing
− tracking
− interceptions
− procedure turns
− holding patterns
Coverage and range
− Describe the influence of the transmission power on the range.
− Differentiate between NDB range over land and over the sea
− Identify the ranges of locators, en-route NDB’s and Oceanic NDB’s
− Describe the propagation path of NDB radio waves with respect to the ionosphere and the Earth’s surface
Errors and Accuracy
− Define quadrantal error and identify its cause
− State that compensation for this error is effected during the installation of the antenna.
− Explain the cause of the dip error due to the bank angle of the aeroplane
− Define the bearing accuracy as ± 6°
Factors affecting range and accuracy

− Indicate the causes and/or effects of the following factors
− multipath propagation of the radio wave (mountain effect)
− the influence of skywaves (night effect)
− the shore line (coastal refraction) effect
− atmospheric disturbances (static and lightning)
− interference from other beacons.
062 01 03 00 CONVENTIONAL VOR (CVOR) and DOPPLER VOR (DVOR)
Principles
− Name the frequency-band and frequencies used for VOR
− Interpret the tasks of the following types of VOR:
− En-route VOR
− conventional VOR (CVOR)
− Doppler VOR (DVOR)
− Terminal VOR (TVOR)
− Test VOR (VOT)
− Define a VOR radial

− Recognise antenna arrangements for ground facilities and for aircraft
− Explain the principle of operation of the VOR using the following general terms:
− reference phase
− variable phase
− phase difference
− Read off the radial from the Radio Magnetic Indicator (RMI)
− Read off the angular displacement, in relation to a pre-selected radial, from the HSI or CDI
− Explain the use of the TO/FROM indicator to determine the aircraft position relative to the VOR considering also the heading of
the aircraft
− Explain the use of the Doppler effect in a Doppler VOR
− Describe the identification of a VOR in terms of morse-code letters, continuous tone or dots(VOT), tone pitch, repetition rate and
additional plain text
− Describe how ATIS information is transmitted via VOR frequencies
− Name the three main components of VOR airborne equipment
− Identify a VOR from the chart by chart symbol and/or frequency
− Name the three main components of VOR airborne equipment
− Identify a VOR from the chart by chart symbol and/or frequency
− Interpret given VOR information as displayed on HSI, CDI and RMI.

− Describe the following in-flight VOR procedures (in accordance with DOC 8168 Vol. 1) :
− homing
− tracking
− interceptions
− procedure turns
− holding patterns
− Enter a radial on a navigation chart, taking into account the variation at the transmitter location
Coverage and Range
− Describe the range with respect to the transmitting power and the quasi-optical range in NM
− Calculate the range in NM
− Explain the sector limitations in respect of topography-related reflections
Errors and Accuracy
− Describe the use of a test VOR for checking VOR indicators in an aircraft
− Describe the signals emitted by the test VOR with respect to reference phase, variable phase and transmitted radial.
− Identify the permissible signal tolerance
− State that the 95% accuracy of the VOR bearing information is within + 5°
− Explain why the Doppler VOR is more accurate than the conventional VOR
− Illustrate the effects of bending and scalloping of radials.
062 01 04 00 DISTANCE MEASURING EQUIPMENT (DME)

Principles
− Identify the frequency band
− Illustrate the use of X and Y channels in military applications.
− Describe the tuning of the DME frequency by the pilot
− Describe the navigation value of the slant range measured by the DME
− Illustrate the circular line of position with the transmitter as its centre
− Describe, in the case of co-location, the frequency pairing and identification procedure
− Explain the function of the DME used in conjunction with the instrument approach systems (ILS)
− Recognise DME antennas on aircraft and on the ground
− Identify a DME station on a chart by the chart symbol
− Describe how the pairing of VHF and UHF frequencies (e.g. VOR/DME) enables selection of two items of navigation information
(distance and direction, rho-theta) with one frequency setting
− Explain the combination of transmitter/receiver in the aeroplane (interrogator) and on the ground (transponder)
− Explain why airborne and ground equipment use different frequencies
− Describe the principle of distance determination using DME in terms of:

− pair of pulses;
− fixed frequency division of 63 MHz,
− the propagation delay and
− the 50 microseconds delay time
− irregular transmission sequence
− search mode
− tracking mode
− Explain how the combination of a DME distance with a VOR radial allows the aircraft’s position to be determined
− Describe the identification (time sequence and frequencies) in the case of co-location with a VOR.
− Interpret the direct distance (slant range) which is displayed in nautical miles.
− Explain why DME indicators display distances up to a maximum of approx. 300 NM.
− Calculate the slant range correction
− Describe the use of DME to fly a DME arc (in accordance with Doc 8168 Vol. I).
Coverage and Range

− Explain why a ground station can generally respond to a maximum of 100 aircraft. Identify which aircraft will be denied first, when
more than the maximum number of interrogations is made.
− Illustrate how the DME transponder processes more than 2700 interrogations in the DME's reception area. State how this affects
the strongest signals and the closest aircraft units.
− Describe how the range is related to the transmitter power and the quasi-optical range in NM.
− Calculate the range in NM
Errors and Accuracy
− Interpret the 95% accuracy as stated in ICAO annex 10
− Interpret the relationship between the number of users, the gain of the receiver and the range.
− State the maximum number of aircraft that can be handled by a DME transponder. Explain what limits this value.
− Illustrate the effect of bank angle hiding the antenna from the transponder on the surface, taking into consideration the time limits
of the memory circuit.
− Explain the role of the Echo Protection Circuit in respect of reflections from the earth’s surface, buildings or mountainous terrain
062 01 05 00 INSTRUMENT LANDING SYSTEM (ILS)

Principles
− State the site locations of the ILS components in distances along the centreline of the runway
− Name the three main components of an ILS
− Explain why and how the three different markers are used in the ILS to determine the distance to the ILS touchdown point of the
runway
− State the nominal glide path angle. Explain the reason why a marker beacon is sometimes replaced by be a DME paired with the
LLZ frequency
− Compare the glide path indicated by approach light systems like PAPI with the glide path of the ILS
− Illustrate the position-finding function of the marker beacons in respect of ILS approaches and en-route navigation
− Describe the fan-shaped and bone-shaped radiation pattern of marker beacons
− Name the frequency assigned to all marker beacons
− State the task and use of the Z-marker or a fan-marker, in respect of the cone of silence at the NDB
− Name the assigned frequency band of the LLZ transmitters and the GP transmitters (VHF/UHF)
− Describe the use of the 90 Hz and 150 Hz signals in the LLZ and G/P receivers, stating how the signals at the receivers vary with
angular deviation.
− Interpret the difference in depth of modulation (DDM) with respect to the centreline for LLZ and the glide path
− State that the difference in the modulation depth increases linearly with displacement from the centre line
− Illustrate the use of the back CRS ( as may be encountered published for a ‘non-precision’ approach )
− With respect to the centre line and the glide path, state the angular deviation values when the indicator displays the deviation
needle on the outer dot
− Draw the radiation pattern with respect to the 90 Hz and 150 Hz signals
− Explain the term “difference of depth of modulation (DDM)”
− State the outer limit of the course sector of the LLZ with relation to the width of the beam between the full scale deflections left
and right at the threshold of the runway
− Describe how the UHF glide-path frequency is selected automatically
− Describe the ILS identification regarding frequency and Morse code and/or plain text
− Calculate the rate of descent for a given glidepath angle and groundspeed of the aeroplane
− Interpret the different identifications of the markers by means of sound, modulation, frequencies and lights
− Explain how airway markers can be distinguished from other markers from the frequency of the ident and the colour of the light
− Distinguish between marker beacons and Z-markers or fan markers, by reference to their emission diagrams (cylindrical and
rectangular respectively)
− Define the approach segment, minimum sector altitude and landing minima
− Describe the circumstances in which warning flags will appear
− Interpret the indications on course deviation indicators (CDI) and horizontal situation indicators (HSI)
− Interpret the aircraft’s position in relation to the extended runway centre line on a back-beam approach
− Explain the setting of the course arrow of the HSI for front beam and for back beam approaches
− Explain why, in the case of approaches using a CDI, the course corrections are to be performed towards the needle on the front
CRS inbound, but away from the needle on the back CRS inbound
Coverage and Range

− Sketch the standard coverage area of the LLZ and GP with angular sector limits in degrees and distance limits from the
transmitter in accordance with ICAO Annex 10
− State that a warning flag will appear in the event of a GP failure
Errors and Accuracy

− Interpret incorrect glide paths caused by side-lobe radiations above the correct G/P.
− Describe and interpret the effects on indications of
− beam bends
− scalloping
− beam noise
− Explain why the accuracy requirements are progressively higher for CAT I, CAT II and CAT III ILS
− For the signals of the ILS ground installation, state the vertical accuracy requirements above the threshold for CAT I, CAT II and
for CAT III
− Identify the existence of requirements for ground installation, aircraft installation and the qualification of the crew for each
category
− Illustrate the function of the monitor stations
− Define the critical area in terms of
− defined dimensions about the LLZ and GP antennas where vehicles are excluded during all ILS operations
− unacceptable disturbance to the ILS signal.
− Define the sensitive area in relation to:

− critical area
− possible disturbances of the ILS-signal
− dimensions depending on the object creating the disturbance
− Describe the influence of snow and heavy rain on the ILS signal
− Describe the effect of FM broadcast stations that transmit on frequencies just below 108 MHz and the function of a FM immune
filter.
062 01 06 00 MICRO-WAVE LANDING SYSTEM (MLS)
Principles
− Describe the information provided by MLS in terms of:
− horizontal course guidance during the approach
− vertical guidance during the approach
− horizontal and vertical course guidance for departure and missed approach
− DME distance
− transmission of special information regarding the system and the approach conditions
− Identify the frequency band and the number of available channels
− Explain the reason why MLS will be installed at airports on which, as a result of the effects of surrounding buildings and/or terrain,
ILS siting is difficult.
− Explain the working principle in terms of:

− time referenced scanning beam
− elevation and azimuth antenna
− forward and backward sweep
− constant angular velocity
− time interval
− angular deviation from desired course and desired elevation
− DME-P,
− three dimensional position
− DME-P,
− three dimensional position
Presentation and interpretation

− Interpret the display of airborne equipment designed to continuously show the position of the aircraft, in relation to a pre-selected
course and glide path along with distance information, during approach and departure.
− Define the special data in terms of:
− station identification
− system condition
− runway condition
− weather information.
− Explain that segmented approaches can be carried out with a presentation with two cross bars directed by a computer which has
been programmed with the approach to be flown
− Illustrate that segmented and curved approaches can only be executed with DME-P installed
− Explain why aircraft are equipped with a multi mode receiver (MMR) in order to be able to receive ILS, MLS and GPS
− Explain why MLS without DME-P gives an ILS look-alike straight line approach
Coverage and range
− Describe the coverage area for the approach direction in angular terms horizontally on both sides, vertically and in distance from
the beacon (according to ICAO annex 10)
Errors and accuracy
− State the 95% lateral and vertical accuracy within 2 NM (3.7 km) of the MLS approach reference datum and 60 ft above the MLS
datum point (according to ICAO annex 10)
Factors affecting range and accuracy
− Describe how the reflection of MLS signals by buildings and/or obstacles can be avoided by interrupting the scanning beam
062 02 00 00 BASIC RADAR PRINCIPLES

062 02 01 00 PULSE TECHNIQUES AND ASSOCIATED TERMS
− Name the different applications of radar with the associated wavelength of the radar signals with respect to ATC, MET
observations, airborne weather radar and navigation
− Describe the echo principle on which primary radar systems are based.
− Describe how the plan position indicator (PPI) utilises a cathode ray tube to give analogue target depiction, by distance and
direction.
− Sketch the radar lobe generated by reflection in a parabolic reflector or by interference from out-of-phase radiation from a flat-
plate antenna.
− State the influence of the size and shape of an antenna on the size of main lobe and side lobes
− Explain, in general terms, how a side lobe suppressor avoids answers on interrogations via side lobes
− Explain the relationship between the maximum theoretical range and the pulse repetition frequency (PRF)
− Calculate the max. theoretical range if the PRF is given
− Show the relationship between the display on the second deflection sweep, dead time, and theoretical range.
− Define radial and azimuth resolution, target size and stretching
− Calculate the radial resolution if the pulse length is given
− Calculate the azimuth resolution if the beam width is given
− Calculate the minimum range if the pulse length is given
− Explain the dependence of the wavelength and pulse repetition interval on the range
− Explain the need to harmonise the rotary speed of the antenna, the pulse duration, the pulse repetition frequency for optimum
scanning rate, focussing and transmission power.
− Describe, in general terms, the effects of the following factors with respect to the quality of the target depiction on the PPI:
− atmospheric conditions: super refraction and sub refraction
− attenuation with distance
− condition and size of the reflecting surface
− Mention the use of permanent-echo erasure (moving target indication, MTI)
− Calculate the distance to the radar horizon in NM
062 02 02 00 GROUND RADAR

Principles
− Explain the need for the differences in wave length and RPM of the primary radar systems used by the air safety authorities:
− RSR (En-route Surveillance Radar)
− TAR (Terminal Area Surveillance Radar)
− PAR (Precision Approach Radar)
− ASDE (Airport Surveillance Detection Equipment)
− Explain why the RSR needs a longer pulse-length and lower antenna RPM than a short range radar like the ASDE
− Define a Surveillance Radar Equipment (SRE) approach in terms of radar vectors
− Define a PAR (GCA) approach in terms of radar vectors
− State on which aerodromes, military or civil, PAR and SREs are used
− Explain why a PAR needs two antennas
− Explain why echoes that do not change in distance from the antenna, (i.e. relative speed zero), measured between subsequent
hits of radar pulses, are dangerous with respect to ground radars equipped with a moving target indicator (MTI)
− Explain the cause of second trace returns
− Explain how second trace returns from the radar screen are removed by staggering the pulse repetition.

− State (for RSR, TAR, PAR and ASDE) that, using a plan position indicator (PPI), it is possible to obtain measurements of
bearings, distances and/or elevation.
− Interpret an azimuth/elevation screen with two separate parts indicating the position in relation to the centreline and in relation to
the glide path
− Explain the relationship between the direction in which the antenna is transmitting and the direction of the primary blips of aircraft
on a RSR, PAR and ASDE screen
− Explain the relationship between the travelling time of the radar pulse and the corresponding distance of the primary blips of
aircraft on a RSR, PAR and ASDE screen
Coverage and Range
− State typical ranges for the following different ground radar types:
− En-route Surveillance Radar (RSR)
− Terminal Area Surveillance Radar (TAR)
− Precision Approach Radar (PAR)
− Airport Surveillance Detection Equipment (ASDE)
Errors and Accuracy
− State the azimuthal resolution in relation to the beam width
− Calculate the radial resolution

− Explain how super refraction can extend the detection range of objects close to the earth’s surface.
− Explain how sub refraction can decrease the detection range of objects close to the earth’s surface.
− State, in general terms, the rate of absorption and reflection of radar waves of different wave lengths by all kinds of precipitation
− State the relationship between the wavelength and the dimensions of the reflecting object to the reflectability (e.g. radar waves of
10 cm do not reflect from rain drops)
062 02 03 00 AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR
Principles
− List the two main tasks of the weather radar in respect of weather and navigation
− Identify the wavelength
− Explain how the aerial is attitude-stabilised in relation to the horizontal plane using the aircraft’s attitude reference system
− Calculate the beam width in relation to wavelength and antenna diameter with the formula: beam width in degrees = 70 x
wavelength / antenna diameter
− Describe the two different antenna shapes with the associated radiation patterns
− Explain how, besides a cone shaped radiation pattern, a parabolic antenna can also transmit a fan shaped beam (cosecant
square)
− Explain why a flat plate antenna should be tilted down for ground mapping
− Indicate the movement of the antenna either in the horizontal plane or tilted in relation to the horizontal plane, depending on the
setting of the tilt
− Describe the pencil beam (conical shaped) of about 3° to 5° beam width used for weather depiction (NORM or WX)

− State the functions of the settings of control knobs on the CDU :
− function switch, with settings WX, WX+T, WX (var), MAP, Gain, Normal Contour Intensity
− range switch (e.g. 20, 50, 150 NM)
− tilt
− Name, for areas of differing reflection intensity, the colour gradations (green, yellow, red and magenta) indicating the increasing
intensity of precipitation
− Illustrate the use of azimuth marker lines and range lines in respect of the relative bearing and the distance to a thunderstorm or
to a landmark on the screen
Coverage and Range
− Calculate the range
− Name the practical range for weather radar and for navigation
− Explain how the sector sweep of the antenna is sufficient to provide for the needs of the role of the equipment
Errors and Accuracy
− Calculate the radial resolution
− Calculate the azimuthal resolution

− Explain the danger of the area behind heavy rain (shadow area) where no radar waves will penetrate
− State the effect on radar energy of:
− water in the antenna radome
− ice on the radar radome
− Explain how radar information can be improved by adjusting the gain properly, especially in the mapping mode
− Explain why the tilt setting should be higher when the selected range increases and/or when the aircraft descends to a lower
altitude
− Explain why the tilt setting should be lower when the selected range decreases and/or when the aircraft climbs to a higher altitude
− Explain why a thunderstorm may not be detected when the tilt is set too high
Navigation Application
− Describe the navigation function of the radar in the mapping mode
− State the limitations of the navigation function
− Explain why, for long range, a pencil beam is more useful than a cosecant square beam
− Calculate the true bearing (TB) when the relative bearing (RB) and the compass heading (CH) are given.
− Calculate the range by correcting for the slant range
− Plot the position on a navigation chart using the bearing and distance to a conspicuous point.
− Describe the use of the weather radar to avoid a thunderstorm (Cb)
− Explain why clear air turbulence (CAT) can not be detected with a weather radar
062 02 04 00 SECONDARY SURVEILLANCE RADAR (SSR)

Principles
− Name the frequencies used for interrogation and response
− Identify the ground antenna
− Sketch the radiation pattern of a rotating slotted array which transmits a narrow beam in the horizontal plane
− Sketch the radiation pattern of the antenna of the aircraft which transmits omnidirectionally
− Define the terms: ‘interrogator’ (on the ground) and ‘transponder’ (in the aircraft)
− Explain that information from primary radar and secondary radar can be combined and that the radar units may be co-sited.
− Explain the advantages of SSR over a primary radar
− Explain the following disadvantages of SSR:
− code garbling of aircraft less than 1.7 NM apart measured in the vertical plane perpendicular to and from the antenna
− ‘fruiting’ which results from reception of replies caused by interrogations from other radar stations

− Explain how an aircraft can be identified by a unique code
− Illustrate how the following information is presented on the radar screen:
− the pressure altitude
− the flight level
− the flight number or aircraft registration
− the ground speed
− Name and interpret the particular codes 7700, 7600 and 7500
− Describe how the antenna is shielded when the aircraft banks
− Interpret the selector modes: OFF, Stand by, ON (mode A), ALT (mode A and C) and TEST
− Explain the function of the emission of a SPI (Special Position Identification) pulse after pushing the ident button in the aircraft
Modes and Codes, including mode-S
− Explain the function of the three different modes:
− mode A
− mode C
− mode S
− Explain why a fixed 24 bits address code will avoid ambiguity of codes
− Explain the need for compatibility of mode S with mode A and C
− Interpret the terms: selective addressing, mode ‘all call’ or selective calling
− State the possibility of exchanging data via communication protocols
− Name the advantages of mode S over mode A and C
062 05 00 00 AREA NAVIGATION SYSTEMS (RNAV)

062 05 01 00 GENERAL PHILOSOPHY
− Use of radio navigation systems or an inertial navigation system
− Define RNAV using the terms:
− method of navigation
− aircraft operation on any desired course
− coverage of station referenced navigation signals
− limits of self-contained capacity
− Describe how RNAV routes are developed to allow navigation outside standard routings so as to decrease traffic congestion and
make optimum use of the available airspace
− Indicate the role of radionav. systems and/or dead reckoning systems in respect of the most accurate and continuously updated
position
− Identify the navigational sources for RNAV equipment used to calculate position, route information, heading to steer, ground
speed, wind, distances to go, cross track distances, drift angle, track angle error and wind.
− Give a brief description of the navigational functions of the following components to be used for area navigation
− a Navigation Computer Unit (NCU)
− a flight data storage unit
− a control display unit
− a Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
− an air data computer
− a compass system
− IRS and ILS/MLS/VOR/DME/GNSS receivers
− a Radio Magnetic Indicator (RMI)
− a Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
− an air data computer
− a compass system
− IRS and ILS/MLS/VOR/DME/GNSS receivers
062 05 02 00 TYPICAL FLIGHT DECK EQUIPMENT AND OPERATION
− Explain that area navigation may be executed by flight management and guidance systems (FMS)
− Describe 3-dimensional RNAV in terms of lateral and vertical navigation
− Identify the following functions:
− navigation, lateral and vertical flight planning, performance management, control of AP/FD and auto thrust (A/THR), flight
envelope computations and display management
− Name the following main components and describe, in general terms, their individual functions :
− flight management and guidance computer

− multipurpose control and display unit
− flight control unit
− flight management source selector
− display system
− Identify and interpret the information presented by the Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD) and the Navigation Display (ND).
− State the period of validity of the navigational data base for a Flight Data Storage Unit
− Explain the function of the following data in the database of FDSU:
− way-points, airways and company routes for flight planning
− frequencies/ position and range of the different navigation beacons holdings, airports, runways, SID’s, STARS and
procedures for departure and arrival
− additional new way-points, nav. aids and runways defined by the pilot
− State the necessity for a performance data base to carry out flight envelope computations
− Explain the purpose of the following functions of a FMS:
− navigation of the aircraft in the horizontal and vertical plane by position fixing
− performance optimisation and flight envelope computations by the FMC (flight management computer)
− the interaction possibilities between pilot and FMS by means of display management and CDU
− Interpret the following guidance modes:
− managed guidance in which the aircraft is automatically guided on the pre-planned route, altitude and speed profile by the
FMS
− selected guidance in which the aircraft is controlled to the selected value of a given parameter e.g. heading hold, fixed
IAS/Mach to be selected on the Flight Control Panel (FCP)
− State and interpret the four possible modes of operation for dual FMC installations:
− dual: in which one FMC provides the master function and the other the slave function and selections and where inputs into
one FMS are passed on to the other
− independent: in which there is no communication between the two flight management systems
− single: in which only one FMS is operational
− back up navigation: in which there is limited use of the FMS functions as a result of flight management computer failures
− State that, in the master/slave and in the independent mode, the navigational values presented on the EFIS and CDU may differ
− Explain the master/slave function in the dual mode
Means of Entering and Selecting Way-points and Desired Track Angle (course) information (keyboard entry system)
− Name and describe the methods of entering and selecting way-points, SIDs and STARs and desired course information with
respect to the terms:
− standard company route
− ICAO designator of the departure and the destination aerodrome.
− airway designator
− way-points, using their designators.
− way-points, by using their lat./long co-ordinates or range and bearing
− Explain why the gate position should be entered before the automatic alignment of the IRS /INS
− Identify the sources for position processing
Means of Selecting, tuning and identifying ground stations

− Explain why the IRS is called a self-contained system
− Explain the auto-tune function of modern RNAV equipment
− State that manual deselection/selection can be achieved by means of the MCDU
− Explain the back up function of modern RNAV equipment for VOR/LOC approaches
− Explain the need to tune the conventional VOR/DME receivers for raw data information to verify that they are correctly positioned
on the RNAV equipment’s numeric CDUs or on the navigation display
− Explain that the user may delete satellites (that GPS automatically selected) in order to obtain the best geometry
− List the hierarchy of nav aids for positioning
− Define the modes radio/inertial, inertial and dead reckoning
− Explain, using the rules of statistics, the validity of the triple mixed position, as determined from the positions given by three
inertial reference units
− Define the term ‘hybrid navigation’
− Explain the function of the navigational filter which derives a position error vector that points from the mixed (or single ) IRS-
position towards the FMS-position
− Explain why the accurate development of the position error vector needs radio measurements
− Explain the reason why the various navigation sensors must have complementary error characteristics, e.g. noise errors against
drift errors, for optimisation of hybrid navigation
− Explain how the IRS achieves very good short term stability but poor long term stability
− Give the reason why radio nav systems have poor short time stability and good long time stability
− Explain (in cases of additional estimation and calibration of velocity, attitude and sensor errors) that the error vector can be further
developed by the filter over a specified period of time, in spite of the absence of measurement data (i.e. radio, GPS)
− Explain the importance of the quality and complexity of the Kalman filter design
− State for which radio positioning facilities rho-rho and rho-theta algorithms are used
− Indicate that a first update of the FMS-position is automatically performed before take off
Instrumentation for en-route track (course) guidance
− Explain the use of the magnetic variation stored in the memory
− Name and interpret the following items of a lateral flight plan:
− take off runway
− SID and en-route transition
− en-route way-points and/or airways
− en-route transition and STAR
− missed approach
− alternate flight plan
− List the stages of a flight in which a lateral revision of the flight plan is possible
− Describe the use of the vertical revision function in respect of changes to:
− speed limits in climb and descent phases
− altitude-, speed- and time constraints
− step climb and step descent
− wind data
− Instrumentation for presenting distance traveled, distance to go and ground speed information only valid for some type of
systems).
− Name and indicate the use of the EFIS presentation for en-route course guidance in respect of the following:
− the presentation of the current position in relation to a reference line or the intended track on the display
− the present co-ordinates
− the numerically and graphically presentation of the desired track angle and the distance to next way-point and aircraft
heading, track and drift angle
− the presentation of the cross track error (XTK) and track angle error (TKE)
Instrumentation for presenting current position data
− State the manner of presentation of the current position data on the CDU and on the navigation display of the EFIS
062 05 03 00 INSTRUMENT INDICATIONS
− Illustrate the presentation of the cross track error on the HSI in elderly models with the RNAV coupled
− Interpret the cross track error presentation on the CDU display of some equipment showing a reference line in the middle, an
aircraft symbol and some guidance lines
− Interpret the presentation of the route structure when RNAV is coupled with flight instrument displays such as EFIS
062 05 04 00 TYPES OF AREA NAVIGATION SYSTEMS INPUT
Self-contained on-board systems (inertial navigation systems, Doppler)
− Indicate that the present position on the CDU (of self-contained navigation systems), whether in geographic coordinates or
graphical form, is used as an input.
External Sensor Systems

− For position fixing with radio nav aids, indicate the type of raw data delivered from:
− GPS:
− DME/DME
− VOR/DME
Inputs
− Name the required air data inputs for an area navigation system.
062 05 05 00 VOR/DME AREA NAVIGATION (RNAV)
Principle of Operation
− State the use of VOR/DME data in relation to phantom stations
− Name the data to be entered into the control display unit (of the RNAV system) in order to define a phantom station.
Advantages and Disadvantages in the Use of RNAV
− State the advantages of the RNAV system in terms of:
− full use of the airspace
− availability of phantom way-points
− Explain the following disadvantage of the RNAV system:
− phantom stations can only be defined within the range of the VOR/DME stations used
Accuracy, Reliability, Coverage
− Explain how accuracy and reliability of navigation (using the RNAV system) is affected by the following factors:
− path deflection of radials
− slant range error of DME
Flight Deck Equipment

− Describe, briefly and in general terms, the following components of the flight deck equipment of the RNAV system
− computer
− simple CDU (control display unit)
− CDI (course deviation indicator), RMI (radio magnetic indicator) or HSI (horizontal situation
indicator
− Interpret read outs of CDU and CDI/HSI/RMI
062 05 06 00 Flight Director and Auto-pilot Coupling
State that the RNAV system can be coupled with the flight director and autopilot systems
SELF CONTAINED AND EXTERNAL-REFERENCED
062 06 00 00
NAVIGATION SYSTEMS
062 06 01 00 DOPPLER
Principles of operation (airborne system)
− Explain, in outline, the basic principle of the Doppler effect.
− Analyse the term Doppler shift
− State and interpret the Doppler formula (FD=RREC-FTRANS)
− Accuracy and Reliability
062 06 02 00 Very low frequency systems
Omega (Outdated system, not available since Sept 1997)
VLF theory is covered in 021 02 05 00
062 06 03 00 LORAN-C
Principle of Operation
− Explain that Loran-C is a hyperbolic navigation system
− Describe briefly the Loran principle of operation using the terms:
− “Master" and "Secondary" transmitters.
− propagation delay time difference
− hyperbolas
− State and define the notions "Base Line", "Bisector Line" and "Base Line Extension".
− Name the transmitting sequence of the stations is Master and slaves, resp. w, x, y and z
− Describe, briefly, the use of ground waves in relation to the basic accuracy of Loran-C
− Name the working frequency and the range of the ground wave over land and over water
− State that each transmitter emits omni-directional signals consisting of groups of pulses. Specify the advantage of a pulse group
in stead of a single pulse
− Explain the necessity of a Secondary-specific delay between master and secondary transmission, (Emission Delay or coding
delay)
− Explain that the lines of position form unambiguous hyperbola families. These are normally processed for use on special charts or
in computers
− Describe the reason for different Pulse Repetition Intervals
− Explain how a Loran C chain is designated in reference to the Group Repetition Interval
− Explain that certain values of ‘propagation delay’ time differences are always measured in every chain as follows:
− Base line extension from secondary transmitter :------ secondary-specific delay

− Right bisector :----- secondary-specific delay plus master/secondary propagation delay time
− Base line extension from master transmitter :------ secondary-specific delay plus 2 x master/secondary delay plus
propagation delay time
− Explain that phase difference measurements (between master and secondary signals), obtained by using the carrier wave, give
results with an accuracy of +10 µs
− Give the reason why Cycle Matching is done at the end of the third cycle
− Define and explain additional secondary phase factors (ASF) corrections
− Apply sky wave corrections
− State availability of Loran-C
− State that modern receivers have software to calculate the position in lat. long co-ordinates
062 06 04 00 DECCA NAVIGATION SYSTEM
− Illustrate a Decca chain consisting of a master and three slaves (identified respectively as red, green and purple) and explain why
different frequencies are used for each master/slave pair.
− Explain why the Line Of Position (LOP) is a hyperbolic line determined by phase difference measurement.
− Define a zone, lane and lane numbers
− Explain why the lane numbers have to be set by the navigator or that, in modern equipment, the dead reckoning position has to
inserted
− State that the process of lane identification is made possible by the use of the ‘multipulse’ system
− Identify the areas in which Decca is available
− Give the reason why the coverage is limited to max. 300 NM by day and 200 NM by night from the baseline
− Apply corrections for delay in propagation (using the Decca datasheets)
− State that modern receivers have software which calculates the position in lat./ long co-ordinates
− Explain why Decca, on search and rescue helicopters and coastal vessels, has been replaced by GPS
062 06 05 00 GLOBAL NAVIGATION SATELLITE SYSTEMS GNSS:
GPS / GLONASS
− State the basic differences between the NAVSTAR/GPS system (GPS) and the GLONASS system regarding ellipsoid, time,
satellite configuration, codes and frequencies
Principles of System Operation
− State the four basic information elements supplied by GPS-Navstar.
− Explain why the measured distances are called pseudo ranges
− Explain why the minimum requirements, to establish the 3 spatial co-ordinates and a possible error in the receiver clock, consist
of the measured distances to 4 satellites and a dead reckoning(DR) position.
− Define the use of the Keplerian orbit data.
− Describe the geometrical interpretation of the position fix using four spherical surfaces, with the satellite being in each case
located at the centre of the sphere involved
− Name the synchronous time system used in the satellites
− Describe the C/A, P and Y code and state the use of these codes
− Explain how pseudo range measurement is achieved using satellite signals
− State that the conversion of pseudo ranges is carried out, by means of transformation equations, in order to obtain geodetic co-
ordinates (ϕ, λ) and altitude over a reference ellipsoid.
Basic GPS segments

− Control segment
− List the components of the control segment
− Describe the tasks of the Control segment
− Space segment
− Describe the satellite constellation concerning number of satellites, inclination of orbits, altitude and orbital period
− State the different types of satellites
− Describe the types and amounts of clocks in the satellites and the way to obtain the exact GPS time
− Identify the main task of the space segment
− User segment
− Interpret the 3 categories of GPS receiver architecture: multi channel, multiplex and sequential
− Explain why multi channel receivers are preferred for aviation
− State the current use of GPS
Navigation performance
− Explain the following terms in relation to the horizontal 95% accuracy:
− Selective Availability (S/A)
− Standard Positioning Service (SPS)
− Precision Positioning Service (PPS)
− Explain the term integrity in relation to GPS receivers
− RAIM (receiver autonomous integrity monitoring)
− Integrity messages from earth stations or communication satellites
− State the availability of GPS

− Explain that the continuity is interrupted by switching to another satellite for the best GDOP
− State the applications of GPS
− Interpret the following Special Applications of GPS
− precise time measurement and time interval measurement
− altitude determination
− Define the following Future Applications of GPS
− Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS)
− Automatic Dependent Surveillance Broadcast (ADS-B)
Satellite Constellation and Geometric Dilution of Precision
− Define the following parameters relating to GPS orbital configuration:
− orbit semi-major axis
− satellite ground tracks up to 55°N/S
− orbit satellite phasing
− satellite visibility angle,
− mask angle
− satellite coverage
− Explain the use of Keplerian elements in respect of the orbit

− Explain how the actual position of the satellite is found
− Illustrate the use of the (X, Y, Z) Earth Centred/ Earth Fixed co-ordinate system to define position vectors
− Explain, in qualitative terms, how (x, y, z) co-ordinates can be transformed to co-ordinates (ϕ, λ , h) on the WGS-84 or on any
other ellipsoid
− Indicate the influence of the following perturbation factors
− solar wind
− gravitation of sun, moon and planets
− Geometrical Dilution of Precision (GDOP)
− Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP)
− Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)
− Vertical Dilution of Precision (VDOP)
− Time Dilution of Precision (TDOP)
− User Equivalent Range Error (UERE)
− Indicate the influence of elevation angle on dilution of precision
− Explain the influence of dilution of precision on navigational accuracy
GPS Signals and Navigation Messages
− Name the desired GPS navigation signal properties and signal specifications
− Describe the GPS signals with reference to the following aspects:
− GPS frequencies
− signal characteristics: spread spectrum
− signal structure, pseudo-random noise P and C/A codes, navigation message
− Describe the level of the receiver Signal-to-Noise Ratio
− Describe the navigation message and list the data in the 5 different subframes
− Explain the relevance of ionospheric delays and indicate how their values are determined
− Illustrate the relationship between the satellites and the control segment in respect of signal formation and transmission
GPS Generic Receiver Description
− Name the basic elements of a GPS receiver
− Name the primary information supplied by a GPS receiver:
− Describe the presentation and interpretation of GPS data on a typical receiver type
− Interpret GPS data presented on a control display unit
− Name the requirements for GPS hardware and integration
− Name the number of receiver channels required for various applications
− Describe the cockpit equipment connected with GPS receivers
− Describe in general terms the signal processing
− Explain the 12.5 minutes to read the complete almanac with the parameters of all the satellites
− In the algorithm to solve the position and receiver clock error from the pseudo range measurements, name the four unknown
parameters.
− Explain the following terms (in connection with the applications and the navigation algorithms)
− pseudo-range
− Doppler shift
− phase angle
− Explain why, for accelerated satellite selection after a long suspension of use or a change in position, approximate position, time
and date should be entered to shorten the search of the sky time to first fix may take up to 15 minutes
− Describe the operation after a short suspension
− Define the term ‘Time to First Fix’
Signal Perturbations and Errors
− Describe the method of Selective Availability (S/A) as used in the GPS system
− State the intended aim of S/A
− Name the errors produced in the receiver
− Name the cause and the behaviour of ephemeris errors
− Name the errors produced in the troposphere and in the ionosphere in relation to the elevation and mask angle
− Indicate the influence of multipath propagation of GPS signals on navigational accuracy
− Interpret the two methods used for the mitigation of multipath effects:
− special antenna design
− design of software in the receiver
− Explain the effect of masking of satellites
− Name the influence of satellite clock errors on the accuracy of GPS navigation
− State possible interference sources for, and their effects on, a GPS C/A receiver
Differential GPS and Integrity Monitoring

− Explain the elementary principle of Differential GPS
− Name the major categories of Differential GPS
− Explain why, for Differential GPS, a ground-based reference station is required in order to obtain differential corrections
− Name the method of error correction used in DGPS (data message, data links)
− State which errors can not be diminished by DGPS
− Describe the characteristics of local area differential GPS (LADGPS) with reference to :
− differential corrections
− integrity messages
− reference station in the vicinity of e.g. an aerodrome
− communication direct from ref. station to aircraft
− Describe the characteristics of wide area differential GPS (WADGPS) with reference to :
− more than one reference station in a nation or continent
− communication from ref. stations via co-ordination centre to aircraft
− Describe the characteristics of local area Augmentation system (LAAS) with reference to :
− reference station in the vicinity of e.g. an aerodrome
− communication direct from ref. station to aircraft
− pseudolite(s) to improve the dilution of precision (DOP)
− Describe the characteristics of Wide Area Augmentation (WAAS) with reference to :
− differential corrections depending on lat./ long co-ordinates
− reference stations in a wide area
− communication from co-ordination centre station via INMARSAT satellites to aircraft
− INMARSAT satellites with nav. channel
− Describe the characteristics of European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System (EGNOS) including reference to :
− reference stations in the whole of Europe
− communication from co-ordination centre station via INMARSAT satellite to aircraft
− two INMARSAT satellites, Atlantic Ocean Region East and Indian Ocean Region, with nav. channel
− Pseudolites
− Describe the principle of the use of pseudolites

− Name the data given by an integrated DGPS/Pseudolite installation:
− Indicate the required aircraft antenna locations for GPS and for a pseudolite
− Define ‘Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring’ (RAIM)
− State the minimum number of satellites necessary to perform RAIM
− State the use of the failure detection and exclusion algorithm of RAIM
Integrated Navigation Systems using GPS
− Define the term Multisensor System
GPS and INS Integration
− State the advantages of GPS/INS integration with respect to redundancy and short and long term stability
Augmented RAIM Availability for GPS

− Identify the possible extension of the use of RAIM (receiver autonomous integrity monitoring) to include barometric altimeter
aiding and clock coasting
Combination of GPS and GLONASS
− Explain the requirements of Civil Aviation with respect to the combined use of GPS and GLONASS
GPS Navigation Applications

GPS Applications for Air Traffic Control
− Interpret the application of GPS within the context of ATC for
− oceanic control
− enroute control
− basic area navigation (cf. JAA Leaflet 2)
− terminal control
− non-precision approaches
− precision approaches
− surveillance
− Name the required augmentations relating to the use of GPS for precision approaches
GPS Applications in Civil Aviation
− Interpret the requirements for the use of GPS in Civil Aviation with respect to :
− dynamics
− functionality: GPS position integrated with Inertial positions presented on a (EFIS) screen
− accuracy
en-route GPS,
non precision approaches: DGPS, WADGPS or WAAS
precision approaches LAAS and phase measuring
− availability
− reliability
− integrity by differential stations
− The following are to be described by LOs at a future date when the system architecture has been clarified and the use of GPS for
automatic landings is accepted:
− Automatic Approach and Landing with GPS
− Precision Landing of Aircraft using Integrity Beacons
− Future Implementations
− Explain the principles of integration in an INS

− Explain Schuler Loop Theory
− Explain the function of the Navigation computer
− Describe ‘strapdown’ systems
− State the principle of the Ring Laser Gyro (RLG)
− List the advantages and disadvantages of strapdown systems
061 06 02 00 − Explain how an INS is aligned
− Explain ‘gyrocompassing’
− Explain ‘levelling’
061 06 03 00 − List the errors of INS
− State the accuracy and coverage of INS
061 06 04 00 − Describe a typical INS
− Describe the Mode Selector Unit (MSO)
− Describe the Horizontal Situation Indicator (H S I)
061 06 05 00 − Describe the operation of an INS including:-
- Procedures for entry of waypoints
- Procedures for flight plan charges
- Procedures for by passing waypoints
- Procedures for changing data
− List the errors of the INS
− Describe systems checking procedures
JAR OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES - AEROPLANES
REFERENCE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
070 00 00 00 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES - AEROPLANES

070 01 00 00 GENERAL
071 01 01 00 Annex 6 parts I, II and III
− State the definitions contained in Chapter 1.
− Explain the applicability of Annex 6. (Chapter 2).
− Define the operator’s responsibilities. (Chapter 3).
− State the pilot’s actions in the event of an emergency violation of local regulations or procedures. (Chapter 3).
Annex 6 Part 1 Chapter 4 – FLIGHT OPERATIONS
− State the requirement to be satisfied for the issue of an Air Operator’s Certificate.
− State the essential qualifications necessary for a person to legally taxi aircraft.
− List the factors considered when establishing minimum flight altitude.
− List the factors accounted for when establishing aerodrome operating minimum.
− Detail the content of a passenger briefing in respect of emergency equipment and exits. (See Chapter 6 also)
− State the flight preparation forms to be completed before flight.
− Describe the requirements regarding the operational flight plan.
− Specify the conditions to be satisfied in order for an aerodrome to be considered suitable as a take-off alternate aerodrome.
REFERENCE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
− State that, when under IFR, it is unnecessary to specify a destination alternate.

− Specify the weather conditions for VFR/IFR flights.
− State the fuel and oil requirements for flight, for propeller-driven aeroplanes or turbo-jet aeroplanes, with and without a destination
alternate nominated.
− State the considerations accounted for in the fuel and oil calculation.
− State the rules to be obeyed when refueling with passengers on board.
− Detail the rules regarding the carriage and use of oxygen. (Also Chapter 6).
Annex 6 Part 1 Chapter 4

− State the rules for the compliance/non compliance with aerodrome operating minima.
− State the rules applicable to operating flight-crew members.
− State the rules regarding the changes to an ATS flight plan made in flight.
− Define the duties of the pilot-in-command.
− Define the duties of a flight operations officer.
Annex 6 Part 1 Chapter 5 – AEROPLANE PERFORMANCE &
OPERATING LIMITATIONS
− List the factors that may significantly affect the aeroplane performance.
− State the limitations on take-off and landing mass.
− State the aeroplane performance operating limitations (see attachment C)
REFERENCE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
Annex 6 Part 1 Chapter 6 – AEROPLANE INSTRUMENTS,

EQUIPMENT AND FLIGHT DOCUMENTS
− List the contents of the aircraft operating manual.

− Describe the recommended minimum medical kits and fire extinguishers.
− List the mandatory documents to be carried in flight.
− Specify the colours and markings used to indicate break-in points.
− List the parameters to be recorded by the flight data recorder. (FDR)
− State the rules relative to the retention of data recorded by flight data recorders.
− State the rules regarding the location, construction, installation and operation of flight data recorders.
− State the objectives of the cockpit voice recorder.
− List the minimum equipment required for VFR flight/IFR flight/night VFR flight.
− State the maximum distance, from a suitable landing aerodrome, that an aircraft may operate over water without the carriage of
additional life saving equipment.
− Specify the life saving and survival equipment to be carried on over water flights, when necessary, and on flights over designated
land areas.
− Detail the external and internal light requirements for an aeroplane operating at night.
− State the conditions that require the following equipment to be fitted
− a. Weather Radar b. Radiation Indicator c. Machmeter d. GPWS
− Define the function of the minimum equipment list (MEL) and the master minimum equipment list (MMEL)
− Summarise the contents of attachment G (supplementary to Annex 6)
REFERENCE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
Annex 6 Part 1 Chapter 7 – Aeroplane Communication

and Navigation equipment
− State the minimum requirements to be fulfilled by radio comms. equipment for an aeroplane.
− State the minimum navigation equipment requirements for an aeroplane.
Annex 6 Part 1 Chapter 8 – Aeroplane Maintenance
− Detail the items to be checked in the servicing record, by the pilot-in-command, before acceptance for flight.
Annex 6 Part 1 Chapter 9 – Aeroplane Flight Crew
− State the occasions on which a Flight Engineer/Flight Navigator must be included in the crew.
− State the minimum recent experience necessary for a pilot to be assigned as pilot-in-command/co-pilot.
− Specify the knowledge and experience of a route or route segment, required by a pilot, before assignment as pilot-in-command.
− State the requirements for proficiency checks on a pilot.
Annex 6 Part 1 Chapter 11 – Manuals, Logs and Records
− List the contents of the operations manual.

− List the contents of the journey logbook.
− List the details of the safety and survival equipment on board which, in the event of an emergency, are to be transmitted to the
rescue co-ordination centre.
Annex 6 Part 1 Chapter 13 – Security
− State the rules relevant to the security of the flight crew compartment.
− State the action of the pilot-in-command on landing after an act of unlawful interference
REFERENCE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
071 01 02 00 JAR –OPS Requirements

071 01 02 01 General Requirements
− State the operator’s requirements regarding a quality system
− State the operator’s responsibility regarding the training requirements of crew members who are neither flight crew nor cabin crew
− State the regulations concerning the carriage of persons on an aeroplane
− State the operator’s and commander’s responsibilities regarding admission to the flight deck and the carriage of unauthorised
persons or cargo
− State the operators responsibility concerning portable electronic devices
− State the regulations concerning endangering safety
− List the documents to be carried on each flight
− State the operator’s responsibility regarding manuals to be carried
− List the additional information and forms to be carried on board
− List the items of information to be retained on the ground by the operator
− State the operator’s responsibility regarding inspections
− State the responsibility of the operator and the commander regarding the production of and access to records and documents
− State the operator’s responsibility regarding the preservation of documentation and recordings
− Define the terms used in leasing
− State the responsibility and requirements of each party in various cases, e.g.
− Between JAA operators
− Between JAA and others
−
REFERENCE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
071 01 02 02 Operator certification and supervision requirements

− State the rules applicable to Air Operator Certification
− State the conditions to be met for the issue or revalidation of an AOC
071 01 02 03 Operational procedures requirements
− State the operator’s responsibilities concerning:
− Operational control and supervision
− Provision of an Operations Manual
− Training of personnel
− Establishing ground and aircrew standard procedures
− Use of air traffic services
− Use of instrument departure and approach procedures
− State the requirements for carrying Persons with Reduced Mobility (PRMs)
− State the operator’s responsibilities for the carriage of inadmissible passengers, deportees or persons in custody
− State the requirements for the stowage of baggage and cargo in the passenger cabin
− State the requirements regarding passenger seating and emergency evacuation
− State the requirements for the securing of passenger cabin and galley(s)
071 01 02 04 All weather operations requirements: low visibility operations
− State the operator’s responsibility regarding the establishing of aerodrome operating minima
− List the parameters to be considered in establishing the aerodrome operating minima
− Define the criteria to be taken into consideration for the classification of aeroplanes
REFERENCE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
− Define the following terms

− Circling
− Low visibility procedures
− Low visibility take off
− Flight control system
− Fail-passive flight control system
− Fail-operational flight control system
− Fail-operational hybrid landing system
− Visual approach
− State the general rules for low visibility operations
− State the rules concerning the use of aerodromes for low visibility operations
− State the qualification requirement for flight crew to conduct low visibility operations
− State the operating procedures for low visibility operations
− State the operator and commander’s responsibilities regarding minimum equipment for low visibility operations
− State the minimum visibility and separation from cloud for VFR in each class of airspace
− State the requirements for Special VFR
071 01 02 05 Instrument and equipment requirements
− State the requirements regarding circuit protection devices
− State the requirements regarding windshield wipers
− State the circumstances in which airborne weather radar equipment is not compulsory
REFERENCE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
− State the conditions under which a crew member interphone system and public address system are mandatory
− State the requirements regarding internal doors and curtains
071 01 02 06 Communication and navigation equipment requirements
− State the requirements regarding the provision of an audio selector panel
− List the requirements for radio equipment when flying under VFR by reference to visual landmarks
− List the requirements for communications and navigation equipment when operating under IFR or under VFR over routes not
navigated by reference to visual landmarks
071 01 02 07 Aeroplane maintenance
− Define the meanings of the terms:
− Pre-flight inspection
− Approved standard
− Approved by the authority
− State the general requirements for the approval of a maintenance system
− State the general requirements for ensuring that maintenance is carried out to an appropriate standard
− Describe the operation of a maintenance quality system
− Describe the operator’s responsibility regarding an operator’s Maintenance Management exposition
− Describe the operator’s responsibility regarding an aeroplane maintenance programme
− Describe the operator’s responsibility regarding the continued validity of the AOC in respect of the maintenance system
− Describe the procedure concerning the Equivalent Safety Case
REFERENCE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
071 01 03 00 Navigation requirements for Long Range Flights

071 01 03 01 Flight Management
− Navigation planning procedures
− Describe the operator’s responsibilities concerning routes and areas of operation
− List the factors to be considered by the commander before commencing the flight
− Completion of flight plans
− Describe the commander’s responsibilities concerning the operational flight plan
− List the details to be included in the operational flight plan
− State the normal time, in advance of departure, for filing an ATS flight plan on the ground
Choice of route, speed and altitude
− Selection of a route
− List the factors to be considered
− Describe the meaning of the term “adequate aerodrome”
− Describe the limitations imposed by JAR-OPS on extended range operations with two-engined aeroplanes with and without
ETOPS approval
− Describe the limitation on conducting over water flights by aircraft that do not meet the ditching requirements prescribed in the
applicable airworthiness code
− Describe the limitations imposed by JAR-OPS to Performance Class A aeroplanes
− En-route – one engine inoperative
− En-route – aeroplanes with three or more engines, two engines inoperative
− Describe the limitations imposed by JAR-OPS to Performance Class B aeroplanes
REFERENCE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
− En-route – multi engined aeroplanes

− En-route – single engined aeroplanes
− Describe the limitations imposed by JAR-OPS to Performance Class C aeroplanes
− En-route - all engines operating
− En – route – one engine inoperative
− En-route – aeroplanes with three or more engines, two engines inoperative
− Selection of cruising speed
− Specify the correct cruising speed for the operational conditions pertaining; calculate the effect of using a different speed
− Use table to calculate the cruising speed
− Selection of cruising altitude
− Specify appropriate cruising levels for normal long range IFR flights and for those operating on the North Atlantic Operational
Track Structure
− Specify the optimum cruising altitude for the aeroplane given a relevant input and state the effect of selecting a higher or lower
altitude
− Use table to calculate the optimum cruising altitude
− Describe the JAR-OPS requirements relative to the establishment of minimum flight altitude
− Selection of alternate aerodrome
− State the circumstances in which a take-off alternate must be selected
− State the maximum flight distance of a take-off alternate for:
REFERENCE
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
− Two-engined aeroplane
− ETOPS approved aeroplane
− A three or four engined aeroplane
− State the factors to be considered in the selection of a take-off alternate
− State when a destination alternate need not be selected
− State when two destination alternates must be selected
− State the factors to be considered in the selection of a destination alternate aerodrome
− State the factors to be considered in the selection of an en-route alternate aerodrome
− State the JAR-OPS requirement regarding the maximum percentage of the landing distance available that may be planned (or
in flight replanned) to be used at the destination and any alternate aerodrome by:
− A turbo-jet powered aeroplane performance class A
− A turboprop aeroplane performance class A
− A performance B aeroplane
− A performance C aeroplane
− Minimum time routes
− Define, construct, interpret minimum time route
REFERENCE
071 01 03 02 Transoceanic and polar flight (ICAO Doc 7030 – Regional
Supplementary Procedures).
− Monitoring navigation system accuracy and subsequent actions
− Describe the possible indications of navigation system degradation
− Describe by what emergency means course and INS can be cross checked in the case of:
− 3 navigation systems: comparison between outputs should reveal faulty system
− 2 navigation systems
− Interpret VOR, NDB, VOR/DME information to calculate aircraft position and aircraft course
− Describe the general ICAO procedures applicable in North Atlantic airspace (NAT) if the aircraft is unable to continue the flight in
accordance with its air traffic control clearance
− Describe the ICAO procedures applicable in North Atlantic Airspace (NAT) in case of radio communication failure
− Describe the recommended initial action if an aircraft is unable to obtain a revised air traffic control clearance
− Describe the subsequent action for:
− aircraft able to maintain assigned flight level
− aircraft unable to maintain assigned flight level
REFERENCE
− Describe the MNPS organised track system (OTS) organisation
− Determination of tracks and courses for random routes in NAT (partially or wholly outside MNPS Organised Track System (OTS))
− Specify the method by which planned tracks are defined (by latitude and longitude) in the NAT region:
− when operating predominately in an east-west direction south of 70°N
− when operating predominately in an east-west direction north of 70°N
− State the maximum flight time recommended between significant points
− Terrestrial magnetism characteristics in polar zones
− Explain why magnetic compasses become unreliable or useless in polar zones
− State in which area VORs are referenced to true north
− Specific problems of polar navigation
− Describe the general problems of polar navigation*
− Describe what precautions can be taken when operating in the area of compass unreliability as a contingency against INS failure
− Describe how grid navigation can be used in conjunction with a Directional Gyro (DG) in polar areas and:
− Use Polar Stereographic chart and grid co-ordinates to solve polar navigation problems
− Use Polar Stereographic chart and grid co-ordinates to calculate navigation data
− Use INS information to solve polar navigation problems
− Define, calculate: Transport precession, earth rate (astronomic) precession, convergence factor
− Describe the effect of using a free gyro to follow a given course
− Describe the effect of using a gyro compass with hourly rate corrector unit to follow a given course
− Convert grid navigation data into true navigation data, into magnetic navigation data, into compass navigation data
REFERENCE
− Justify the selection of a different “north” reference at a given position
− Calculate the effects of gyro drift due to Earth rotation
− Specify the method by which planned tracks are defined for flights operating predominantly in a north-south direction
− Describe how the desired route must be specified in the air traffic control flight plan
− Determination of tracks on polar routes
− Describe the track structure used in polar areas
− State whether adherence to the Polar Track Structure (PTS) is mandatory
− Describe how a polar track should be entered in the air traffic control flight plan:
when the aircraft is planned to operate along th whole length of the PTS track or,
when joining or leaving a PTS track at some intermediate point
− Identify the method used for defining cruising speed
− Describe how desired initial cruising speed and level should be entered in the air traffic control flight plan
071 01 03 03 MNPS Airspace (ICAO Doc. 7030 – Regional supplementary
procedures)
− Definitions
REFERENCE
− Define the following abbreviations
− MNPS
− MNPSA
− OCA
− OTS
− PRM
− PTS
− RVSM, MASPS, WATRS
− Geographical limits
− State the lateral dimensions (in general terms) of MNPS airspace
− Vertical limits
− State the vertical limits of MNPS airspace (between FL 285 and FL 420)
REFERENCE
− Regulations and Procedures
− State the regulation concerning the Flight Rules to operate in the NAT region
− State the regulation concerning certification to operate in MNPS airspace
− Describe the Organised Track System
− State the hours of validity of westbound and eastbound tracks (based on times at 30°W)
− State the procedure to be adopted by flights crossing 30°W when:
− eastbound between 0930 and 1029 UTC and westbound between 2300 and 2359 UTC
− eastbound at 1030 UTC or later, and westbound at 0000 UTC or later
− Interpret correctly a NAT track message
− Explain the purpose of the Preferred Route Message (PRM) and identify the latest time of submission of a PRM for the daytime
and night-time OTS
− List the recommendations regarding the flight planning and selection of routes
− State the possible limitations of selecting random routes across the OTS
− Define the procedure regarding the selection of cruising levels for flights wholly or partly outside the OTS
− Define the procedure regarding the selection of cruising levels for flights outside the hours of validity of the OTS
− Define the procedure for the selection of significant points to be specified in the flight plan for:
− east and westbound flights
− northbound and southbound flights
REFERENCE
− State what type of track should be planned between significant points
− Define the procedure for entering the route on the ATC flight plan when it is wholly or partially along the OTS
− Identify what indication should be inserted on the ATC flight plan to show that the flight is certified as being in compliance with
MNPS
− Aircraft separation within MNPS
− State the components of separation within MNPS airspace with and without RVSM
− State what minimum lateral separation is used in MNPS
− State what minimum longitudinal separation is used for aircraft following the same track when:
− the preceding aircraft is flying at the same Mach number
− the preceding aircraft is flying at a higher Mach number
− Explain how longitudinal separation is maintained in MNPS airspace
− Describe how cruising speed for turbojet aircraft should be entered in the ATC flight plan
− Oceanic ATC clearance
− State what minimum change in ETA at the Oceanic entry must be reported to ATC
− Describe an “ATC system loop” error
− Communications in MNPS airspace
REFERENCE
− State the primary method of air/ground communication in MNPS airspace
− Describe the arrangements for passing messages through aeradio stations on HF and VHF
− State where position reports should be made
− Identify the methods of describing position
− State when position reports should be copied to adjacent OCAs
− Describe the procedures for making meteorological reports
− Describe the correct use of SELCAL within MNPS airspace
− Specify the frequency to be used for VHF air to air communication
− Specify which additional frequency should be guarded in MNPS airspace
− HF communications failure procedures
− Describe the initial procedure to be adopted by the pilot in command in the event of HF failure en-route when out of range of VHF
ground stations
− Specify the initial contact frequency for air-to-air use
− Specify the agreed frequency for the relay of position reports
− Specify what action should be adopted when
− communications failure occurs before entry into NAT Oceanic airspace
− communications failure occurs before leaving NAT Oceanic airspace
REFERENCE
− SSR
− Identify what SSR transponder code is used and when this code is to be set on after initial entry into NAT Oceanic airspace
− Miscellaneous procedures
− Describe the procedures for:
− step climb
− changes of Mach number
− use of FL 330 westbound and FL 350 eastbound
− Navigation systems requirements and failure procedures
− State the minimum navigation system requirements for unrestricted operation in MNPS airspace
− List the possible options to be considered by the pilot when one system fails before entering MNPS airspace
− Describe the procedures to be adopted by the pilot when one system fails after entering MNPS airspace
− List the actions required by the pilot if the remaining system fails (or when the systems are considered to be unreliable because of
widely differing indications), whilst operating in MNPS airspace
− Describe the type of procedure recommended in order to minimise the effect of a total in flight navigation computer system failure
− Define a Gross Navigation Error (GNE)
− Special procedures for in-flight contingencies
− Describe
− initial action
− subsequent action
− action to be adopted in the event of en-route diversion across the prevailing NAT traffic flow
REFERENCE
071 02 00 00 SPECIAL OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND HAZARDS
(GENERAL ASPECTS)
071 02 01 00 Minimum Equipment List (MEL)
− State in which document the MEL can be found
− Define the MEL and MMEL
− Identify the responsibilities of the Operator and the Authority with regard to the MEL and MMEL
− State the responsibility of the commander with regard to MEL
− Aeroplane Flight Manual
− State the legal requirement concerning the AFM
− List the items to be included in the AFM
071 02 02 00 Aeroplane De-icing/Anti-icing
− Define the types of De-icing/Anti-icing on the ground
− Define and describe the different stages of a De-icing/Anti-icing procedure
− Describe the procedure when the fluid protection time is exceeded
REFERENCE
− List the types of De-icing/Anti-icing fluids available
− Describe the recommended procedure for ground De-icing/Anti-icing
− Interpret the fluid holdover time tables
− List the factors which can reduce the fluid protection on time
− State when the aircraft must be free of anti-icing fluid
071 02 03 00 Bird strike risk and avoidance
− List the sources of information on bird strike hazards:
− ICAO information systems (IBIS)
− Aeronautical charts
− ATS messages
− Define the commander’s responsibilities regarding the reporting of bird hazards and bird strikes
− Identify where the highest risk of bird strike is to be encountered
071 02 04 00 Noise Abatement
− Define the operator’s responsibilities regarding noise abatement procedures
− Identify what equipment noise preferential runways should possess
− Identify what runway conditions would preclude the selection of a noise preferential runway
− State the minimum height for turns and obstacles clearance on noise preferential routes
− Aeroplane operating procedures
− Describe the purpose of the departure procedures A and B and,

− State the safety limitations for departure procedures concerning
REFERENCE
− Minimum steady climb speed
− Maximum body angle
− Power reduction (minimum height, minimum climb gradient, obstacle clearance after engine failure)
− Approach Procedures
− State the minimum range from the threshold from which final landing configuration takes precedence over noise abatement
− Describe the limitation on turns for visual or instrument approaches
− Explain how reduced power/reduced drag approaches are achieved
− List the adverse operating conditions in which noise abatement approach procedures should not be required
− Landing Procedures
− State the rules regarding
− Use of reverse thrust on landing
− Use of displaced thresholds
071 02 05 00 Fire/Smoke
REFERENCE
− List the actions to be taken in the event of a carburettor fire
− List the actions to be taken in the event of an engine fire and of smoke in the cockpit
− Identify the different types of extinguishant and the type of fire on which each one may be used
− Describe the precautions to be considered in the application of fire extinguishant
− Describe the different fire detection systems
− Describe the effects and problems associated with smoke in the
− Cockpit
− Passenger cabin & toilets
− cargo compartments
− State the number of extinguishers to be on board an aircraft (JAR-OPS)
− Identify the appropriate hand held extinguishers to use in:
− Cockpit
− passenger cabin & toilets
− cargo compartments
− Specify the number of crash axes or crowbars to be on board an aircraft (JAR-OPS)
− Describe the problems and safety precautions following overheated brakes after landing or an abandoned take-off
071 02 06 00 Decompression of pressurised cabin
REFERENCE
− Describe the minimum requirements for supplementary oxygen to be supplied in pressurised aeroplanes during and following an
emergency descent
− Describe the differences between slow and rapid or explosive decompression
− Indicate how to detect a slow decompression or an automatic pressurisation system failure
− Describe the effects on aircraft occupants of
− a slow decompression
− a rapid or explosive decompression
− Describe the actions required following
− a slow decompression
− a rapid or explosive decompression
071 02 07 00 Windshear and Microburst
− Define the meaning of the term “low altitude windshear”
− Define:
− Vertical windshear
− Horizontal windshear
− Up and down draught windshear
− Identify the meteorological phenomena associated with windshear
− Describe the most likely locations for windshear encounters associated with the aircraft in relation to:
REFERENCE
− Cb/Ts
− Weather fronts
− Inversions
− Hills and structures
− Describe the effects of and actions required following an abrupt decrease in headwind component, or increase in tailwind component
whilst making an approach to land
− Describe the effects of and actions required following an abrupt increase in headwind component or decrease in tailwind component
during a departure
− Describe the effects of and actions required following entry into a strong downdraught windshear
− Describe a microburst and its effects
071 02 08 00 Wake Turbulence
REFERENCE
− Landing
− State the minimum separation for landing
− Medium behind a heavy
− Light behind a medium or heavy
− Full runway take off
− State the minimum separation for take-off for a:
− Light or medium behind a heavy
− Light behind a medium
− Using:
− The same runway
− Parallel runways separated by less than 760m
− Crossing or parallel runways when the projected flight path of the second aircraft crossed the first at the same level or within
1000ft lower
− Intermediate take off
− State the minimum separation to be applied when aircraft are using a runway with a displaced landing threshold for:
REFERENCE
− A departing Light or Medium following a Heavy arrival and a departing Light following a Medium arrival
− An arriving Light or Medium following a Heavy departure and an arriving Light following a medium departure if the projected
flight paths cross
− missed approach in the opposite direction
− Opposite direction
− State the minimum separation for
− A Light or Medium taking off or landing after a Heavy which has made a low or missed approach in the opposite direction, or
− A Light taking-off or landing after a Medium which has made a low or Security
(the same criteria apply on parallel runways separated by less than 760m)
071 02 09 00 Security
− Define the responsibilities of the operator concerning:
REFERENCE
− Training programmes
− Reporting acts of unlawful interference
− Aeroplane search procedures
− Define the responsibility of the commander concerning reporting requirements following an act of unlawful interference
− Unlawful interference (in flight procedures)
− Describe the commander’s responsibilities concerning:
− notifying the appropriate ATS unit
− operation of SSR
− departing from assigned track and/or cruising level
− selection of cruising level (if no applicable regional procedures have been established
− action required on being requested by an ATS unit to confirm SSR code and ATS interpretation response
− Describe the different measures to be taken by the State in which the unlawful interference occurs
− Describe the flight-deck door characteristics of a transport passenger aeroplane (JAR-OPS)
− State who is permitted to carry weapons on board an aircraft and in which circumstances
− Describe the procedure to be followed in the ca
− use of a bomb on board an aircraft
REFERENCE
071 02 10 00 Emergency and precautionary landings
− Define an emergency landing/ditching

− Describe a ditching procedure
− Describe a precautionary landing
− Describe the occasions that require an emergency landing/ditching
− Explain the factors to be considered when deciding to make a precautionary/emergency landing or ditching
− Describe the passenger briefing to be given before making a precautionary/emergency landing or ditchng (including evacuation)
− Detail the aeroplane evacuation procedure
− Describe the actions and responsibilities of crew members after landing
071 02 11 00 Fuel Jettison

− Describe the certification requirements for a fuel jettisoning system
− State the legal requirements governing the jettisoning of fuel
− Describe the safety precautions when jettisoning fuel concerning (smoking, HF radio, electrics, flight pattern, operation of
flaps/slots/slats, weather conditions)
− Describe basic fuel jettisoning procedures concerning, ATC, altitude/location, monitoring flow
071 02 12 00 Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air

− State the requirement for aircraft operators to comply with the International Standards and Recommended Practices governing the
safe transport of dangerous goods by air
REFERENCE
− List the definitions and define the terminology associated with the transport of dangerous goods
− Identify the technical instructions and their applicability to the classification and safe transport of dangerous goods by air
− Identify the items that would otherwise be classed as dangerous goods but which are excluded from the requirements
− State the provisions relating to these exclusions
− State the limitations on transport of dangerous goods by air
− Describe the general requirements for packaging, labelling and marking
− State the responsibility of the shipper and operator regarding the dangerous goods transport document
− State the function of the acceptance checklist
− Describe the restrictions on the carriage of dangerous goods
− Describe the information to be provided by the operator to:
− The pilot in command and flight crew
− Passengers
− Other persons
− Describe the information to be provided by the pilot in command to aerodrome authorities
− Describe the information to be provided by the operator in the event of an aircraft accident or incident
− Describe the operators general responsibility regarding the training of personnel
− State the requirements concerning accident and incident reporting
REFERENCE
071 02 13 00 Contaminated Runways
− Define a contaminated runway, a damp runway, a wet runway, a dry runway
− Describe the types of contamination (stating the minimum depth to be considered contaminated)
− State the maximum depth of each contaminant that will preclude operations
− Describe aquaplaning (hydroplaning) and its effect
− Describe the different types of hydroplaning
− Define and calculate the hydroplaning speed
− List and describe the methods used to communicate braking action
− Define braking co-efficient of friction and state that which is considered normal for a wet runway
− Describe the effect that contamination and/or a low co-efficient of friction has on performance calculations
− Describe the JAR-OPS requirements concerning landing on wet or contaminated runways
− Describe the precautions to take when landing in heavy rain
− Interpret from a snowtam the contamination and braking action on a runway
JAR PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT
081 00 00 01 SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
081 01 01 00 BASICS, LAWS AND DEFINITIONS

081 01 01 01 Laws and Definitions
− List the SI-units for mass, acceleration, velocity, density, temperature, pressure, force, wing loading and power
− Describe Newton´s Laws
− Describe Newton´s first law of continuity
− Describe the equation of momentum (impulse), Newton’s third law
− Explain air density
− List the atmospheric properties that affect air density
− Explain how temperature and pressure changes affect density
− Define static pressure
− Define dynamic pressure
− Define the formula for dynamic pressure
− Apply the formula for given altitude and speed
− Define Bernouilli’s theorem
− Define total pressure
− Apply the theorem to a venturi
− Describe how the IAS is acquired from the pitot-static
− Describe the Ideal Gas Law
− Describe the Equation of Continuity
− Describe viscosity
− Define the speed of sound and its symbol
− Describe how atmospheric properties affect the speed of sound
− Define IAS, CAS, TAS, and MACH number
081 01 01 02 Basics about airflow
− Describe stationary and not stationary airflow
− Explain the concept of a streamline
− Describe and explain airflow through a streamtube
− Explain the difference between two and three dimensional airflow
081 01 01 03 Aerodynamic forces and moments on the surfaces
− Describe the force resulting from the pressure distribution around an aerofoil
− Resolve the resultant force into the components ‘of lift’ and ‘drag’
− Define the aerodynamic moment
− List the factors that affect the aerodynamic moment
− Describe the aerodynamic moment for a symmetrical aerofoil
− Describe the aerodynamic moment for a positively cambered aerofoil
− Forces and equilibrium of forces Refer 081 08 00 00
− Define angle of attack
081 01 01 04 Shape of an aerofoil
− Describe the following parameters of an aerofoil
− Leading edge
− Trailing edge
− Chordline
− Camberline
− Camber
− Nose radius
− Angle of attack
− Angle of incidence
− Describe a symmetrical and an asymmetrical aerofoil
081 01 01 05 The wing shape
− Describe the following parameters of a wing:
− Span
− Root chord
− Tip chord
− Taper ratio
− Wing area
− Mean aerodynamic chord MAC
− Aspect ratio
− Dihedral angle
081 01 02 00 THE TWO-DIMENSIONAL AIRFLOW ABOUT AN AEROFOIL
081 01 02 01 Describe the streamline pattern over an aerofoil
− Describe converging and diverging streamlines and their effect on static pressure and velocity
− Describe up-wash and down-wash
081 01 02 02 Stagnation point
− Describe the stagnation point
− Explain the effect on the stagnation point of angle of attack changes
− Explain local pressure changes
081 01 02 03 Pressure distribution
− Describe an approximate pressure distribution over an aerofoil
− Describe where the minimum local static pressure is typically situated on an aerofoil
081 01 02 04 Centre of pressure and an aerodynamic centre
− Define the centre of pressure and aerodynamic centre
− Explain centre of pressure movement with angle of attack
081 01 02 05 Lift and downwash
− Explain the association between lift and downwash
081 01 02 06 Drag and wake
− List two physical phenomena that causes drag
− Describe skin friction drag
− Describe pressure (form) drag
− Explain why drag and wake cause a loss of energy (momentum)
081 01 02 07 Explain the influence of angle of attack on lift
081 01 02 08 Refer to 081 01 08 01
− Explain the significant points on the graph
− Describe lift against -" graph for a symmetrical profile
081 01 03 00 THE COEFFICIENTS
− Explain why coefficients are used in general
081 01 03 01 The lift coefficient CL
− Describe the lift formula
− List the factors that influence lift
− Describe which are the dominant factors in the lift formula
− Describe the CL- graph (symmetrical and positively cambered profile)
− Describe the typical difference in CL-" graph for fast and slow profile design
− Describe the Clmax and "stall on the graph
− State the approximate stall angle of attack
081 01 03 02 The drag coefficient CD
− Describe the drag formula
− List the factors that influence drag
− Indicate which is the dominant factor in the drag formula
− State that drag increases as a function of the square of the speed
− State that drag is proportional to the density of the airflow
− Describe the CL – CD graph
− Indicate minimum drag on the graph
− Explain why the CL – CD is important A measure of performance
− State the normal values of CL – CD
081 01 04 00 The three-dimensional Airflow about an Aeroplane
− Explain the difference between the angle of attack and the attitude of the aeroplane
081 01 04 01 Describe the general streamline pattern around the wing, tail section and fuselage
− Explain and describe the causes of spanwise flow over top and bottom surfaces
− Describe tip vortices and local "
− Explain how tip vortices with angle of attack
− Explain up-wash and down-wash due to tip vortices
− Describe the span-wise lift distribution
− Describe the causes, distribution and duration of the wake turbulence behind an aircraft
− Describe the influence of flap deflection on the tip vortex
− List the parameters that influence the wake turbulence
081 01 04 02 The Induced Drag

− Explain what causes the induced drag
− Describe the approximate formula for the induced drag coefficient
− State the factors that affect induced drag
− Describe the relationship between induced drag and total drag in the cruise
− Describe the effect of weight on induced drag at a given IAS
− Describe the design means to decrease induced drag
− Describe the relationship between induced drag and total drag in the cruise
− Describe the effect of weight on induced drag at a given IAS
− Describe the design means to decrease induced drag
− Winglets
− Tip tanks
− Wing span loading
− Influence of camber change
− Describe the influence of tip vortices on the angle of attack.
− Explain induced local angle of attack
− Explain the influence of the induced angle of attack on the direction of the lift vector
− Explain the relationship between induced drag and
− Speed
− Aspect ratio
− Wing planform
− Explain the induced drag coefficient
− Explain the relationship between the induced drag coefficient and the angle of attack or lift coefficient
− Explain the influence of induced drag on
CL - angle of attack graph, show effect on graph when comparing high and low aspect ratio wings
CL - CD (aeroplane polar), show effect on graph when comparing high and low aspect ratio wings
Parabolic aeroplane polar in a graph and as a formula (CL = CDP + KCL2 )
081 01 05 00 THE TOTAL DRAG
− Explain how lift affects drag
081 01 05 01 The parasite drag
− List the types of drag that are included in the parasite drag
− Describe profile drag
− Describe interference drag
− Describe friction drag
081 01 05 02 The parasite drag and speed
− Describe the relationship between parasite drag and speed
081 01 05 03 Refer to 081 04 02
081 01 05 04 The total drag
081 01 05 05 Describe the total drag – IAS graph
081 01 05 06 Indicate the IAS for the minimum drag for from the graph
081 01 05 07 The drag – speed graph
− Describe the effect of aeroplane gross weight on the graph
− Describe the effect of pressure altitude on :
− Drag – IAS graph
− Drag – TAS graph
− Describe speed stability from the graph
− Describe non-stable, neutral and stable IAS regions
− Explain what happens to the IAS and drag on the non-stable region if speed suddenly decreases
081 01 06 00 THE GROUND EFFECT
− Explain what happens to the tip vortices, down-wash, airflow pattern and lift vector close to the ground
081 01 06 00 Describe the influence of the ground effect on CDI
Explain the effects on entering and leaving the ground effect
081 01 06 02 Describe the influence of the ground effect on " stall
081 01 06 03 Describe the influence of the ground effect on CL
081 01 06 04 Describe the influence of the ground effect on take-off and landing characteristics of an aeroplane
− Describe the difference between
− High and low profiles
− High and low tail characteristics
− Explain the effects on static pressure measurements at the static ports when entering and leaving ground effect
081 01 07 00 Describe the relationship between lift coefficient and speed for constant lift as a formula
081 01 07 01 Explain the effect on CL during speed increase/decrease in level flight
081 01 07 02 Explain using a graph, the effect on speed at various angles of attack and CL at a given weight
− Calculate the change of CL as a function of IAS
081 01 08 00 THE STALL
081 01 08 01 Flow separation at increasing angles of attack
− Describe the boundary layer
− Describe the thickness of a typical boundary layer
− List the factors that effect the thickness
− Describe the laminar layer
− Describe the turbulent layer
− Define the transition
− List the differences between laminar and turbulent boundary layers
− Explain why the laminar boundary layer separates easier than the turbulent one
− List the factors that slow down the airflow over the aft part of an aerofoil, as angle of attack is increased
− Define the separation point
− Define the critical or stalling angle of attack
− Describe the influence of increasing the angle of attack on
− The forward stagnation point
− The pressure distribution
− Location of the centre of pressure
− CL and L
− CD and D
− The pitching moment (straight and swept back wing)
− The downwash at horizontal stabliser
− Explain what causes the possible natural buffet on the controls in a pre-stall condition
− Describe the effectiveness of the flight controls in a pre-stall condition
− Describe and explain the normal post-stall behaviour of a wing/aeroplane
− Describe the dangers of using the controls close to the stall
081 01 08 02 The stall speed
− Solve the 1g stall speed from the lift formula
− Define the FAA stall speed
− Describe and explain the Influence of the following parameters on the stall speed
− Centre of gravity
− Power setting
− Wing loading (W/S) or gross mass
− Wing contamination
− Angle of sweep
− Define the load factor n
− Describe the general idea why the load factor increases in turns
− Describe and explain the Influence of the load factor (n) on the stall speed
− Calculate the increase of stall speed as a function of the load factor
− Calculate the increase of stall speed in a horizontal co-ordinated turn as a function of bank angle
− Calculate the change of stall speed as a function of the gross weight
081 01 08 03 The initial stall in span-wise direction
− Explain the initial stall sequence on the following planforms
− Elliptical
− Rectangular
− Moderate or high taper
− Sweepback or delta
− Explain the influence of aerodynamic twist (wash out) and geometric twist
− Explain the influence of deflected ailerons
− Explain the influence of fences, vortilons, saw teeth, vortex generators
081 01 08 04 Stall warning
− Explain why stall warning is necessary
− Explain when aerodynamic and artificial stall warnings are used
− Explain why JAR and FAR require a margin to stall speed
− Describe:
− Buffet
− Stall strip
− Flapper switch (leading edge stall warning vane)
− Angle of Attack vane
− Angle of Attack probe
− Stick shaker
− Describe warnings of:

− High speed buffet
− Describe the recovery after:
− Stall waring
− Stall
− Stick pusher actuation
081 01 08 05 Special phenomena of stall
− Describe the basic stall requirements for JAR/FAR transport category aeroplanes
− Explain the difference between the power-off and power-on stalls and recovery
− Describe the stall and recovery in a climbing and descending turn
− Describe stalling and recovery characteristics on:
− Swept back wings
− T-tailed aeroplane
− Canards
− Describe super – or deep stall
− Describe the philosophy behind the stick pusher system
− Explain the effect of ice, frost or snow on the stagnation point
− Explain the absence of stall warning
− Explain the abnormal behaviour of the stall
− Describe and explain the stabiliser stall
− Describe when to expect in-flight icing
− Explain how the effect is changed when retracting/extending lift augmentation devices
− Describe how to recover from a stall after a configuration change caused by in-flight icing
− Explain the effect of a contaminated wing
− Explain what “on-ground” icing is.
− Describe the aerodynamic effects of de/anti-ice fluid after the hold/overtime has been reached
− Describe the aerodynamic effects of heavy tropical rain or stall speed and drag
− Explain how to avoid spins
− List the factors that cause a spin to develop
− Describe spin development, recognition and recovery
− Describe the differences in recovery techniques for aircraft that have different mass distributions between the wing and the
fuselage
081 01 09 02 Describe leading edge high lift devices
− Identify the differing types of leading edge high lift devices given a relevant diagram
− Kruger flaps
− Variable camber flaps
− Slats
− State their effect on wing geometry
− Describe the function of the slot
− Describe how the wings effective camber increases
− Describe how the effective chordline differs from the normal chordline
− State their effect on the stalling speed
− Compare their influence on the CL - " graph, compared trailing flaps and clean wing
− Indicate the effect of leading edge devices in CLMAX
− Explain how the CL curve differs from that of a clean wing
− Indicate the effect of leading edge devices on the stall angle of attack
− Compare their influence on the CL – CD graph
− Describe slat symmetry
− Describe the effect on aeroplane controllability
− Describe automatic slat operation
− Explain the reasons for using leading edge high lift devices on take off and landing
− Explain the disadvantage of increased nose up altitudes
− Explain why take-off and landing speeds/distances are reduced
081 01 09 03 Vortex generators
− Explain the purpose of vortex generators
− Describe their basic operating principle
− State their advantages and disadvantages
081 01 10 00 MEANS TO DECREASE THE CL/CD RATIO, AND INCREASE DRAG
081 01 10 01 Describe the spoilers and the reasons for use in the different phases of flight
− Roll spoilers
− Flight spoilers (speed brakes)
− Ground spoilers (Lift dumpers)
− Describe the operation of ground spoilers (lift dumpers)
− Describe the purpose of a spoiler-mixer unit
− Describe the effect of spoilers on the CL -" graph
− Describe the influence of spoilers on the CL – CD graph and lift/drag ratio
081 01 10 02 Describe speed brakes and the reasons for use in the different phases of flight
− State their influence on the CL – CD graph and lift/drag ratio
− Explain how speed brakes increase parasite drag
− Describe how speed brakes affect the minimum drag speed
− Describe their effect on rate of descent
081 01 11 00 BOUNDARY LAYER
081 01 11 01 Refer to 081 01 08 01
081 01 11 02 Advantages and disadvantages of different types of boundary layer on pressure drag and friction drag
081 01 12 00 SPECIAL CIRCUMSTANCES
081 01 12 01 Explain the effect of ice and other contamination on aeroplane performance
− Describe the effects of ice accumulations at the stagnation point
− Describe the effects on ice, frost, snow on the surface condition
Describe how it affects the boundary layer
− Describe how rain and other liquids affect the surface condition
− Describe the effect on aircraft weight
− Explain the effect on lift and drag
− Describe the effect of contamination on the leading edge
− Explain the effect on aircraft controllability
− List the causes of leading edge contamination
− Describe the effects of the contamination on the stall
− Describe the effect on the boundary layer condition
− Describe the effect on the stalling angle of attack
− Describe the effect on the stalling speed
− Describe how contamination leads to loss of controllability
− State the effect of tail icing
− Describe the effects of control surface moment (stick forces)
− Describe the influence of contamination on high lift devices during take-off, landing and low speeds
− Explain why contamination degrades high lift devices efficiency
− Explain why contamination increase the take-off and landing distances/speeds
− Describe how reduces the lift
− Explain the effect of contamination on the lift/drag ratio
081 01 02 02 Describe the effect of airframe deformation and modification, of an aging aeroplane on aeroplane performance
− Explain the effect on boundary layer condition of an ageing aircraft on boundary layer condition
081 02 00 00 TRANSONIC AERODYNAMICS
081 02 01 00 THE MACH NUMBER DEFINITION
081 02 01 01 Define the speed of sound
− Define the Mach number as a function of TAS and speed of sound
081 01 01 02 Describe the influence of temperature on the speed of sound
− Explain the variation of the speed of sound with altitude
− Explain the absence of change of Mach number with varying temperature at constant flight level and Calibrated Airspeed
− Explain the change of Mach number at varying altitude in the standard atmosphere (troposphere and stratosphere) with constant
Calibrated Airspeed and with constant True Airspeed
081 02 01 03 State that compressibility means that density can change along a streamline
− State that Mach number is a measure of compressibility
081 02 02 00 NORMAL SHOCKWAVES
− List the subdivision of aerodynamic flow:
− Subsonic flow
− Low-subsonic, non-compressible flow
− High subsonic, compressible flow
− Transonic flow, mixture of local speeds above and below the speed of sound
− Supersonic flow, all speeds higher than the speed of sound
081 02 02 01 Describe how the streamline pattern changes due to compressibility
− Describe Mcrit
− Describe a normal shock wave in a transonic flow with respect to
− Temperature, pressure, velocity and density changes
− Location in a supersonic area of the stream pattern
− Length if the shockwave and orientation relative to the wing surface
081 02 02 02 Explain the influence of increasing Mach on a normal shock wave, at positive lift with respect to
− − Strength
− Position relative to the wing
− Second wave at the lower surface
− Explain the influence of control surface deflection with respect to
− The effect of Mcrit
− Loss of control effectiveness
− Explain how increase of the angle of attack influences normal shock wave and Mcrit
− Explain the effect of aerofoil thickness on Mcrit
− Explain the influence of the angle of sweep with respect to
− The increase of Mcrit
− Effective thickness/chord change
− Velocity component perpendicular to the leading edge
− Describe the influence of the angle of sweep at subsonic speed with respect to
− CLMAX
− Efficiency of high lift devices
− Pitch –up stall behaviour
− Explain area ruling in aeroplane design
081 02 02 03 Describe the consequences of exceeding Mcrit with respect to
− Gradient of the CL - " graph
− CLMAX (stall speed)
Explain the behaviour of CD versus M at constant angle of attack
Explain effect of Mach number on the CL – CD graph
081 02 02 04 State that aerodynamic heating is caused by compression and friction

081 02 02 05 Explain shock stalll and decribe its relationship with mach buffet
081 02 02 05 Describe the influence on:
− Wave drag
Explain the influence of shock stall on the location of the centre of pressure with respect to
Loss of lift at the wing root
Reduction of downwash at the wing root
List the aerodynamic and mechanical measures to the Mach tuck-under effect
081 02 02 07 Describe the influence on the buffet margin of
− Angle of attack
− Mach number
− Pressure altitude
− Mass
− Load factor
− Describe the 1.3g altitude with respect to the buffet margin
− Describe what can be obtained from the buffet boundary chart
− Find:
− Buffet restricted speed limits at a given pressure altitude
− Aerodynamic ceiling at a given mass
− Load factor and bank angle at which buffet occurs at a given mass, Mach number and pressure altitude
081 02 02 08 Identify the VMO and MMO values
− Identify the stall speed
− Identify the “coffin corner”
− Describe
− The allowable speed range in the coffin corner
− The influence of mass on the coffin corner boundaries
− The consequences of the exceeding VMO
− The consequences of exceeding MMO
− Describe the influence of
− The flight envelope
− Mass on the values of VMO and MMO
− Temperature on the pressure altitude at which the VMO limit intersects the MMO limit
081 02 03 00 MEANS TO AVOID THE EFFECTS OF EXCEEDING MCRIT
081 02 03 01 Explain the use of vortex generators as a means to avoid or restrict flow separation
081 01 03 02 Identify the folloiwing shape characteristics of a supercritical aerofoil shape:
− Blunt nose
− Large thickness
− S-shaped camber line
− Flat upper surface
− Thick trailing edge
− Explain with respect to a supercritical aerofoil
− The increase number of smaller and weakened shockwaves compared those of a classic profile
− The absence of a strong influence on Mcrit
− Aft loading
− Explain the following advantages of a supercritical aerofoil|:
− Allows the use of less sweep angle
− May be built lighter, due to greater thickness
− Allows storage of more fuel
− Allows use of a higher aspect ratio
− Explain the following disadvantages of a supercritical aerofoil:
− Negative camber at the aerofoil front side
− Buffet may cause severe oscillations
081 03 00 00 SUPERSONIC AERODYNAMICS
081 03 01 00 Oblique shockwaves
081 03 01 01 Define Mach Cone
− Explain that the Mach cone top angle decreases with increasing Mach number
− Define the bow wave
− Identify the Mach cone area of influence of a pressure disturbance due to the presence of the aeroplane
081 03 01 02 Describe the influence of weight (wing loading)
081 03 01 03 Describe shock waves and expansion waves with respect to the streamline pattern and variation of pressure, temperature,
density and velocity along a streamline
− Describe the velocity behind a normal and an oblique shockwave
081 03 01 04 Describe the movement of the centre of pressure with increasing Mach number
− Describe the pressure distribution in chord direction in supersonic flight
081 03 01 05 Describe wave drag
− Describe effect on control surface hinge moment
Describe effect on control surface efficiency
Explain that an oblique shockwave moves with aeroplane ground speed over the earth surface
091 04 00 00 STABILITY
081 04 01 00 Condition of equilibrium in stable horizontal flight
081 04 01 00 Explain an equilibrium of forces and moments as the condition for the concept of static stability
− Identify
− Longitudinal static stability
− Directional static stability
− Lateral static stability
081 04 01 02 Identify the moments considered in the equilibrium of moments: moments about all three axes
081 04 01 03 Identify the forces considered in the equilibrium of forces
081 04 02 00 METHODS OF ACHIEVING BALANCE
081 04 02 01 Explain the stabiliser and the canard as the means to satisfy the condition of nullifying the total sum of the moments about the
lateral axis
− Explain the influence of the location of the wing centre of pressure relative to the centre of gravity on the magnitude and direction
of the balancing force on stabiliser and canard
− Explain the influence of the indicated airspeed on the magnitude and direction of the balancing force on the magnitude of the
wing/fuselage lift
081 04 02 02 Explain the use of the elevator deflection or stabiliser angle for the generation of the balancing force
− Explain the elevator deflection required to balance thrust changes
081 04 02 03 − Explain the most advantageous location of the centre of gravity by means of fuel distribution and loading
081 04 03 00 LONGITUDINAL STABILITY
081 04 03 01 Define static stability
− Identify a statically stable, neutral and unstable equilibrium
− Define dynamic stability
− Identify a dynamically stable, neutral and unstable motion
− Explain what combinations of static and dynamic stability will return an aeroplane to the equilibrium state after a disturbance
− Describe the phugoid and short period motion in terms of period and damping
− Explain that during the phugoid motion the angle of attack remains approximately constant
− Explain that during the short period motion the aircraft speed remains approximately constant
− Explain why short period motion is more important for flying qualities than the phugoid
− Define and describe pilot induced oscillations
− Explain the effect of high altitude on dynamic stability
081 04 03 02 Explain why static stability is the opposite of maoeuvrability
081 04 03 03 Neutral point/location of neutral point
− Define neutral point
− Explain why the location of the neutral point is only dependent on the aerodynamic design of the aeroplane
081 04 03 04 Indicate the location of the neutral point relative to the locations of the aerodynamic centre of the wing and tail/canard
− Explain the influence of the downwash variations with angle of attack variation on the location of the neutral point
081 04 03 05 Explain the influence of the location of the centre of gravity on static and dynamic stability of the aeroplane
− Explain the approved forward and afts limits of the centre of gravity with respect to the criteria of control forces, elevator
effectiveness and stability
− Define the minimum stability margin
081 04 03 06 Define the aerodynamic pitching moment coefficient (Cm)
− − Describe the Cm - " graph with respect to
Positive and negative sign
Linear relationship
Angle of attack for equilibrium state
Relationship of slope and static ability
081 04 03 07 Explain
− The effect on the Cm - " graph with a shift of CG in the forward and aft direction
− The effect on the Cm - " graph when the elevator is moved up or down
− The effect on the Cm - " graph when the trim is moved
− The wing contribution and the effect of the location of the cg with respect to the aerodynamic centre on the wing contribution
− The contribution of the tail
− The contribution of the configuration (gear and flaps)
− The contribution of the aerofoil camber
081 04 03 08 Describe the elevator position speed graph
Explain:
− The gradient of the elevator position speed graph
− The influence of the airspeed on the stick position stability
081 04 03 09 Explain the contribution on the elevator position – speed graph of:
− Location of centre of gravity
− Trim (tab and stabiliser trim)
− High lift devices
081 04 03 10 Define the stick force speed graph
− Describe the minimum gradient for stick force versus speed that is required for certification according JAR 23 and JAR 25
− Explain the importance of the stick force gradient for good flying qualities of an aeroplane
− Identify the trim speed in the stickforce speed graph
081 04 03 11 Explain the contribution of:
− Location of the centre of gravity
− Trim (tab and stabiliser trim)
− Mach number and the effect of Mach tuck-under and the Mach trim system
− Downspring
− Bob weight
− Friction
− State that:
− In transonic flow due to the Mach tuck under effect the stick force gradient may be too small or unstable
− The Mach trim system restores stick force gradient
081 04 03 12 Define the stick force per g
− Explain why
− The stick force per g has a prescribed minimum and maximum value
− The stick force per g decreases with pressure altitude at the same Indicated Airspeeds
081 04 03 14 Explain that the stickforce per g is:
− Dependent on location of the centre of gravity
− Independent of the trim setting
− Independent of a down spring in the control system
− Greater with the application of a bob weight in the control system
081 04 03 15 Explain why the prescribed minimum and maximum values of the stickforce per g are dependent on the limit load factor
− Calculate the stick force to achieve a certain load factor at a given manoeuvre stability
081 04 03 16 Refer to 081 05 02 03
081 04 04 00 STATIC DIRECTIONAL STABILITY
081 04 04 01 Define slip angle
− Identify $ as the symbol used for the slip angle
081 04 04 02 Define the yawing moment coefficient CN
− Define the relationship between for an aeroplane with static directional stability
081 04 04 03 Explain why
− CN depends on the angle of slip
− CN equals zero for that angle of slip that provides static equilibrium about the aircraft’s normal axis
− If no asymmetric engine thrust, flight control or loading condition prevails, the equilibrium angle of slip equals zero
− Identify how the slope of the CN - $ graph is a measure for static directional stability
081 04 04 04 Describe how the following aircraft components contribute to static directional stability
− Wing
− Fin
− Dorsal fin
− Ventral fin
− Angle of sweep of the wing
− Angle of sweep of the fin
− Location of the centre of gravity
− Fuselage at high angles of attack
− Strakes
− Explain why both the fuselage and the fin contribution reduce static directional stability after an aft shift of the centre of gravity
081 04 05 00 STATIC LATERAL STABILITY
081 04 05 01 Define bank angle phi
081 04 05 02 Define the rolling moment coefficient CI
081 04 05 03 Explain how without co-ordination, the bank angle creates slip angle
081 04 05 04 Describe CI - $graph
− Identify the slope of the CI - $ graph as a measure for static lateral stability
081 04 05 05 Explain the contribution to the static lateral stability of:
− Dihedral, anhedral
− High wing, low wing
− Sweep angle of the wing
− Ventral fin
− Vertical tail
− Mach number
081 04 05 06 Define effective dihedral
− Explain the negative effects of high static lateral stability in
− Strong crosswind landings
− Asymmetric thrust situations at high power setting and low speed (go-around, take-off)
081 04 06 00 DYNAMIC LATERAL/DIRECTIONAL STABILITY
081 04 06 01 Effects of asymmetric propeller slipstream
081 04 06 02 Explain how lateral and directional stability are coupled
− Explain how high static directional stability and a low static lateral stability may cause spiral divergence (unstable spiral dive) and
under which conditions the spiral dive mode is neutral or stable
− Describe an unstable spiral dive mode with respect to deviations in speed, roll attitude , nose low pitch attitude and decreasing
altitude
081 04 06 03 Describe Dutch Roll
− Explain
− Why Dutch roll occurs when the dihedral effect is large compared to static directional stability
− The condition for a stable Dutch roll motion and those for marginally stable, neutral or unstable Dutch roll motion
− The function of the yaw damper
081 04 06 Explain that increased pressure altitude reduces dynamic lateral /directional stability
081 05 00 00 CONTROL
081 05 01 00 GENERAL
081 05 01 01 Basics
− Define
− Lateral axis
− Longitudinal axis
− Normal axis
− Describe the motion about the three axes
− Name and describe the devices that control these motions
081 05 01 02 Camber change
− Explain how camber is changed by movement of a control surface
081 05 01 03 Angle of Attack change
− Explain the influence of local angle of attack change by movement of a control surface
081 05 02 01 PITCH CONTROL
081 05 02 01 Elevator/all flying tail
− Explain the working principle of the horizontal tailplane (stabilizer)
− Explain the working principle of the elevator and describe its function
− State graphically the effect of elevator deflection on the moment curve
− Explain why the moment curve is independent of angle of attack
− Describe the loads on the tailplane in normal flight, lower than normal flight speeds, at higher than normal speed
081 05 02 02 Downwash effects
− Explain the effect of downwash on the tailplane angle of attack
Explain in this context the use of a T-tail or stabiliser trim.
081 05 02 03 Ice on tail
− Explain how ice can change the aerodynamic characteristics of the tailplane
Explain how this can affect the tails proper function
081 05 02 04 Location of centre of gravity
− Explain the relationship between pitching moment coefficient and lift coefficient
Explain the relationship between elevator deflection and location of cg in straight flight and in a g manoeuvre
081 05 03 00 Directional control
− Explain the working principle of the rudder and describe its function
− State the relationship between rudder deflection and the moment about the normal axis
Describe the effect of sideslip on the moment about the normal axis
081 05 03 01 Pedal/Rudder ratio changer
− Describe the purpose to the rudder ratio changer
081 05 03 02 Moments due to engine thrust
− Describe the effect of engine thrust on pitching moments
− Explain fin stall due to rudder displacement
091 05 03 03 Engine failure
− Refer 081 08 02 00
081 05 04 00 ROLL CONTROL
081 05 04 01 Ailerons
− Describe the purpose of the ailerons
− Describe the adverse effects of ailerons
− Explain in this context the use of inboard and outboard ailerons
− Explain outboard aileron lockout and conditions under which this feature is used
− Describe the use of aileron deflection in normal flight, flight with side slip, cross wind landings, horizontal turns, flight with one
engine out.
− Define roll rate
− List the factors that affect roll rate
− Flaperons, aileron droop
081 05 04 03 Spoilers
− Explain how spoilers affect lift
Explain how spoilers can be used to control the rolling movement in combination with or instead of the ailerons
081 05 04 04 Adverse yaw
− Explain how the use of ailerons produce adverse yaw
081 05 04 05 Means to avoid adverse yaw
− Explain how the following reduce adverse yaw
− Frise ailerons
− Differential ailerons deflection
− Couple aileron deflection
− Rollspoilers
− Effects of asymmetric propeller slipstream
081 05 05 00 Interaction in different planes (yaw/roll)
− Describe the coupling effect of roll and yaw
− Explain the secondary effect of ailerons
− Explain the secondary effect of rudder
− Backlash
− Aero-elastic coupling
− Mass distribution
− List the flutter modes of an aeroplane
− Wing
− Tailplane
− Fin
− Control surfaces including tabs
− Describe the use of mass and balance to alleviate the flutter problems by adjusting the mass distribution
− Wing mounted pylons
− Control surface mass balance
− List the possible actions in the case of flutter in flight
− Describe the phenomenon in aileron reversal
− At low speeds – aileron deflection/stalling angle relationship
− At high speeds- aileron deflection causing the wing to twist Describe the aileron reversal speed in relationship to VNE and VNO
− Describe the reason for flap/landing gear limitations
− VLO
− VLE
− Explain why there is a difference between VLO and VLE in the case of some aeroplane types
− Define VFE
− Describe flap design features to prevent overload.
081 06 01 01 VMO, VNO, VNE
− Define VMO and VNE
− Describe the difference between VMO and VC
− Define VNO
− Explain that VMO can be exceeded during a descent at constant Mach number
081 06 01 02 MMO
− Define MMO and state its limiting factors
− Explain that MMO can be exceeded during a climb at constant IAS
081 06 02 00 MANOEUVRING ENVELOPE
081 06 02 01 Describe the manoeuvring load diagram
− Identify the varying features on the diagram
− Load factor ’n’
− Speed scale, equivalent airspeed, EAS
− CLMAX boundary
− VA design manoeuvring speed
− VC design cruising speed
− VD design dive speed, a speed set sufficient above VC to allow for the effects of a defined ‘upset’
− State the load factor limits for JAR 23 and 25 aircraft in a typical cruise condition and with flaps extended.
081 06 02 02 Contribution of mass, altitude and mach number
− State the relationship of mass to
− Load factor limits
− Accelerated stall speed limit
− VA, VB and VC
− Explain the relationship between VA and aeroplane mass
− Explain the relationship between VA and VS in a formula
− Calculate the change of VA with changing weight
− Describe the effect of altitude in mach number, in respect to limitations
081 06 03 00 GUST ENVELOPE
081 06 03 01 Gust load diagram
− Recognise a typical gust load diagram
− Identify the various features shown on the diagram
− Load factor ’n’
− Calculate n as a result of increasing angle of attack
− CLMAX boundary
− Vertical gust velocities
− Relationship of VB to VC and VD
− Gust limit load factor
− Define VRA
081 06 03 02 Contribution of mass, altitude, speed, mach number, aspect ratio and wing sweep
− Explain the relationship between mass, altitude, speed, mach number and wing sweep on gust loads
081 07 00 00 PROPELLERS
081 07 01 00 CONVERSION OF ENGINE TORQUE TO THRUST
− Describe thrust and torque load

081 07 01 01 Meaning of pitch
− Describe the geometry of a typical propeller blade element at a representative span location
− Blade chord line
− Propeller rotational velocity vector
− True airspeed vector
− Blade angle of attack
− Pitch or blade angle
− Advance or helix angle
081 07 01 02 Blade twist
− Explain why blade twist is necessary
081 07 01 03 Fixed pitch and variable pitch/constant speed
− List the different types of propeller
− Fixed pitch
− Adjustable pitch or variable pitch (non-governing)
− Variable pitch (governing) constant speed
− Explain the relationship between blade angle, blade angle of attack and speed for constant speed propeller and a fixed pitch
propeller
081 07 01 04 Propeller efficiency versus speed
− Define propeller efficiency
− Explain the relationship between propeller efficiency and speed (TAS)
− Plot propeller efficiency against speed for the types of propellers listed in 081 07 01 03 above
− Explain the relationship between blade angle and thrust
081 07 01 05 Effects of ice on a propeller
− Describe the effects of ice on a propeller
081 07 02 00 ENGINE FAILURE OR STOP (SHUT-DOWN)
081 07 02 01 WINDMILLING DRAG
− List the effects of an inoperative engine on the performance and controllability of an aeroplane
− Thrust loss/drag increase
− Influence in yaw moment during asymmetric power
081 07 02 02 Feathering
− Explain the reasons for feathering and the effect on performance and controllability
− Influence on yaw moment during asymmetric power
081 07 03 00 DESIGN FEATURES FOR POWER ABSORBPTION
− Describe the factors concerning propeller design which increase power absorption
081 07 03 01 Propeller blade aspect ratio
− Define blade aspect ratio
081 07 03 02 Propeller blade diameter
− Explain the reasons for restricting propeller diameter
081 07 03 03 Number of propeller blades
− Define “solidity”
− Describe the advantages and disadvantages of increasing the number of blades
081 07 03 04 Propeller noise
− Explain how propeller noise can be minimised
081 07 04 00 MOMENTS AND COUPLES DUE TO PROPELLER OPERATION
081 07 04 01 Torque reaction
− Describe the following methods for counteracting engine torque
− Counter- rotating propellers
− Contra-rotating propellers
081 07 04 02 Gyroscopic precession
− Describe the effect on the aeroplane due to the gyroscopic effect
081 07 04 03 Asymmetric slipstream effect
− Describe the possible asymmetric effects of the rotating propeller slipsteam
081 07 04 04 Asymmetric blade effect
− Describe the asymmetric blade effect
081 08 00 00 FLIGHT MECHANICS
081 08 01 00 FORCES ACTING ON AN AEROPLANE
081 08 01 01 Describe the forces acting on an aeroplane in straight horizontal steady flight:
− List the four forces and state where they act
− Explain how the four forces are balanced
− Describe the function of the tailplane
081 08 01 02 Describe the forces acting on an aeroplane in a straight, steady climb

− Name the forces parallel and perpendicular to the direction of flight
− Apply the formula relating to the parallel forces (T = D + W sin ø)
− Apply the formula relating to the perpendicular forces (L = W cos ø)
− Explain why thrust is greater than drag
− Explain why lift is less than mass
081 08 01 03 Describe the forces acting on an aeroplane in a straight steady descent
− Apply the formula parallel to the direction of flight ( T = D – W sin ø
− Apply the formula relating to the perpendicular forces (L = W cos ø)
081 08 01 04 Describe the forces acting on an aeroplane in a straight steady glide
− Apply the formula for forces parallel to the direction of flight (D=W sin ø)
− Apply the formula for forces perpendicular to the direction of flight (L=W cos ø)
− Describe the relationship between the glide angle and the lift/drag ratio
− Describe the relationship between the angle of attack and the best lift/drag ratio
− Explain the effect on glide angle with a wind component
− Explain the effect on glide angle with mass change
081 08 01 05 Describe the forces acting on an aeroplane in a steady co-ordinated turn
− Resolve the forces acting horizontally and vertically during a co-ordinated turn
(tan = ø V2 )
gr
− explain how to correct an unco-ordinated turn
− reaolve the forces to show that for a given angle of bank the radius of turn is determined solely by airspeed
(tan = ø V2 )
gr
− calculate the turn radius at a given angle of bank and TAS
− explain why the load factor is greater than one in a co-ordinated turn
− calculate the lift increase as a function of the bank angle
− define angular velocity
− define rate of turn and rate one turn
− explain the influence of TAS on rate of turn at a given bank angle
081 08 02 00 DESCRIBE THE EFFECTS ON THE AEROPLANE DURING FLIGHT WITH ASYMMETRIC THRUST
− describe critical engine
081 08 02 01 Describe the moments about the normal axis
− Explain the yawing moments about the cg
− Describe the change to a yawing moment caused by power changes
− Describe the changes to yawing moment caused by engine icing from cg
− Describe the methods to achieve balance
−
081 08 02 02 Describe the forces acting on the fin
− Describe the side force on the fin which counteracts the aircraft yawing moment about the cg.
− Resolve the aircraft yawing moment and fin side force by simple calculation
081 08 02 03 Describe the influence of bank angel on yawing moment
− Explain the effect on fine side force when the aeroplane is banked towards the live engine
− Explain why the bank angle must be limited
− Explain the effect on fin angle of attack due to side-slip
081 08 02 05 Describe the effect of weight increase
− Describe how weight increase will increase the yawing moment
− Describe the effect on side-slip with weight increase
− Describe the effect on rudder effectiveness
081 08 02 05 Describe the influence of ailerons
− Explain why aileron effectiveness is reduced
081 08 02 06 Describe the effect on roll moment created by propeller effect
− Explain the influence of torque reaction
− Explain the influence of flaps on roll moment
081 08 02 07 Describe the influence of slip angle on roll moments
− Explain how slip angle changes the CL moments of the left and right wings
081 08 02 07 Define VMCA
− Describe how VMCA is obtained
081 08 02 09 Define VMCL
− Describe how VMCL is obtained
081 08 02 10 Define VMCG
− Define how VMCG is obtained
081 08 02 11 Describe the influence of altitude
− Explain why VMCA and VMCG reduces with an increase in altitude
− Explain the significance of power/thrust available and power/thrust required
− Derive the effect on rate of climb and angle of climb
081 08 03 00 EMERGENCY DESCENT
− Describe low and high speed emergency descent
− Explain the advantages and disadvantages of low and high speed emergency descent.
081 08 03 01 Describe the influence of configuration on emergency descent
− Describe the methods to increase drag
081 08 03 02 Influence of chosen mach number and IAS
− Explain why MMO is the limiting speed at altitude
− Explain why indicated airspeed is the limiting speed at low level
− Describe the dangers when recovering form emergency descent
081 08 03 03 Identify the typical points on a polar curve
081 08 03 04 Windshear
− Effect of take-off and landing
− Describe the influence of increasing and decreasing windspeed
− Describe a typical recovery from windshear
JAR COMMUNICATIONS
090 00 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS
090 01 00 00 DEFINITIONS
090 01 01 00 − State the meanings and significance of associated terms
- Stations
- Communication methods
090 01 02 00 Air Traffic Control abbreviations
− State the meaning of commonly used Air Traffic Control abbreviations:
- Flight conditions
- Airspace
- Services
- Time
- Miscellaneous
090 01 03 00 Q-code groups
− Define the Q-code groups commonly used in RTF air to ground communications:
- Pressure Settings
- Directions and bearings
− State the procedure for obtaining bearing information in flight
090 01 04 00 Categories of messages
− List the categories of messages in order of priority
− State the types of messages appropriate to each category
− State the priority of a message (given examples of messages to compare)
JAR COMMUNICATIONS
090 02 00 00 GENERAL OPERATING PROCEDURES

090 02 01 00 Transmission of letters
− State the phonetic alphabet used in radiotelephony
− List the occasions when words should be spelt
090 02 02 00 Transmission of numbers
− State the method of transmission of numbers:
- Pronunciation
- Single digits, whole hundreds and whole thousands
090 02 03 00 Transmission of time
− State the ways of transmitting time:
- Standard time reference (UTC)
- Minutes, minutes and hours, when required
090 02 04 00 Transmission technique
− State the techniques used for making good R/T transmissions
090 02 05 00 Standard words and phases (relevant R/T)
− State the meaning of standard words and phrases
− Use correct phraseology for each phase of VFR flight:
- Aerodrome procedures
- Departure information and engine start procedures
- Taxi instructions
JAR COMMUNICATIONS
- Aerodrome traffic and circuits

- Final approach and landing
- After landing
- Essential aerodrome information
− VFR Departure
− VFR Arrival
090 02 06 00 Radiotelephony call signs for aeronautical (ground) stations including use of abbreviated call signs
− Name the two parts of the call sign of an aeronautical station
− State the call sign suffixes for aeronautical stations (for example: Approach control – CONTROL)
− State when the call sign may be omitted or abbreviated to the use of the suffix only
090 02 07 00 Radiotelephony call signs for aircraft including use of abbreviated call signs
− State the three different ways to compose an aircraft call sign
− Describe the abbreviated forms of aircraft call signs
− State when aircraft call signs may be abbreviated
090 02 08 00 Transfer of Communication
− State the procedure for transfer of communication:
- By ground station
- By aircraft
090 02 09 00 Test procedures including readability scale
− State how to test radio transmission and reception
− State the readability scale and its meaning
JAR COMMUNICATIONS
090 02 10 00 Read back and acknowledgement requirements

− State the requirement to read back ATC route clearances
− State the requirement to read back clearances related to runway in use
− State the requirement to read back ‘other clearances’ including conditional clearances
090 02 11 00 Radar procedural phraseology
− Use the correct phraseology for an aircraft receiving a radar service:
- Radar Identification
- Radar Vectoring
- Traffic information and avoidance
- SSR Procedures
090 03 00 00 RELEVANT WEATHER INFORMATION TERMS
090 03 01 00 Aerodrome weather
− List the contents of aerodrome weather reports and state the units of measurement used for each item:
- Wind direction and speed
- Variation of wind direction and speed
- Visibility
- Present Weather
- Cloud amount and type (including the meaning of CAVOK)
- Air temperature and dewpoint
- Pressure Values (QNH, QFE)
- Supplementary information (aerodrome warnings, landing runway, runway condition, restrictions, braking action,
obstructions, windshear warnings, etc)
JAR COMMUNICATIONS
090 03 02 00 Weather Broadcast

− List the sources of weather information available to aircraft in flight
− State the meaning of the abbreviations:- ATIS,VOLMET (SIGMET)
090 04 00 00 ACTION TO BE TAKEN IN CASE OF COMMUNICATION FAILURE
State the action to be taken in the event of communication failure on a controlled VFR flight
− State the frequencies to be used in an attempt to establish communication
− State the additional information that should be transmitted, in the event of receiver failure
− State the SSR code that may be used to indicate communication failure
− State the action to be taken by a pilot with Communication failure in the aerodrome traffic pattern at controlled
aerodromes
090 05 00 00 DISTRESS AND URGENCY PROCEDURES
090 05 01 00 State the DISTRESS procedures
− Define DISTRESS
− State the frequencies that should be used by aircraft in DISTRESS
− State the emergency SSR codes that may be used by aircraft, and the meaning of the codes
− State the action to be taken by the station which receives a DISTRESS message
− State the action by all other stations when a DISTRESS procedure is in progress
− State the content of a DISTRESS signal/message in the correct sequence
090 05 02 00 State the URGENCY procedures
− Define URGENCY
− State the frequencies that should be used by aircraft in URGENCY
JAR COMMUNICATIONS
− State the action to be taken by the station which receives a URGENCY message
− State the action by all other stations when a URGENCY procedure is in progress
− State the content of a URGENCY signal/message in the correct sequence
090 06 00 00 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF VHF PROPAGATION AND ALLOCATION OF FREQUENCIES
Describe the radio frequency spectrum with particular reference to VHF
− State the names of the bands into which the radio frequency spectrum is divided
− State the frequency range of th VHF band
− Name the band normally used for Aeronautical Mobile Service voice communications
− State the frequency separation allocated between consecutive VHF frequencies
Describe the propagation characteristics of radio transmission in the VHF band
Describe the factors which reduce the effective range and quality of radio transmissions
− State which of these factors apply to the VHF band
− Calculate the effective range of VHF transmissions assuming no attenuating factors
090 07 00 00 IFR COMMUNICATIONS
DEFINITIONS
090 07 01 00 Meanings and significance of associated terms
− As for VFR Plus terms used in conjunction with approach and holding procedures
090 07 02 00 Air traffic services abbreviations
− As for VFR Plus additional IFR related terms
JAR COMMUNICATIONS
090 08 00 00 GENERAL OPERATING PROCEDURES

090 08 01 00 Standard words and phrases (relevant R/T)
− State the meaning of standard words and phrases
− Use correct phraseology for each phase of IFR flight:-
- Pushback
- IFR departure
- Airways clearances
- Position reporting
- Approach procedures
- IFR arrivals
090 08 02 00 Radiotelephony call signs for aeronautical (ground) stations including use of abbreviated call signs
− As for VFR
− Name the two parts of the call sign of an aeronautical station
− State the call sign suffixes for aeronautical stations (for example: Approach control – CONTROL)
− State when the call sign may be abbreviated to the use of the suffix only
090 08 03 00 Radiotelephony call signs for aircraft including use of abbreviated call signs
− As for VFR
− State when the suffix ‘HEAVY’ should be used with an aircraft call sign
− Explain the use of the phrase ‘Change your call sign to…
− Explain the use of the phrase ‘Revert to flight plan call sign’
JAR COMMUNICATIONS
090 08 04 00 Read back and acknowledgement requirements

− State the requirement to read back ATC route clearances
− State the requirement to read back clearances related to runway in use
− State the requirement to read back ‘other clearances’ including conditional clearances
− State the requirement to read back data such as runway, SSR codes etc
090 08 05 00 Level changes and reports
− Use the correct term to describe vertical position
- In relation to flight level (Standard pressure setting SPS)
- In relation to Altitude (metres/feet on QNH)
- In relation to Height (metres/feet on QFE)
− Use the correct phraseology when describing vertical position or changes to vertical position
090 09 00 00 ACTION TO BE TAKEN IN CASE OF COMMUNICATION FAILURE
− State the action to be taken in case of communication failure on a IFR flight
− State the action to be taken in case of communication failure on a IFR flight when flying in VMC and the flight will be
terminated in VMC
− State the action to be taken in case of communication failure on a IFR flight when flying in IMC
090 10 00 00 DISTRESS AND URGENCY PROCEDURES
090 10 01 00 State the PAN medical procedure
− Describe the type of flights to which PAN MEDICAL applies
− State the content of a PAN MEDICAL message in the correct sequence
JAR COMMUNICATIONS
090 10 02 00 State the DISTRESS procedures

− Define DISTRESS
− State the frequencies that can be used by aircraft in DISTRESS
− State the action to be taken by the station which receives a DISTRESS message
− State the action by all other stations when a DISTRESS procedure is in progress
− State the content of a DISTRESS signal/message in the correct sequence
090 10 03 00 State the URGENCY procedures
− Define URGENCY
− State the frequencies that should be used by aircraft in URGENCY
− State the action to be taken by the station which receives a URGENCY message
− State the action by all other stations when a URGENCY procedure is in progress
− State the content of a URGENCY signal/message in the correct sequence
090 11 00 00 RELEVANT WEATHER INFORMATION TERMS
090 11 01 00 Aerodrome weather
− As for VFR plus the following:
− RVR
− Braking Action/Friction Coefficient
(state the content of a R/T message referring to RVR and BA)
090 11 02 00 Weather broadcast
− As for VFR plus the following
− State when aircraft routine meteorological observations should be made
JAR COMMUNICATIONS
− State when aircraft Special meteorological observations should be made

090 12 00 00 MORSE CODE
− Identify radio navigation aids (VOR, DME, NDB, ILS) from their morse code identifiers
SELCAL, TCAS, ACARS Phraseology and procedures
JAR PERFORMANCE
032 00 00 00 PERFORMANCE - AEROPLANES

032 01 00 00 PERFORMANCE OF SINGLE-ENGINE AEROPLANES NOT CERTIFIED UNDER JAR/FAR 25 (LIGHT AEROPLANES)
PERFORMANCE CLASS B
032 01 01 00 Definitions of terms and speeds used
− Define the terms:
- Pressure altitude
- Density altitude
- Runway slope
- Climb gradient
- Ceiling
- Gross and Net Performance
- Unaccelerated flight
− Define the speeds:
- IAS
- EAS
- CAS
- VS
- VR
- V2
- VNO
- VNE
- VX
- VY
JAR PERFORMANCE
032 01 02 00 Take-off and landing performance

− Use the performance data given, in conjunction with the relevant JAR to assess the ability of the aeroplane to take off and
land safely within the appropriate aerodrome distances available, taking into account all the relevant factors.
032 01 02 01 − State the forces on the aircraft during take-off
− State the effect on the take-off and landing distances of:
- Aeroplane mass
- Air temperature
- Pressure altitude
- Runway slope
- Wind
- Type of runway surface
- Configuration
032 01 02 02 − Use the flight manual tables or graphs to calculate :
- The take-off distance required for a given weight
- The maximum take-off weight for given distances available and climb requirements
- Height achieved at a given ( obstacle ) distance
- The take-off speeds
- The landing distances required for a given weight
- The maximum landing weight for given distances and landing climb requirements
- The landing speeds
JAR PERFORMANCE
032 01 03 00 Climb and Cruise performance

- State the balance of forces in a steady climb and a steady
descent.
State the forces during steady horizontal flight
032 01 03 01 − Use the performance data given, in conjunction with the relevant JAR to assess the ability of the aeroplane to meet the
requirements for take-off and landing WAT limits and En-Route performance, and determine the achievable cruise speed,
the range, and the endurance for the ambient conditions and recommended power settings.
032 01 03 02 − State the conditions that give maximum angle and maximum rate of climb, with regard to power available and power
required.
− State the effect on the climb gradient, the achievable speed, the range, and the endurance, of :
- Aeroplane mass
- Pressure altitude
- Temperature
032 01 03 03 − State the conditions that give maximum endurance
− Use the performance data given to determine the endurance and the conditions to give maximum endurance.
032 01 03 04 − State the conditions that give maximum range and state the effect of power settings on the range
− Use the data given to determine the range of the aeroplane, and the conditions to give maximum range.
032 02 00 00 PERFORMANCE OF MULTI-ENGINE AEROPLANES NOT CERTIFIED UNDER JAR/FAR 25 (LIGHT TWIN) PERFORMANCE
CLASS B
032 02 01 00 Definitions of terms and speeds
032 02 01 01 − Define the terms and speeds as in 032 01 00 00 and additionally:
JAR PERFORMANCE
- VMCA
- VLO
- VLE
- Critical engine
- Speed stability
032 02 02 00 − State the reasons for the calculation of performance data with regard to safety and economical operation
032 02 02 01 − To determine all aspects of performance under normal conditions
032 02 02 02 − State the effect on take-off and landing distances of :
- Pressure altitude
- Temperature
- Wind
- Aeroplane mass
- Runway slope
- Runway surface conditions
032 02 03 00 Elements of performance
− Discuss the variation of drag with speed for various configurations, mass, pressure altitude, temperature,
Discuss the variation of thrust for jet and propeller engines with speed, pressure altitude, temperature
− To use the performance data provided to calculate :
032 02 03 01 - Take-off and landing distances
- Net Flight Path profiles and assess clearance of obstacles in accordance with JAR
032 02 03 02 − Rate of climb and descent
− State the factors affecting rate of climb, and the conditions that give maximum rate.
JAR PERFORMANCE
− Use the performance data to determine Rate of climb / descent taking account of power setting, speed, and aircraft
configuration
032 02 03 03 − Cruise altitudes and ceiling
− State how the ceiling is determined from power available and power required data.
Define absolute and service ceiling
− Use the performance data to determine :
- The ceiling with all engines operating and with one engine inoperative
- The En-route performance in accordance with JAR
032 02 03 04 − Payload/range trade-offs
Explain the payload ~ range diagram
− Use the graphs or tables to determine the range appropriate to weight and power setting, altitude and temperature.
− Calculate the permissible payload for this range
− Calculate the effect of varying payload on the range
032 02 03 05 − Use the graphs or tables to determine the achievable speed appropriate to weight, altitude, temperature and power setting,
and select the optimum altitude for maximum TAS.
− Calculate the effect on fuel consumption of reduced TAS
032 02 04 00 − Use the performance data provided to calculate operating weights and speeds for all phases of a flight in accordance with
JAR and the prevailing conditions.
032 02 04 01 − Use the Flight Manual to determine all data relating to performance.
JAR PERFORMANCE
032 03 00 00 PERFORMANCE OF AEROPLANES CERTIFIES UNDER JAR/FAR 25-PERFORMANCE CLASS A

032 03 01 00 Take-off
032 03 01 01 Definitions of terms and speeds used
− Define the terms :
- Take-off run available
- Take-off distance available
- Accelerate-Stop distance available
- Stopway
- Clearway
- Balanced field length
- WAT limit
- EPR
− Define the speeds :
- VR V1 V2 V3
- V2 min VEF
- VMCG VMCA VMCL
- VMU VLOF
- VAT VTmax VMBE
- Vmax tyre speed
032 03 01 02 Runway Variables
− Define percentage runway slope, and calculate slope from height and runway length data.
State effect of contaminated runway on take-off performance
JAR PERFORMANCE
− Extract LCN from aircraft data, and compare with runway LCN
032 03 01 03 Aeroplane Variables
− State the effect on Take-off Distance and climb gradient of :
- Weight
- Flap angle
− Use the data provided to calculate Take-off Weight and speeds with reduced power setting
− State the purpose of increased V2 on take-off
− Use the data provided to allow for the effects of anti-ice and ECS bleed air.
032 03 01 04 Meteorological Variables
− State the effect on the Take-off Distance and climb gradient of pressure altitude and temperature.
− State the factors to be applied to the reported wind component
Wind shear
Wing icing
− Use the data provided to calculate permissible take-off weight from contaminated runways.
032 03 01 05 Take-off Speeds
− State the limitations on V1 and V2
− State the effect of ambient and runway conditions on the take-off speeds
− Use the data provided to calculate V1 VR V2 V3 landing gear and flap retraction speeds.
032 03 01 06 Take-off Distances
− State the considerations involved in the selection of Take-off Distance Required
− Use the data given to calculate the Take-off Distance Required and associated speeds for the ambient conditions.
− State the effects on the Take-off Distance of early or late rotation
JAR PERFORMANCE
− State the reasons for ground stall and its effect on Take-off distance.
032 03 02 00 Accelerate Stop Distances
- Define the accelerate –stop distance and requirement for all
engines operating and one engine inoperative
032 03 02 01 Balanced Field Length
− Define Balanced Field Length as applied to :
- Aerodrome Distances
- Aeroplane Distances required
− State the effect of assuming a Balanced Field at an aerodrome which is not a Balanced Field, on Take-off weight and V1
speed
032 03 02 02 − Use the data given to determine the Accelerate-Stop Distance Required for the ambient conditions.
− State the allowances made for recognition of engine failure and decision time.
− State the procedures assumed for wheel braking and reverse thrust.
− Use the data given to determine :
- Brake energy limit speed
- Brake cooling time
- Tyre speed limit
032 03 03 00 Initial climb
- Define gross and net climb performance
State obstacle clearance required on take-off flight path
032 03 03 01 Climb segments
Define the segments of the initial climb with regard to aeroplane configuration, speed and power setting.
JAR PERFORMANCE
− State how the Take-off Weight may be limited by climb gradient

032 03 03 02 − State how best angle and best rate of climb are derived from the thrust and drag curves.
Calculate the climb gradient for a given drag, thrust, mass
State the effect of acceleration and turning on gradient
− Use the data given to determine for all engines operating :
- The climb speed
- The rate/gradient of climb
− State the recommended noise abatement procedure
032 03 03 03 − Use the data given to determine for one engine inoperative :
- The best angle of climb speed
- The best rate of climb speed
- The rate of climb
− State the effect of pressure altitude , temperature, mass, and turning on climb
032 03 03 04 − State the JAR Requirements for initial climb ( Net Take-off Flight Path ) with regard to vertical and lateral clearance
− Use the data given to allow for the effects of turns on the flight path.
032 03 04 00 Climb
032 03 04 01 − Use the Flight Manual charts to determine time to height, allowing for aeroplane mass, and temperature.
032 03 04 02 − Significant air speeds for climb
List the sequence of speeds for take-off and climb
State the limitations with regard to height and speed for
landing gear and flap retraction
− State how the speeds to give maximum angle and maximum rate of climb are determined, and the effect of mass, altitude
and temperature on these speeds.
JAR PERFORMANCE
− State how the optimum speeds will vary with altitude in terms of IAS, TAS, and Mach No.
032 03 04 03 − Use the data provided to determine the speeds for best rate and best angle of climb, with one engine inoperative.
032 03 05 00 Cruise
State the conditions that give optimum range
032 03 05 01 − State how cruise height and aeroplane mass affect range and achievable speed.
− State how maximum cruise altitude may be limited by power or by buffet boundary.
State the effect of mass and bank angle on these limits
- Explain the use of the step climb procedure
032 03 05 02 Cruise Control
− Define range, specific range, specific fuel consumption.
− State the conditions affecting range, and the conditions which give maximum range.
- Explain the difference between max. range speed and the
scheduled long range cruise speed
− State how maximum range will be affected by aeroplane mass
− Use the data provided to determine the range for a given Flight level, mass and cruise speed.
− Define endurance. State the conditions affecting endurance, and the conditions which will give maximum endurance.
− Use the data provided to determine the fuel consumption, and speed for a given power setting.
032 03 05 03 En-route one Engine inoperative
− State the power setting and speed to be used in the event of an engine failure en-route.
JAR PERFORMANCE
− Use the data provided to determine :

- The en-route gradient
- The engine out ceiling
- Distance and time in the descent
− State the JAR requirements for en-route performance and the use of ETOPS.
032 03 05 04 Obstacle clearance en-route
− State the JAR requirements for clearance of obstacles ( vertical and lateral ) and for gradient required overhead the
alternate aerodrome.
− Calculate the drift-down profile, allowing for fuel consumption, and assess clearance of obstacles.
032 03 05 05 − State the requirements for aircraft with three or more engines to consider two engines inoperative.
- Limitations with two engines inoperative
032 03 06 00 Descent and landing
- State the balance of forces in a steady power-on descent
032 03 06 01 − Use the data provided to determine distance, fuel used, and time in the descent.
− State the effect of speed on the descent parameters, and situations requiring maximum rate of descent.
032 03 06 02 Maximum permitted landing mass
− List the factors limiting the landing mass : structural, distance available, climb
032 03 06 03 Approach and landing calculations
− Define landing distance required and landing distance available
JAR PERFORMANCE
− State the effect on the landing distance required of pressure altitude, temperature, aeroplane mass, wind, and runway
slope
State the effect on landing distance of wet and contaminated runways
Explain hydroplaning
Explain PCN limitations
− Use the data given to determine :
- The landing distance required for a given weight
- Maximum landing weight for a given landing distance available
− State the factors which determine the target speed and use the data given to determine VAT and VTMAX
032 03 07 00 − State the regulations relating to alternate aerodromes
− State the requirements for landing climb in relation to the determination of landing WAT limits, and the configuration
appropriate, for the landing climb and the discontinued approach climb.
032 03 07 01 Practical application of an aeroplane performance manual
− Use the flight Manual data to :
- Calculate maximum take-off and landing mass, allowing for all the appropriate regulations
- Take account of slope, wind, pressure altitude, temperature and runway surface conditions
- Determine the relevant speeds for take-off and landing
- Calculate the initial climb gradient and net flight path profiles to assess clearance of relevant obstacles
- Calculate time, distance and fuel used for the climb to cruise altitude
032 03 07 02 Cruise computations
− Use the data provided to determine the power settings and speeds necessary to give maximum range, maximum
endurance and for normal cruise options, and determine the associated fuel consumption.
JAR PERFORMANCE
− State the procedures in the event of engine failure and pressurisation failure, and calculate the range and endurance
resulting from operation at lower altitude.
− State how operation would be affected by ETOPS
− Use the data provided to compare the effect on fuel consumption of different altitudes and aircraft mass.
− Determine the fuel for holding and fuel to alternate
− Allow for the effect on fuel used resulting from reduced altitude following engine failure and loss of cabin pressure.

JAA Air Transport Pilot's Licence Theoretical Knowledge Training Objectives

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

JAA Air Transport Pilot's Licence Theoretical Knowledge Training Objectives

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

JAA AIR TRANSPORT PILOT’S LICENCE

THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING

021 04 Emergency Equipment 090 COMMUNICATIONS

010 01 00 00 INTERNATIONAL AGREEMENTS AND ORGANISATIONS

010 01 01 02 Part II The International Civil Aviation Organisation / ICAO

010 01 01 04 Duties in relation to (ICAO Publications)

010 01 02 01 The International Air Transit- and Air Transport Agreement

− Suppression of Unlawful Acts of Violence at Airports Serving International Civil Aviation

General, Structure 91 / 3922 EWG, 16.12.91 92 / 2407 EWG, 23.7.92

− European Civil Aviation Conference / ECAC

− Multilateral Agreement on Commercial Rights of Non-Scheduled Air Services in Europe,

− JAA / Joint Aviation Authorities

010 01 05 00 Commercial practices and associated rules (leasing)

010 03 00 00 ANNEX 7 – AIRCRAFT NATIONALITY AND REGISTRATION MARKS

− Nationality, common and registration marks to be used

− ACFT Nationality and Registration Marks

010 04 00 00 ANNEX 1 – PERSONNEL LICENSING

010 04 00 00 − JAR-FCL - Flight Crew Licensing

− JAR-FCL 1 / General Requirements

− JAR - FCL 1 / Airline Transport Pilot Licence (Aeroplane) - ATPL(A)

010 05 00 00 RULES OF THE AIR (based on ANNEX 2)

010 05 01 00 − Applicability of the Rules of the Air

010 05 01 00 − General Rules

− Visual Flight Rules / VFR

− Interception of Civil Aircraft

010 06 02 00 Essential Definitions and Abbreviations

010 06 03 00 Departure Procedures

010 06 04 00 Approach Procedures

010 06 04 00 − Approach Procedure Design

010 06 04 00 − Missed Approach

010 06 04 00 − Area Navigation (RNAV) Approach Procedures based on VOR / DME

− Use of FMS / RNAV equipment to follow conventional non-precision approach procedures

010 06 06 00 Altimeter Setting Procedures

010 06 06 00 − Simultaneous Operation on parallel or near-parallel RWY’s

− Describe the consequences following a transponder failure in flight

− Operation of ACAS equipment

010 07 00 00 ANNEX 11 - AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES / ATS

010 07 01 00 − Essential Definitions

010 07 01 02 Air Traffic Control Service / ATC

− Control of persons and vehicles at aerodromes

010 07 01 03 Flight Information Service / FIS

− Applicability and scope of FIS

− Operational FIS broadcasts

− Relationship to other documents

010 07 03 01 − Explain the meaning of the abbreviation ADS

010 07 03 02 Area Control Service / ACC

010 07 03 02 − Emergency and communication failure

010 07 03 03 Approach Control Service / APP

010 07 03 03 − Define the term “Ceiling“

010 07 03 04 Aerodrome Control Service

− Information to ACFT by TWR

− Control of aerodrome traffic / Circuit

010 07 03 06 − Define the term “PSR“

010 08 00 00 AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION SERVICE / AIS ANNEX 15

010 08 01 00 − Aeronautical Information Regulation and Control (AIRAC)

− Aeronautical Information Circulars (AIC)

− Pre-flight and Post-flight Information

− Contents of Aeronautical Information Publication / AIP

010 09 00 00 AERODROMES ANNEX 14, Volume I

010 09 01 01 Aerodrome Data

010 09 01 02 Visual Aids for Navigation

− Indicators and Signaling Devices

010 09 01 03 Visual aids for denoting obstacles